faculty of science and mathematics faculty handbook 1993 › 2011 › 02 › faculty_of... ·...

FACULTY OF

SCIENCE

AND MATHEMATICS

Volume 14 1993

ONNItRSITY OF NEWCASTLE

ARCHIVES SERIAL

The University of Newcastle

Faculty of Science and Mathematics

Handbook

THE UNIVERSITY OF NEWCASTLE New South Wales

LocaUon Address: University Drive, Callaghan

Postal Address: The University of Newcastle NSW 2308

Telephone: (049) 215000

Telex: AA28194 - Library

AA28618 - Bursar

AA28784 - lUNRA (The University of Newcastle Research Associates Limited)

Facsimile: (049) 21.5669

Hours of Business: Mondays to Fridays excepting public holidays 9 am to 5 pm

The University of NewcasUe Calendar consists of the following volumes:

Volume I

Volume 2

Volume 3

Volume 4

Volume 5

Volume 6

Volume 7

Volume 8

Volume 9

Volume 10

Volume II

Volume 12

Volume 13

Volume 14

Volume 15

Legislation

University Bodies and Staff

Faculty of Architecture Handbook

Faculty of Art, Design and Communication Handbook

Faculty of Arts Handbook

Faculty of Economics and Commerce Handbook

Faculty of Education Handbook

Faculty of Engineering Handbook

Faculty of Health Sciences Handbook

Faculty of Law Handbook

Faculty of Medicine Handbook

Faculty of Music Handbook

Faculty of Nusing Handbook

Faculty of Science and Mathematics Handbook

Faculty of Social Science Handbook

Also available are the Undergraduate Guides

This volume is intended as a reference handbook for students enrolling in courses conducted by the Faculty of Science and Mathematics.

The colour band, Topaz BCC4, on the cover is the lining colour of the hood of Bachelors of Science of this University. The colour band, Amethyst BCC 28, in the center of the cover is the lining colour of the hood of Bachelor of Mathematics of this University.

The information in this Handbook is correct as at 9th October 1992.

ISSN 1034 - 4489

Recommended Price: Five dollars and fifty cents plus postage.

Designed by: Marie-T Wisniowski

Typeset. by: Ian Spurr, The Secretariat Division, The University of Newcastle

by: NewcasUe Camera Print

CONTENTS

FACULTY OF SCIENCE AND MATHEMATICS

SECfION ONE FACULTY STAFF

SECTION TWO FACULTY INFORM A nON

SECfIONTHREE UNDERGRADUATE DEGREEIDIPLOMA RULES

Undergraduate DlplornalDegrees offered in the Faculty General Rules

SECfION FOUR

SECfION FIVE

Combined Degree Course Rules Bachelor of Applied Science Environmental Assessment and Management Bachelor of Environmental Science Bachelor of Science Bachelor of Science (A viation) Bachelor of Mathematics

Combined Degree Courses Bachelor of Science (Psychology) Diploma in Aviation Science Diploma In A vlalion Science Rules

APPROVED SUBJECT LISTS

UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE SUBJECT DESCRII'TIONS Guide to Undergraduate Subject Entries Applied Science and Technology Aviation Biological Sciences Chemistry Environmental Science Geography Geology Mathematics Physics Psychology Computer Science Information Science Philosophy: Scientific Method Statistics

SECfION SIX RECOMME:\'DED PROGRAMS

SECfION SEVEN POSTGRADUATE DEGREE RULES

Bachelor of Science (Honours) Bachelor of Science Aviation (Honours) Bachelor of Applied Science (Environmental Assessment and Management) Bachelor of Mathematics (Honours) Graduate Diploma in Environmental Studies Graduate Diploma in Mathematical Studies

1

9

14 14 14 IS 16 18 22 28 31 31 3S 37 37

39

54 54 54 60 68 72 77 78 81 84 9S 97

101 103 103 104

107

114 114 116 118 120 122 124

CONTENTS

Masters Degrees Master of Environmental Studies Master of Mathematics Master of Psychology (Clinical)/Master of Psychology (Educational)

Master of Science Master of Scientific Studies

SECTION EIGHT POSTGRADUATE DEGREE SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS

SECTION NINE SUBJECT COMPUTER NUMBERS

126 126 128 128 130 130

133

147

SECTION TEN GENERAL INFORMATION Iocaled in centre section

PRINCIPAL DATES 1993

ADVICE AND INFORMATION

ENROLMENT AND RE-ENROLMENT

LEAVE OF ABSENCE

ATTENDANCE AT CLASSES

GENERAL CONDUCT

EXAMINATIONS

STATEMENTS OF ACADEMIC RECORD

UNSATISFACTORY PROGRESS - Rules

CHARGES

HIGHER EDUCATION CONTRIBUTION SCHEME (HECS)

LOANS

REFUND OF CHARGES

CAMPUS TRAFFIC AND PARKING

MISCELLANEOUS SERVICES Banking

Cashier

Chaplaincy Service

Community Programmes

Convocation

Co-op Bookshop

Lost Property

Noticcboards

Post Office

Public Transport

Student Insurance Cover

University Computing Services

University Libraries

II

III

V

V

V

v

viii

viii

x

x

xi

xi

xi

xii

xii

xii

xii

xii

xii

xii

xii

xii xii

xiii

xiii

xiv

I il

THE DEAN'S FOREWORD

The Faculty of Science and Mathematics comprises the Departments of Aviation. Applied Science and Technology. Biological Sciences, Chemistry. Geography, Geology. Mathematics, Physics and Psychology.

Undergraduate Degrees handled by the Faculty include the Bachelor of Science, Bachelor of Science ( Aviation), Bachelorof Science (Psychology), Bachelor of Mathematics, Bachelor of Applied Science (Environmental Assessment and Management), Bachelor of Environmental Science and a number of combined degrees with other Faculties.

This Handbook provides details relating to these degrees.

Students enrolled in a Science or Mathematics degree should be aware that they can apply to take subjects in Computer Science (offered within the Faculty of Fngineering) but because of strict quota restrictions on entry to Computer Science 101, may not be successful in gaining a place. Subjects from Stali sties, Inf onnation Science and a number of other disciplines can be pursued within the various degree programs. In the Bachelor of Science and Bachelor of Mathematics degrees, students may take a sequence of subjects from outside the Faculty ,thus combining expertise in basic science and/or mathematics with a wide range of elective areas such as languages and other humanities, accountancy, management, computing and engineering.

Those students entering university for the first time will find the system of instruction vastly different from that in secondary schools. Theresponsibility is placed on the student to extract the maximum benefit from the course. University staff will lecture to you and during that time you are expected to make notes about the materia1 being presented. Some students respond by lTying to take down the lecture verbatim but without understanding, others listen and make notes in outline form, copying down quotations or blackboard materia1, while a minority, overwhelmed by the volume and complexity of the subject matter, sim pi y contempl ate their next social engagement, to their own disadvantage. Two issues will beimportant for your ultimate success. The first is the

development of an efficient note taking system and in Uris you should seek the assistance of the Student Counselling Unit which provides relevant short courses. The second is that, apart from regular tutorials, tests, and final examinations, no one will follow up your com prehension of the lecture material other than yourself. The Faculty expects you to spend at least one hour of your time on private study for every contact hour that you have with University staff. You need toallocate Uris from the very beginning of your course and if you delay the process you will probably never make up the lost time. A well planned, uniform program of work to support your lectures, tutorials and laboratory classes will allow you to develop your understanding of the subjects and enjoy the many other facets of university life.

The quality of your tertiary education depends upon your ability to make efficient use of the University Library. Ensure that you take part in the orientation programs which the Library staff offer at the beginning of every year. Throughout your course the teaching and administrative staff of the University are !"tere to guide you and if you need assistance it is available at a number of levels. DUficulties with particular subjects should bediscussed with the lecturer or tutor concerned or the Year Supervisor in each Department. Problems with your degree structure and progression are the province of the Assistant Deans and the Dean who will give guidance when required. Day to day changes in your current enrolment are handled by the Assistant Registrar who can be found in the School Office which is located in the Science Building adjoining Chemistry.

In a climate where government charges for tertiary education have risen steeply, you must make the most of your time at University by using its resources to the full. Learn to organise your thoughts, expand your mind, and develop your critical faculties to the utmost in order to provide yourself with qUalifications which will lead to asuccessful carccrand satisfying life.

D_C. FINLAY, Dean

,I"",

";'-'. -'------.... '

"--<"<;..:--

SECTION ONE

PRINCIPAL OFFICERS

Vice-Chancellor and Principal Professor K.J. Morgan, BSc, MA, DPhil(Oxf)

Deputy Vice-Chancellor (Academic) Professor M.P. Carter, BA(Nott), PhD(Edin)

Deputy Vice-Chancellor (Administration) L.F. Hennessy, BA(Syd)

Deputy Vice-Chancellor (planning) n.R. Huxley, BA. LittB(NE}, MA. PhD

Pro Vice-Chancellor and Dean of Students Professor K.R. Dutton, MA(Syd), DU(Paris), Officier des Palmes acaMmiques, FACE

Pro Vice-Chancellor (Development) L.R. EaslCQtt, MEd(Syd), PhD(Alberta), BA, DipEd

Deputy President of Academic Senate Professor P.L. Clarke, BEe, PhD(Syd), FCPA, ACIS, ACIM

Dean for Research Professor R.I. MacDonald, BSc, PhD(NSW). FAIP

SCHOOL/FACULTY OF SCIENCE AND MATHEMATICS STAFF Director B.A. Engel, MSc(NE), PhD

Accountant M. Janissen. BCom, MNIA Senior Computer Programmer RJ.Dea:r

Computer Programmers

C.Mason, MA(Camb), MSc(ply)

1. Symon, BSc

T. Wiklendt, BCompSci

nean D.C. Finlay, MSc, PhD(Mclb), MAPsS

Assistant Deans

J.G. Couper, BSc, PhD(NE)

C.E. Lee, BA, PhD(Adel), MAPsS

Assistant Registrar H.R. Hotchkiss, BA, DipEd(NE)

Administrative Assistant K.A. Hodyl, BCom(NSW)

Office Staff N.H. Adams

SECfIONONE FACULTY OF SCIENCE AND MATHEMATICS STAFF

DEPARTMENT OF APPLIED SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY

R. Clark, Teach Cert, BSc, MSc(NSW), FRACI, CChem, MACE (Head of Department)

Senior Lecturers

R.w. Hosken, BSc(WA), MSc(Monash), MBA, PhD

K. McDonald, OAM, MLilt, MA(NE), MEdSlud, FACE, FAAEE,MEIA

Lecturers

L.R. Carlin, BEd. DipAdultEdn, DipFDesign. DipDesign, ACFI

R.G. Fairall, BSc, MEugSc(NSW), GradDip (Malhs) C.S.U Milchell

P.M. Geary, BSc, MSc, DipEd, MEIA,MAWWA

S.A. Grenquist, BA, BS. MSc{Notre Dame)

R.w. Kidd, BSc(NSW), PhD(Macq), MEIA

M.A. Linich, DipTeach (NTC), BSc, MScSlud

J. Ma, BSc(NSW), MSc, PhD(HK), CEug, MIEE, MIE(AuSl)

M.J. Mahony, BA, DipEd, PhD(Macq)

KJ. Sutton, BEdSlud, GradOipEdStud(Special Edue), MEdStud, DipTeach(IndArts)

A. Williams, DipTeaeh(AppArts)(Avondale), BEd(IA)NCAE)

P.I. Williams, BA, DipTeach, MA, PhD

R.M. Williamson-Haydon, BSe(NSW), ATI

Associate Lecturers

H. Farrah, BSc(Qld), DipEd

J. Hayden, BEd, DipTeach (NCAE)

Technical Officers

A. Lieb

J. Wold

Laboratory Craftspcrsons

G. Jenkins

M. Chandler

Laboratory Assistant C. Walker

Laboratory Attendants

R. Davis

J. Elliott

M. Guest

K. Strong

Departmental Office Staff

K Allan

L. Linkla1er

DEPARTMENT OF AVIATION

Professor R.A. Telfer, BA(NSW), MEdAdminHons(NE), PhD, DipEdAdmin(NE) (Head of Department)

Lecturers

D. Christley, BA(Macq) FAIN

N. Crawford, BA DipEd eras)

I. Henley, BEd(Alberta), Adult Edue Cert. (Nova Scotia) MA(Alberta), MEd(Manitoba)

M.J. Ross, BA(Melb), GradDipAppPsych(Chisholm)

A. Ulmer, BSc(Phys), BE(Aero)(Syd) ;2 i

j

SECfIONONE

Technical Officer I. Stephens

Departmental Office Staff L. Gamer

DEPARTMENT OF BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES

Professor B. Boettcher, BSc, PhD(Adel)

Associate Professors

R.C. Jones, BSc(NSW), PhD(Syd)

J.W. Palrick, BScAgr(Syd), PhD(Macq)

T.K. Roberts, BSc(Adel), PhD(Flin)

RJ. Rose, BScAgr(Syd), PhD(Macq) (Head or Department)

Senior Lecturers

B.A. Conroy, BSc, PhD(Syd)

R.N. Murdoch, BSc(NSW), PhD(Syd)

C.E. Offler, BSc, PhD(Adel)

J.C. Rodger, BSc(NSW), PhD(Syd)

Lecturer R.H. Dunstan, BScAgr(Adel), D.PhiI(Oxf)

Honorary Associates

D. McNair

K. Myers, BSc, DSc(Syd)

J.D.stanger, BSc (James Cook), PhD

Associate Lecturers

M. Conroy, BSc, Dip Ed(Syd), PGDip Planl & Wildlife Illus(NCAE)

P. Lake, BSc, MSc(Tor)

M. Lin, MSAgric(Jiangxi), PhD

C.M.R. Pelers, BA, BSc(Syd)

Professional Officers

D.J. Kay, BSc(Adel), PhD

1. Clulow, BSc, BA, PhD

Technical Officers

E. Blajet

R. Campbell

E. Stark

R.J. Tayler

Laboratory Craftsperson J.P. NohUl

Laboratory Assistants

D.L. Brennan

T.D. Frost

B. Hayes

J.J. Nairn

L.D. Pezely

K.H. Stokes


D.J. Snushall

A.N. Bulloch

FACULTY OF SCIENCE AND MATHEMATICS STAFF

3

SECfIONONE

DEPARTMENT OF CHEMISTRY

Professors

KJ. Morgan, BSc, MA, DPhiI(OXf)(personal Chair)

W.FJ. Pickering, MSc, PhD(NSW), DSc, ASTC, FRACI, CChem


K.H. Bell, BSc, PhD(NSW), FRACI, CChem

L.K. Dyall, MSc, PhD(Melb), FRACI, CChem


G.A. Lawnutce, BSc, PhD, DSc(Qld), DipEd(Melb), FRAO, CChem (Head of Department)

Senior Lecturers

RA. Fredlein, BSc, PhD(Qld), MRACI, CChem

M. Maeder, PhD, Habilitation (Basel), MRACI, CChem

E.!. von Nagy-Felsobuki, BSc, PhD, DipEd(LaT), MRACI, CChem

Ledurers

RC. Bums, BSc, PhD(Melb), MRACI, CChem

G.L. Orr, BSc(Qld), PhD(NSW), MRACI, CChem

I.A. van Altena, BSc(Iames Cook), PhD(Alberta)

Associate Lecturers

S.J. Angus-Dunne, BSc

I.A Ferguson, BSc(Syd)

K.A. Grice, BSc

Honorary Research Associate D.AJ. Swinkels, BSc(NSW), PhD(penn), ASTC, FRACI

Senior Technical Officer A.I. Beveridge

Technical Officers

R.F. Godfrey

F. McKenzie

J. Slavek

W.J. Thompson

Laboratory Assistants

B. Watson

T. Williams


E. Slabbert

M.Munns

DEPARTMENT OF GEOGRAPHY

Professor E.A. Colhoun, BA(Bclf), MS(Wis), PhD(Belf), MA(Dub)


H.A. Bridgman, BA(Beloit), MA(Hawaii), PhD(Wis)

J.C.R Camm, MSc(Hull), PhD

R.I. Loughran, BSc(Dunelm), MSe, PhDCNE) (Head of Department)

Senior Lecturers

G.N. McIntyre, BA(Tas), MA(ANU), PhD

J.C. Torner, BScAgr(Syd), MS, PhD(Wis)

H.P.M. Winchester, MA (Oxon), DPhiI(Oxon)

4

SECfIONONE FACULTY OF SCIENCE AND MATHEMATICS STAFF

Lecturers

K.w. Lee, BA(Liv), MA(NE)

P.M. O'Neill, MA(Macq), DipEd(Macq)

Post Doctoral Fellow M.K. Macphail, BSc(Syd), PhD(Tas)

Honorary Associate B.L.Campbell, MSe Honoris causa

Cartographer O. Rey-Leseure

Technical Officer CG. Dever

Departmental Office Staff M.B.Lane

DEPARTMENT OF GEOLOGY

Professor C.F.K. Diessel, DiplGeol, DrRerNa1(Berlin), AAusIMM, FAlE (Personal Chair)


B.A. Engel, MSc(NE), PhD

R. Offier, BSc, PhD(Adel) (Head of Department)

Senior Lecturers

R.L. Boyd, BSc(Syd), PhD(Syd)

P.K. Seccombe, MSc(Melb), PhD(Manit)

W. Collins, BSc(ANU), PhD (LaT)

Lecturer C.V. Murray-Wallace, BA, PhD(Adel)

Honorary Associates

K.H.R. Moelle, ABS, DPhiI(lnnsbruck)

S.SU.Wame, BSc(WA), PhD(NSW)

Professional Officer G.L. Dean-Jones, BA, MSe(Macq)

Senior Technical Officer R. Bale, BSe

Technical Officers

R. Bale, BSe

E. Krupie

I.A. Crawford

Laboratory Assistant H. Ruming, BSe

Departmental Office Staff G.A. MacKenzie

DEPARTMENT OF MATHEMATICS

Professors

C.A. Croxton, BSc(Leicester), MA, PhDCCamb), FAIP, FInstP(Lond)

I. Raeburn, BSc(Edin), PhD(Utah)


W, Brisley, BSc(Syd), MSc (NSW), PhD, DipEd(NE)

1.R Giles, BA(Syd), PhD, DipEd(Syd), ThL

P.K. Smrz, PromPhys, CSe, RNDr(Charles(Prague)

Senior Lecturers

!.M. Benn, BSc(Edin), PhD(Lancaster)

R.F. Berghout, MSc(Syd)

J.G. Ceuper, BSc, PhD(NE)

W.T.F. Lao, ME(NSW), PhD(Syd)

D.L.S. McElwain, BSc(Qld), PhD(York(Can)) 5

SECfIONONE

A.G. Robertson, BSc(Edin), PhD(Newcastle, UK)

B. Sims, BSc, PhD

W.P. Wood, BSc, PbD(NSW), FRAS (Head of Department)

Lecturers

D.A. Pask, BSc, MSc, Phd(Warwick)

W. Summerfield, BSc(Adel), PhD(Flin)

E. Vlachynsky, BSc(Syd), PhD(Syd)

G.A. Willis, BSc(Adel), PhD(Newcaslle, UK)

Associate Lecturers

S. Boswell, BMath, MTICA

N.B. Hannah, BMath, DipMathStud

G. Pettet, BSc, DipEd, BMath

J. Ryan, BMath(Woll)


Research Associate M.E. Laca, BSEE(Uruguay), MA(Santa Barbara), PhD(Berkely)

Professor Emeritus R.G. Keats, BSc, PhD(Adel), DMath(Waterloo), PIMA, FASA, MACS


J. Garnsey, BA(Syd)

L. Steel

R Pease, BEd(Math)(MCAE)

Division of Quantitative Methods

Principal Lecturer W.P. Galvin, BA(Syd), MMath, MEd, MEngSc, PIMA

Senior Lecturer M.J. Williams, BA, MEngSc, DipEd

Lecturers

T. Dalby, MSc(Canl), BMath

J.MacDougall, BSc, MA(Dalhousie), MPhil(Waterloo)

M.J. Roberts, BMath, PhD

S. Seiffer, BChemEng, BMath

Division Office Staff

L. Locker

J. Trayhum

DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICS

Professor R.J. MacDonald, BSe, PhD(NSW), FAIP


B.J. Fraser, MSc(NZ), PhD(Canl), FAJP, FRAS

C.S.L. Keay, MSc(NZ), PhD(Canl), MA(Tor), CPhy" FIP(UK), FAJP, FAAAS, FRNZAS, FRAS, MACS

D.J. O'Connor, BSe, PhD(ANU), FAIP (Head of Department)

P.V. Smith, BSc, PhD(Monash), MAIP

Senior Lecturers

F.T. Bagnall, BSc(NSW), MSc(NE), PhD, MAIP

J.E.R. Cleary, MSc(NSW)

B.V. King, BSc, BE, PhD(NSW)

P.A. McGovern, BE, BSc(Qld), MS, PhD(CalTech), M1EEE, SMlREAust

RH. Roberts, BE(NSW), MSc, ASTC 6

SECTION ONE

Lecturer P.W. Menk, BSc, PhD(LaT), MAIP

Research Associates

H.J. Hansen, MSc, PhD(Nata!)

Y.D. Hu, MSc(USTC), PhD, MAlP

M. Radny, MSc(Wroclaw), PhD(Wroc1aw), PPS(poland), IUVISTA

Y.Shen,PhD

Honorary Research Associates

D. Webster, BSc, PhD J.A. Ramsay, MSc(Melb), PhD, FAIP

Senior Technical Officers

B. Mason

M.K. O'Neill

J.F. Pearson

J.S. Ratcliffe

Technical Officers

T.W.Burns

M.M. Cvetanovski

J.e. Foster

G. Piszczuk

Senior Laboratory Craftsperson B. Stevens

Laboratory Craftspersons

1. Qarke

P. Greig


J.Oyston

N. Smith

DEPARTMENT OF PSYCHOLOGY

Professors

D.C. Finlay, MSc, PhD(Melb), MAPsS (Head of Department)

M.G. King, BA, PhD(Qld), FAP,S

Associate Professor R.A. Heath, BSc, PhD(McM)

Senior Lecturers

M.M. Colton, MA, PhD(NE), MPsych(Clin), MAPsS

M. Hunler, BSc, PhD(Lond), CertEd, MBPsS, MAPsS

N.F. Kafer, BA, PhD(ANU), MAPsS

C.E. Lee, BA, PhD(Adel), MAPsS

S.A. McFadden, BSc, PhD(ANU)

D. Munro, MA(Manc), PhD(Lond), Cert Soc SI(Glas), Dip Data(SA)

H.P. Pfister, BA(Macq), PhD, MAPsS

J.L. Seggie, BA, PhD

J.D.C. Shea, MA(Canl), PhD(Qld) MASH, MACPCP, MASA, M1SNlM

Lecturers

R Brown, BA, PhD, MASA, MlSNlM


7

SECTION ONE

B. Hayes, BSc, BPsyc(CLIN), PhD(NSW)

A. Hea1hcote, BSe, PhD(Queens)

J. Kenanly, BSc, PhD(Qld», MAPsS

S. Provost, BSc(psyc), PhD(NSW)

Associate Lecturer J Spinks, BA. MA(Syd). Dip Sc

Emeritus Professor lA. Keats, BSc(Adel). BA(Melb), AM, PhD(Prin), FASSA, FEPsS, FAPsS

Honorary Associates

M. Arthur, BA, DipP,ych(Syd), MHP(NSW), MAP,S

D.B. Dunlop, ME, BS(Syd), DO, FRSM, MACa

B. Fenelon, BA(Qld), MA, PhD, MAPsS, AAAN, MSPR

J. Miles, BA, PhD

F.V. Smith, MA(Syd), PhD(Lond), FEPsS, FAPsS, CP,ychol

Professional Officer D.F. Bull, BSe

Senior Technical Officers

L. Cooke

R.Gleghom

A.O. Harcombe

J. Lee·Chin, BSc

Technical Officers

D. Golvers, BA

E.M. Huber

P.W.Smith

Laboratory Craftsperson M. Newton


W.N. Mead

S. Harris

L. Davies

8

FACULTY OF SCIENCE AND MATHEMATICS STAFF SECTION TWO

FACULTY INFORMATION

The Faculty of Science and Mathematics comprises the Departments of Applied Science and Technology, Aviation, Biological Sciences, Chemistry, Geography. Geology. Mathematics, Physics and Psychology. The Departments of Computer Science, Physics and Statistics also offer major sequences of qualifying subjects for the degrees of Bachelor of Science and Bachelor of Mathematics in the Faculty of Science and Mathematics.

Tramition Arrangemenls Exceptional Circumstances In order to provide for exceptional circumstances arising in particular transition cases, the Dean may detennine the transition program to be followed.

General Information for New Undergraduates Students embarking on a university course for the first time may find some difficulty in adapting to the new environment. Tertiary education makes a number of demands on students it requires them to be self-disciplined, organized, self-motivated and moreover, responsible for their own course of study. Hence it is important that students become familiar with the University structure, degree courses offered and service organizations (such as the University Counselling Service & Accommodation Service etc.) which offer assistance with study, personal and housing problems.

Often students on first entering University are not certain of their finalfleldofinterest. Infact, it is usually only after the completion of the first year of study that many students finally choose to major in a particular subject. In order to maintain flexibility first year semester subjects (100 level subjects) should be chosen from areas where the student has some previous expertise or special interest. At the same time, they should take note of the degree

requirements. particularly with regard to prescribed subjects, prerequisites and corequisites as set out in the appropriatedegree/ diploma Rules in this handbook.

Students should note that degrees must be structured to include a specified number of 300 level subjects. For exam pie, aBachelor of Science degree must include forty credit points at 300 levels in one Department, and at least forty more credit points a1300 level chosen from subjects approved by Faculty Board. Subject to the Dean's permission, a candidate may be pennitted toeOTol in some subjects from amongst those offered by another Faculty.

Time limits are set on the duration of an undergraduate course as indicated in the appropriate Rules. Maximum workloads are also preset, since limits are placed on the number of subjects students are permitted to undertake in anyone year. For information on these restrictions consult the appropriate degree Rules.

Undergraduate Admission Requiremenls In order to be considered for admission for any qualification other than a postgraduate qualification an applicant shall be required to either

(i) attain such aggregate of marks in approved subjects at the New South Wales Higher School Certificate examination as may be prescribed by the Senate from time to time; or

(ii) otherwise satisfy the Admissions & Progression Committee thal the applicant has reached a standard of education sufficient to enable the approved course to be pursued.

Assumed Knowledge for Entry to the Faculty There are no prescribed prerequisites for entry to the Faculty of Science and Mathematics; students are advised that lectures will commence on the assumption that all students will haveachieved the level indicated.

9

SECfIONlWO

Subject

A vialion 109-\15

Biology 101

Chemistry lOJ

Assumed Knowledge

2~unit, 3~unit or 4~unit Mathematics. Also, 2~unit Physics or 4~unit Science (including the Physics 'make~up' eleccives)with alevel of perfonnance placing them in the top 50% of the candidature for these subjects.

Higher School Certificate Chemistry or 4-unit Science is appropriate and students are advised to include CHEMIOI and CHEMI02 in their University program. However, some lectures in background chemistry will be offered by the Department of Community Programmes prior to the start of the first semester. Attendance at this Preparatory Course is optional.

At least Mathematics (2~unit course), Chemistry (2~unit course), and Physics (2~ unit course), with ranking in the top 50% in

each case.

Geography HSC Geography would be an advantage, but the course is a foundation course that does not require having undertaken Geography at school.

Geology 101 2-units of Science (preferably Chemistry) and at least 2-units of Mathematics.

Mathematics 111 Mathematics (2-unit course), or higher.

Mathematics 102 Mathematics at 3-unit level with a score of at least 120/150 in 3 -unit, or have passed Mathematics 111

Physics 101 HSC2-unit Mathematics withapeIfonnance level in the top 30% of the candidature for

this subject.

Physics 102 HSC 3~unit Mathematics mark of at least 110/150. Physics 2-unit or Science 4-unit with a perfonnance level in the top 50% of candidature for these subjects.

Mature Age Entry

Entry into the University is available to persons who will be at least 21 years of age by 1st March of the year in which enrolment is sought and who have completed a limited New South Wales Higher School Certificate Program. Subjects which will enable entry into the Faculty of Science and Mathematics include four units selected from Physics, Chemistry, Mathematics (3~unit course preferred), and 4-unit Science. For entry into the Bachelor of Mathematics degree, include 3~unit mathematics (attaining a result of at least 120/150) and one other subject recognised for admission purposes. For other degrees, the subjects should be presented as 2~unit courses with a result in the top 50%.

Limit on Admission

Where the Council is of the opinion that a limit should be placed upon the number of persons who may in any year be admitted to a course or part of a course or to the University, it may impose such a limit and determine the manner of selection of those persons to be so admitted.

10

FACULTY INFORMATION

Enrolment Requirements

(a) In order to be admitted an applicant shall

(i) satisfy appropriate Oiploma/Degree Rules as set out in

Section Three;

(ii) receive approval to enrol;

(iii) complete the prescribed enrolment procedures; and

(iv) pay any fees and charges prescribed by the Council.

(b) An applicant may be admined under such conditions as the Admissions & Progression Committee may detennine after considering any advice offered by the Dean of the Faculty.

(c) Except with the approval of the Faculty Board a candidate for a qualification shall not enrol in a subject which does not count towards that qualification.

(d) A candidate for a qualification shall not enrol in a course or part of acourse for another qualification unless the candidate has first obtained the consent of the Dean of the Faculty and, if another Faculty is responsible for the course leading to that other qualification, the Dean of that Faculty provided that a student may enrol in a combined degree course approved by the Senate leading to two qualifications.

(e) A candidate for any qualification other than a postgraduate qualification who is enrolled in three quarters or more of a normal full-time program shall be deemed to be a full-time student whereas a candidate enrolled in either a part-time course or less than three-quarters of a full-time program shall be deemed to be a part-time student.

Enrolment Status

A candidate for a qualification shall enrol as either a full-time student or a part-time student.

Combined Degree Courses

The decision to take a combined degree course is usually taken at the end of a student's first year in his or her original degree course, in consultation with the Deans of the Faculties responsible for the two degrees. Pennission to embark on a combined degree course will normally require an average of credit levels in first

year subjects.

Non-Degree Students

Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in these Rules, the Admissions & Progression Committee may on the recommendation of the Head of a Department offering any part of acomse pennit a person, not being a candidate for aqualifical.ion of the University, to enrol in any year in that part of the course on payment of such fees and charges as may be prescribed by the Council. A person so enrolling shall be designated a 'non-degree'

student.

Faculty Policy in Regard to Credit for Courses Completed Elsewhere The Faculty Board may grant Credit in specified and unspecified semester subjects, aggregating to a maximum of 120 credit points, to a candidate in recognition of work completed in this university or another approved tertiary institution, on conditions determined by the Faculty Board. Such Credit to be granted may

SECfIONlWO

include no more than 100 credit points at 100 level, 40 credit points at 200 level or 20 credit points at 300 level.

Additional Information Advisory Services

Students requiring specific advice on the selection or content of subjects in the course should seek help fro~ members of the Faculty. In particular. advice should be sought from first, second and third year subject co-ordinators in each Department, Heads of Departments, the Assistant Deans or Dean.

Enquiries regarding enrolment, variation to program and general administrative problems should be directed to the Faculty Secretary in the School of Science and Mathematics in the Science Building.

For personal counselling and study skills training it is suggested that students should consu1t the University Counselling Service.

Student Participation in University Affairs

Provision is made for students to be elected as members on Departmental and Faculty Boards as well as to other University bodies. Election of student members usually takes place in Semester One and students should watch Departmental notice boards for details of election of student members.

The Faculty Board of the Faculty of Science and Mathematics has provision for the election of four student members.

Subject Timetable Clashes

Students are strongly advised to check on possible timetable clashes before enrolling. Clashes may force students to take those subjects in different years. Although academic staff are always willing to advise students, it is the student's responsibility to ensure that chosen subjects may be studied concurrently. Science and Mathematics students taking subjects from other Faculties must examine the timetable to ensure that clashes do not exist in their proposed courses.

Although the timetable for one particular subject may clash with that of another, this may not necessarily mean that this combination cannot bedone. Often an arrangement can be made by one or both Departmental representatives to overcome this problem. Therefore, see the Departmental representatives before deciding upon your final subject combinations.

Workload

The expected maximum workload for students devoting most of their time to degree studies is 40 credit points per semester. In the case of a 20 credit point subject offeredoverafull year, the work load will be rated as 10 credit points per semester. Enrolment in excess of 40 credit points per semester can only be exceeded in exceptional circumstances by students with a good academic record and requires the pennission of the Dean.

Students with external commitments, such as part-time employment, should enrol in fewer subjects. Such commitments cannot be taken into consideration for an extension of time for written work, or failure to attend examinations some of which may be scheduled on Saturday mornings.

Student Academic Progress All students are reminded of the need to maintain satisfactory progress and, in particular, attention is drawn to the Rules

FACULTY INFORMATION

Governing Unsatisfactory Progress. The following should be borne in mind

1. The Facu1ty Board requires that students shall pass at least two semester subjects in Uteir first yearoffull~time attendance orin their first two years of part-time attendance.

2. The Faculty Board requires that students shall have passed al least eight semester subjects by the end of the first two years of full~time altendance or four years of part-time attendance.

3. The Faculty Board has detennined that a student who fails a semester subject twice shall not be permitted to include that subject in the candidate's future program, and that a student who fails four semester subjects twice shall be excluded from further enrolment in the Faculty, unless the candidate shows cause to the satisfaction ofthe Faculty Board why the candidate should be penniued to do so.

4. Students should note that a terminating pass can be awarded only at the 100 level or 200 level and that no more than four tenninating passes, may count ina student's program (with no more than two at the 200 level.)

Note: Where there is a change in attendance status, two part· time years will be taken as theequivalent of one full-time year for the purposes of this policy.

Examination Rules

These Rules are printed in the centre grey pages of this Handbook.

Unsatisfactory Progress

Additional Rules are printed in the centre grey pages of this Handbook.

Record of Failure

An applicant who has a record of failure at another tertiary institution shall not be admitted unless thalapplicant first satisfies

(a) the Faculty Board or the Graduate Studies CommiUeefor the Faculty as appropriate, in the case of a postgraduate qualification; or

(b) the Admissions & Progression Committee, in the case of any other qualification that there is a reasonable prospect that the applicant will make satisfactory progress.

Re-enrolment

A candidate for a qualification shall be required to re~eruol annually during the period of this candidature. Upon receiving approval to re-enrol the candidate shall complete the prescribed procedures and pay the fees and charges determined by the Council not later than the date prescribed for payment.

Teacher Training Courses Prerequisites for Diploma in Education Units

Students who intend to proceed to a Diplomain Education should familiarise themselves with the prerequisites for units offered in the course.

These prerequisites arc stated in terms of subjects of the University of Newcastle. Applicants whose courses of study have inclllded subjects which are deemed f orthis purpose to provide an equivalent foundation may be admitted to the Diploma course as special cases.

11

SECfIONlWO

In the Diploma course the Problems in Teaching and Learning units are grouped as follows:

<a) Secondary English History Social Science (Geography, Commerce, Social Science) Mathematics Science Modern Languages (French, German, Japanese)

(b) Primary

Prerequisites

For information about prerequisites, students are invited to contact the Faculty Secretary, Faculty of Education. This contact should be made in the early stages of a degree course.

All secondary methods

Normally at least 50 credit points (20-100;30-200 level) of a degree in the main teaching area and 20 credit points (20-100 level) of a degree in any subsidiary area. Modem Languages, Drama, Science and Social Sciences have additional specific requirements.

Primary method

At least 50 credit points (20-100;30-200 level) of a degree in a specified area and 20-100 level credit points of a degree in each of two others. The specified area is usually a secondary teaching area.

Further details may be obtained from the Faculty Secretary, Faculty of Education.

Role of Faculty Board, Faculty of Science and Mathematics The role of the Faculty Board, Faculty of Science and Mathematics is defined by Faculty Board Rule 7 which stales:

Subject to any resolution of the Councilor the Academic Senate, and any provisions of any Rules, a Faculty Board shall:

(a) encourage and supervise the teaching, assessment and research activities of the Faculty;

(b) make recommendations to the Academic Senate on any matter affecting the Faculty;

(c) determine the grades of pass to be used for subjects offered in the courses for which the Faculty is responsible;

(d) consider the examination results recommended in respect of each of the candidates for which the Faculty is responsible and takeaction in accordance with the prescribed procedures;

(e) make recommendations on matters concerning admissions. enrolment and progression in the courses for which the Faculty is responsible to the Admissions and Progression Committee; and

(f) deal with any matter referred to it by the Academic Senate.

Professional Recognition Graduates of the University of Newcastle enrolled in the Faculty of Science and Mathematics are recognized by a number of different professional societies depending on their degree majors.

12

FACULTY INFORMATION

Applied Science and Technology

Graduates from the Bachelorof AppliedScience (Environmental Assessment and Management) program may apply for membership of the Environment Institute of Australia. The demand for graduates in areas of environmental monitoring. assessment and management is steadily growing throughout Australia. as the Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) process has penneated the requirements for development approvals connected with almost all new developments for mining, industry, agriculture,andUIbanexpansion. Surveysofnaturalanddisturbed ecosystems are on the agenda for government at local, state and naliona11evels.

Biological Sciences

The Australian Institute of Biology Incorporated was inaugurated in 1986. Its objectives are to represent the Biology profession in Australia., to promote education and research in Biology and to improve communication between biologists of different disciplines. The Institute confers on its members a status similar to that for other Australian professional institutes. Membership grades are Fellow, Member. Associate and Student. Members and Fellows are able to indicate this by the appropriate letters after their qualifications. Fellowship requires distinction in Biology and nomination from the existing membership. Membership requires a first or second class Honours degree in Biology and three years relevant experience. or a pass degree with five years experience, or a Masters degree with two years relevantex perience, or aPhD. An Associaterequires anappropriate pass degree or contribution to the advancement of Biology.

Chemistry

Graduates holding a Bachelor of Science majoring in Chemistry, may join the Royal Australian Chemical Institute which has several categories of membership according to qualification and experience.

Geology

Graduates holding a Bachelor of Science (Honours) majoring in Geology may join the Geological Society of Australia Inc., the Australian Instituteof Geoscientists and The Australasian Institute of Mining & Metallurgy which has several categories of membership according to qualification and experience.

Mathematics

For employment as a Mathematician. graduates should have at least one majorin Mathematics. An Honours degree is preferred by many employers. The profession is represented by the Australian Mathematical Society.

Physics

For employment as a physicist. students must have a minimum of an ordinary Bachelor of Science degree with a major in Physics. An Honours degree in Physics or combined Physics/Mathemalics would be preferred.

Physics as a profession is represented by the Australian Institute of Physics. Membership is limited to graduates with a minimum j of a major in Physics. The Australian Institute of Physics has a ~

number of grades of membership which are related to experience ,I! as a physicist. There is a grade of membership for students currently working towards a degree. The Institute monitors

SECfIONTWO

courses in Physics at tertiary institutions and judges them in terms of suitability for admission to membership of the Australian Institute of Physics. The Institute also responds on behalf of physicists to matters relating to physicists and their role. There are no formal conditions for registration as a physicist.

Psychology

Graduates holding a Bachelor of Science majorlt1g in Psychology or a Bachelor of Science (Psychology) may join the Australian Psychological Society. Membership normally requires a four year degree in Psychology. Provision is also made for Student Subscribers and Affiliates.

FACULTY INFORMATION

13

SECTION THREE

UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE AND DIPLOMA RULES

Undergraduate Diploma & Degrees offered in the Faculty of Science and Mathematics Bachelor of Applied Science Environmental Assessment and Management

Bachelor of Science (Aviation)

Bachelor of Environmental Science

Bachelor of Science

Bachelor of Science (psychology)

Bachelor of Mathematics

Diploma in Aviation Science

Rules Governing Academic Awards

1 Application of Rules

These rules shall apply to all the academic awards of the University other than the degrees of Doctor and Master.

2 Interpretation

14

(1) In these rules, unless the context or subject matter otherwise indicates or requires:

"award" means the degree, diploma (including graduate diploma and associate diploma) or graduate certificate for which a candidate is emolled;

"course" means thetotal requirements of the program of study approved by the Academic Senate to qualify a candidate for the award as set out in the schedule;

"Dean" means the Dean of a Faculty;

"department" means the departmentoffering a particular subject and includes any other body so doing;

"Faculty" means the Faculty responsible f orthe course;

"Faculty Board" means the Faculty BoardoftheFaculty;

"schedule" means the schedule to these rules relevant to the award listed under the name of the Faculty;

"subject" means any part of acourse for which a result may be recorded.

(2) A reference in these rules to a Head of Department shall be read not only as a reference to the person appointed to that office but also, where a subject is not offered by a department as such. to the person approved by the Academic Senate to undertake the responsibilities of a Head of Department for the pUIpOse of these rules.

3 Admission

An applicant for admission to candidature for an award shall satisfy therequirements of the University governing admission to and enrolment in a course and any other additional requirements as may be prescribed in the schedule for that award.

4 Subject

(1) For the purpose of a course, a subject may be classified at a level detennined by the Faculty Board.

(2) Each subjcct shall be allotted a credit point value by the Academic Senate after considering the advice of the Faculty Board of the Faculty in which the department is

located.

(3) The Academic Senate, after considering a request from a Faculty Board. may detennine that a subject be not offered during a particular academic year.

(4) The Faculty Board shall approve the subjects for the award. Any change in the list of approved subjects which will have effect in the following year shall be i approved by a date detennined by the Academic Senate. ~

(5) Where there is any change in the list of approved

SECfION THREE

Faculty Board shall make all reasonable provision to permit students already enrolled in the course to progress normally.

5 Enrolment

(1) A candidate may not enrol in any year in a combination of subjects which is incompatible with the requirements of the timetable for that year.

(2) Except with the pennission of the Dean and subject to any contrary provision in the schedule

(a) acandidate may not enrol in subjects totalling more than the equivalent of 40 credit points in any semester;

(b) a candidate sha1l not enrol in a subject which does not count towards the award; and

(c) a candidate shall not be penniued to enrol in any subject which is substantially equivalent to one which that candidate has previously counted towards a degree or diploma.

(3) A candidate for an award shall not enrol in a course or part of a course for another award in this University unless consent has first been obtained from the Dean and, if another Faculty is responsible for the course leading to that other award, the Dean of that Faculty, provided that a student may enrol in a combined course approved by the Academic Senate leading to two awards.

6 Prerequisites and Corequisites

(1) The Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Head of the Department may prescribe prerequisites and/or corequisites for any subject offered by that Department.

(2) Except with the pennission of the Dean granted afLer considering any recommendation made by the I lead of the Department, no candidate may enrol in a subject unless that candidate has passed any subjects prescribed as its prerequisites at any grade which may be specified and has already passed or concurrently enrols in or is already enrolled in any subjects prescribed as its corequisites.

(3) Except with the pennission of the Dean, a candidate will not have satisfied a prerequisite if the prerequisite subject has not been completed in the preceding eight ca1endar years.

,(4) A candidate attaining a Terminating Pass in a subject shall be deemed not to have passed that subject for prerequisite purposes.

7 Credit

(1) A Faculty Board may grant credit to a candidate in specified and unspecified subjects, on such conditions as it may determine, in recognition of work completed in the University or another institution approved by the Faculty Board for this purpose.

(2) Except as may be otherwise provided in the schedule, a candidate shall not be given credit for more than sixty five percent of the (olal number of credit points required to complete the course.


8 Subject Requirements

(1) The subjects which may be completed in the course for the award shall be those approved by the Faculty Board and published annually as the Approved Subjects section of the schedule.

(2) A candidate enrolled in a subject shall comply with such academic and practica1 requirements and submit such written or other work as the Department shall specify.

(3) ExceptasotherwisepermittedbytheHeadofDepartment. any material presented by a candidate for assessment must be the work of the candidate and not have been previously submitted for assessment.

(4) To complete a subject acandidate shall satisfy published departmental requirements and gain a satisfactory result in such assessments and examinations as the Faculty Board shall require.

9 Withdrawal

(1) A candidate may withdraw from a subject or the course only by infonning the Academic Registrarin writing and the withdrawal shall take effect from the date of receipt of such notification.

(2) A student shall be deemed not to have enrolled in a subject if that student withdraws from the subject

(a) in the case of a semester length subject. before the Higher Education Contribution Schemecensusdate for that semester. or

(b) in the case of a full year subject, before the first HigherEducationContributionSchemecensusdate for that academic year.

(3) Except with the permission of the Dean

(a) a candidate shall not be permitted to withdraw from a subject after the relevant date which shall be:

(i) in the case of a semesterlengtb subject, the last day of that semester, or

(ii) in the case of a full year subject, the last day of second semester, and

(b) a candidate shall not be permitted to withdraw from a subject on more than two occasions.

10 Absence

Subject to any provision in the schedule, a candidate in good academic standing in the course

(a) may take an absence of one year from the course, or

(b) with the permission of the Dean , may take an absence of two consecutive years from the course without prejudice to any right of the candidate to re-enrol in the course following such absence.

11 Qualification for the Award

To qualify forthe award acandidale shall satisfactorily complete the requirements governing the course prescribed in the schedule.

12 Combined Dcgrce Programs

(1) Where so prescribed for a particular course, a candidate may complete the requirements for one Bachelordegree

15

SECTION TIIREE

in conjunction with another Bachelor degree by completingacombined degree program approved by the Academic Senate on the advice of the Faculty Board and, where the other Bachelor degree is offered in another Faculty. the Faculty Board of that Faculty.

(2) Admission to a combined degree program shall be restricted to candidates who have achieved a standard of perfonnance deemed satisfactory for the purposes of admission to the specific combined degree course by the Faculty Board(s).

(3) The work undertaken by a candidate in a combined degree program shall be no less in quantity and quality than if the two courses were taken separately.

(4) To qualify for admission to the two degrees a candidate shall satisfy the requirements for both degrees, except as may be otherwise provided.

13 Relaxing Provision

In order to provide for exceptional circumstances arising in a particular case, the Academic Senate on the recommendation of the Faculty Board may relax any provision of these rules.

SCHEDULE - BACHELOR OF APPLIED SCIENCE ENVIRONMENTAL ASSESSMENT AND MANAGEMENT

1 Qualification for the Degree

(I) To qualify for admission to the degree, candidates shall pass subjects totalling 240 credit points selected from the list of Approved Subjects, including the prescribed subjects unless the Faculty Board approves otherwise in a particular case.

(2) The subjects passed shall include:

(a) allcast 80 credit points from 100 level subjects;

(b) allcast 60 credit points from 200 level subjects;

(c) allcast 80 credit points from 300 level subjects; and

(d) 20 credit points from approved electives.

2 Credit

(1) Credit may be granted for studies completed which qualified the candidate for an award of the University or for studies completed at another institution up to a total of 120 credit points including not more than:

(a) 100 credit points at the 100 level;

(b) 40 credit points at the 200 level; and

(c) 20 credit points at the 300 level.

(2) Credit may be granted for all subjects completed in the University which have not already been counted towards a completed award.

3 Time Requirements

16

(1) Except with the permission of the Faculty Board. a candidate shall complete the course within nine years of study.


(2) A candidate granted credit shall be deemed to have commenced the course from a date determined by the Dean al the time al which credit is granted.

SECfION THREE UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE AND DIPLOMA RULES

APPROVED SUBJECTS

The subjects approved by the Faculty Board for the award are: Code Name Credll Points Prerequisile Corequisile

100 Level Prescribed

EAMSIOI Concepts of Ecology 10 EAMSl11 Systems Approach in Ecology 10 EAMS101 EAMS102 Monitoring and Statistics i 10 EAMS112 Monitoring and Statistics II 10 EAMSI02 EAMC103 Contemporary Environmental Philosophy 10 EAMCI13 Environment and Human Values 1 10 EAMC103 EAMSI04 Environmental Planning and Pollution

Control Legislation 10 EAMS114 Local and Regional Environmental Issues 10


EAMS201 Agricultural Systems 10 EAMS101/111 EAMS211 Industrial and Urban Systems 10 EAMSI01/111 EAMS201 EAMS202 System Dynamics and Data Analysis I 10 EAMS I 02/112 EAMS212 System Dynamics and Data Analysis II 10 EAMS 102/112 EAMS202 EAMC203 Environment and Human Values II 10 EAMC103/113 EAMC213 Development and Social Impact Assessment 10 EAMC103/113 EAMC203 20 cp from

EAMS290 Hydrology and Soils Analysis 10 EAMSI02/112 EAMS291 Water Resources Management 10 EAMSI02/112 EAMS290 EAMS292 Plant Systematics and Plant Ecology 10 EAMSIOI/111 EAMS293 Anima1 Systematics and Animal Ecology 10 EAMSIOI/11I EAMS292 or

other approved subjects at 200 level offered within the University. if approved by the Dean.


EAMS301 Environmental Management I 10 EAMS201, EAMS21I EAMS311 Environmental Management II 10 EAMS201, EAMS21I EAMS301 EAMS302 Specialist Study 20 All Prescribed 200 level

subjects EAMS304 Regiona1 and National Environmental Issues 10 EAMSI04/114 EAMS314 Environmental Impact Assessment 10 EAMS104/114

20 cp from

EAMS390 Soil Consetvation and Management 10 EAMS290, EAMS291 EAMS391 Water and Soils: Applications and Modelling 10 EAMS290, EAMS291 EAMS390 EAMS392 Aorn Component of Environmental Impact

Assessment 10 EAMS292, EAMS293 EAMS393 Fauna Component of Environmental Impact

Assessment 10 EAMS292, EAMS293 EAMC303 Occupational Hygiene and Toxicology 10 EAMC203, EAMC213 EAMC313 Social Aspects of Environmental Health 10 EAMC203, EAMC213 EAMC303 or

other approved subjects at 300 level offered within the University. if approved by the Dean.

Footnotes

The normal patternfor the Bachelor of Applied Science Enyiromnental Assessmenl and Managemenl degree is 80 credit poinlsat 100 leyel, 80 credit poinls at 200 leyel and 80 credit points at 300 level.

Leave of Absence - For the purposes of Rule LO of the Rules Governing Academic Awards, a candidate shall be deemed to be in good standing if, at the conclusion of the year of last enrolment in the course, that candidate was eligible to re·enrol without restrictions.

17

I ;

SECfION THREE

SCHEDULE - BACHELOR OF ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE


(I) To qualify for admission to the degree. candidates shall pass subjects totalling 240 credit points selected from the list of Approved Subjects including the prescribed subjects unless the Faculty Board approves otherwise in a particular case.

(2) the subjects passed shall include:

(a) at least 80 credit points from 100 level subjects;

(b) atleast 60 credit points from ZOO level subjects; and

(c) at least 80 credit points from 300 level subjects.

2 Credit






3 Time Requirements

18

(1) Except with the pennission of the Faculty Board. a candidate shall complete the course within nine years of study.

(2) A candidate granted credit shall be deemed to have commenced the course from a date detennined by the Dean at the time at which credit is granted.

UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE AND DIPLOMA RULES SECfION THREE

APPROVED SUBJECTS

The subjects approved by the Faculty Board for the award are: Code Name Credit Points

100 Level Prescribed BIOL101 Plant & Animal Biology

B10Ll02 CHEM101 CHEM102 GEOG101 GEOLIOI SCEN101 STATIo! or GEOLl02

Cell Biology. Genetics & Evolution Chemistry 101 Chemistry 102 Introduction to Physical Geography The Environment Environmental Investigations I

Introductory Statistics

Earth Materials

200 Level Prescribed SCEN201 Environmental Investigations II SCEN202 Environmental Planning & Pollution Control SCEN203 Water Resources Management

300 Level Prescribed SCEN301 Environmental Project

10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

10

10 10 10

10 SCEN302 GEOG311

Environmental Impact Assessment Techniques 10 Hydrology 10

UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE AND DIPLOMA RULFS

PrerequisiJe

GEOLIOI

SCENIOI

SCEN201 SCEN202 GEOG20I, GEOG203

Corequisile

At the 200 and 300 Level the prescribed subjects are taken from one of the three strands of Bioloeical Sciences, Chemistry or Earth Science as follows:

Prescribed subjects for Biological Sciences strand

200 Level B10L207 Ecology 10 B10LlOI, BIOLl02 CHEM261 Environmental Chemistry 10 CHEM1OI,CHEMI02 10 cp from GEOLl02 Earth Materials 10 GEOL101 PHYSI02 Physics 102 10 See ' GEOG203 Biogeography & Climatology 10 GEOGlo!

GEOG204 Geomorphology of Australia 10 GEOG101 20 cp from

B10L201 Biochemistry IO B10LlO!, B10Ll02 BIOL202 Animal Physiology 10 BIOLIOI, B10Ll02 BIOL206 Plant Physiology 10 B10LlOI, BIOLI02

300 Level B10L311 Environmental Biology IO B10L203 or B10L207 CHEM361 Environmental Chemistry 10 CHEM261 10 cp from

PHYS205 Scientific Measurement Principles, Processes and Applications IO PHYS102

GEOG304 The Biosphere & Conservation IO GEOG203

GEOG305 Climatic Problems 10 GEOG203

GEOL320 Geology of Quaternary Environments 10 GEOL2130rGEOO204

20 cpfrom B10L302 Reproductive Physiology 10 TwoBIOL2oo

BIOL303 Environmental Plant Physiology IO TwoBIOL200

BIOL304 Whole Plant Development 10 TwoBIOL200

BIOL31O Microbiology 10 BIOLZOI & one other BIOL200

19

~' ,

•

SECfION THREE

Cod. Name Credit Points

BIOL312 Animal Development 10

Prescribed subjects for Chemistry strand

200 Level

CHEM211 Analytical Chemistry 10 CHEM261 Environmental Chemistry 10

BIOL207 Ecology 10

10 cp from CHEM221 Inorganic Chemistry 10 CHEM231 Organic Chemistry 10 CHEM241 Physical Olemistry 10

10 cp from GEOLl02 Earth Materials 10 PHYSI02 Physics 102 10 GEOG203 Biogeography & Climatology 10 GEOG204 Geomorphology of Australia 10

300 Level BIOL311 Environmental Biology 10 CHEM311 Analytical Chemistry 10 CHEM361 Environmental Chemistry 10

10 cp from CHEM313 Industrial Olemical Analysis 5 CHEM314 Trace Analysis in Environmental

Systems Not in 1993 CHEM321 Inorganic Chemistry 10 CHEM33I Organic Olemistry 10 CHEM341 Physical Olemistry 10 CHEM342 Electrochemical Solar Energy Conversion 5 CHEM343 Molecular Spectroscopy

10 cp from PHYS205 Scientific Measurement Principles,

Processes and Applications GEOG304 The Biosphere & Conservation

GEOG305 Climatic Problems

GEOL320 Geology of Quaternary Environments

Prescribed subjects for Earth Science strand

200 Level GEOLl02 Earth Materials or STATIO! GEOG203 GEOG204

20 cp from PHYS102 B10L207 CHEM261 GEOL213

20

Introductory Statistics Biogeography & Climatology Geomorphology of Australia

Physics 102 Ecology Environmental Chemistry Ancient Environments & Organisms

5

10 10

10 10

10

10 10 10

10

10 10 10

UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE AND DIPLOMA RlIT..ES

Prerequisite CorequisiU

TwoBIOL200

CHEMIOI.CHEMI02 CHEMIOI. CHEM102 BIOLIOI. BIOLl02

CHEMIOI. CHEM102 CHEMIOI. CHEM102 CHEMIOI. CHEM102

GEOLlO!

See ' GEOGIOI GEOG101

BIOL203 or B10L207 CHEM211 CHEM261

CIIEM211

CHEM211 CHEM221

CHEM23 I CHEM241. MATH102 orMATH112 CHEM241. MATHI02 orMATHI12 CHEM241

PHYS102 GEOG203

GEOG203 GEOL213 or GEOG204

GEOLIOI

GEOGIO! GEOGIOI

See' BIOLIOI. BIOL102 CHEMIOI. CHEM102 GEOLl02

I

SECTION THREE

Cod.

300 Level GEOG304

GEOL320 GEOG305

20 cp from PHYS205

BI0L311 CHEM361

Footnotes

Name

The Biosphere & Conservation Geology of Quaternary Environments Climatic Problems

Scientific Measurement Principles, Processes and Applications Environmental Biology Environmental Chemistry Elective

Credit Points

10 10 10

10 10 10 10


Prerequisite

GEOG203 GEOL213 or GEOG204 GEOG203

PHYSI02 BIOL203 0 BIOL207 CHEM261

CorequislU

See Course Director for approval

Tm normal pattern for tm Bachelor ofEnvironmenJal Science degree is 80 credit poinJsallOO level, 80 credit poin/sat 200 level and 80 credit points at 300 level.

Leave of Absence -For the purposes of Rule 10 of the Rules Governing Academic A wards, a candidate shaJJ be deemed to be in good standing if, at tm conclusion of the year of las/ enrolment in tm course, that candidate was eligible to re·enrol without restrictions.

I Advisory entry requirement HSC 3 unit Mathematics with a mark of at least 110/150 and 2 unit Physics or 4 unit Science with a perfonnance in the top 50% of candidature for these subjects.

21

SECfION THREE

SCHEDULE - BACHELOR OF SCIENCE

Interpretation

1. In this schedule, "discipline" means a branch of learning recognised as such by the Faculty Board.

Qualification for the Degree

2. (1) To qualify for admission to the degree, candidates shall pass subjects totalling 240 credit points selected from the list of Approved Subjects and comprising -

(a) at least 60 credit points from 100 level subjects;

(b) at least 60 credit points from 200 level subjects;

(c) at least 80 credit points from 300 level subjects.

(2) The subjects shall be chosen in accordance with the following conditions -

(a) the 60 credit points at the 100 level shall be comprised of at least 20 credit points chosen from each of three disciplines;

(b) a sequence of at least 20 credit points at the 100 level, 30 credit points at the 200 level and 40 credit points at the 300 level shall be chosen from a single discipline;

(c) not more than 160creditpointsmaYbechosenfrom a single discipline; and

(d) subjects at the 300 level may not be chosen from more than three disciplines.

Credit

3. (1) Credit may be granted for studies completed which qUalified the candidate for an award of the University or for studies completed at another institution up to a total of 120 credit points including not more than -





Time Requirements

4. (1) Except with the permission of the Faculty Board, a candidate shall complete the course within nine years of study.

(2) A candidate granted credit shall be deemed to have commenced the course from a date determined by the Dean at the time at which credit is granted.

Combined Degrees

5. A candidate may undertake one of the foUowing combined degree programs in accordance with Rule 12 of the Rules Governing Academic awards, namely -

22

Science/Arts

Science/Computer Science

Science!Mathematics

Science/Engineering.


;: , , ,

SECTION TIIREE UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE AND DIPLOMA RULES

APPROVED SUBJECTS

The subjects approved by the Faculty Board for the award are in the discipline areas of

Biological Sciences, Chemistry, Geography, Geology, Mathematics, Physics and Psychology and are listed in Group A Subjects.

Code Name

GROUP A SUBJECTS

BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES BIOLIOI Plant & Animal Biology B10LI02 Cell Biology, Genetics & Evolution BIOL201 Biochemistry BIOL202 Animal Physiology BIOL204 Cell & Molecular Biology

BIOL205 Molecular Genetics BIOL206 Plant Physiology

BIOL207 Ecology

BIOLJOI Cell Processes

BIOLJ02 Reproductive Physiology

BIOLJ03 Environmental Plant Physiology BIOL304 Whole Plant Development BIOL305 Immunology

BIOL307 Molecular Biology of Plant Development

BIOLJ09 Molecular Biology BIOL31O Microbiology

B10LJll Environmental Biology

B10LJ12 Animal Development

CHEMISTRY CHEM101 Chemistry 101 CHEM102 Chemistry 102 CHEM211 Analytical Chemistry CHEM221 Inorganic Chemistry CHEM23 I Organic Chemistry CHEM241 Physical Chemistry CHEM251 Applied Chemistry CHEM261 Environmental Chemistry

CHEM311 Analytical Chemistry CHEM312 Chemometrics

CHEM313 Industria] Chemical Analysis CHEM314 Trace Analysis in Environmental

Systems CHEM321 Inorganic Chemistry

Credit Points

10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

Not in 1993 10 10 10 10

Notin 1993

10 10

10

10

10 10 10 10 10 10

Not in 1993 10 10 5

5 Not in 1993

10

Prerequisite

BIOLI01,BIOLI02 BIOLIOI, BIOLI02 BIOLI01, BIOLI02 BIOLI01, B10LI02 BIOLIOI, B10LI02 BIOLI01, BIOLI02 Students who have completed BIOL203 are not eligible to do this subject BIOL201 & one BIOL200 TwoBIOL200 TwoBlOL200 TwoBIOL200 TwoBIOL200 Two BIOL200 incl. one of BIOL201 or B10L204 orBIOL205 BIOL201 and B10L205 BIOL201 & one other BIOL200 (BIOL204 advisable)

BIOL207 or BIOl203 Students who have completed BI0L.306 are not eligible to do this subject Two BIOL200. Students who have completed BI0L308

CorequuiJe

are not eligible to do this subject

CHEMIOI, CHEMI02 CHEMlOl, CHEMI02 CHEMIOI, CHEMI02 CHEMIOI, CHEMI02 CHEMIOI, CHEMI02 CHEMIOI, CHEMI02 CHEM211 CHEM211, MATHI020r MATH112 CHEM211 CHEM211

CHEM221

23

SECf!ON THREE UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE AND DIPLOMA RULES SECTION TIIREE UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE AND DIPLOMA RULES

Cod. Name Credit Poinls Prerequisile CorequisiU Cod. Name Credit Polnls Prerequisite Conqllisile CHEM322 Metal-Metal Bonding & Cluster GOOL315 Sedimentology 10 GEOL2!2 & GOOL2I3

Chemistry 5 CHEM221 GOOL316 Geology of Fuels 10 GOOL213 CHEM323 Bioinorganic Coordination Chemistry 5 CHEM221 GOOL317 Resource & Exploration Geology 10 GOOL212 & GOOL214 CHEM331 Organic Chemistry 10 CHEM23 I GOOL318 Geology Field Course 318 5 GOOL2I3 CHEM332 Heterocyclic Chemistry 5 CHEM23 I GOOL319 Geology Field Course 319 5 GEOL216 & GOOL3 I3 CHEM333 Organic Reaction Mechanism Nolin 1993 CHEM23 I GEOL320 Geology of Quaternary En"vuonments 10 GEOL2I3 or GEOG204 CHEM334 Identification of Natural Compounds 5 CHEM23 I GEOL321 Groundwater & Soils Not in 1993 CHEM335 Organic Spectroscopy 5 CHEM23 I CHEM341 Physical Otemistry 10 CHEM24I, MATHI02 MATHEMATICS

orMATHII2 MATHIII Mathematics 111 10 2 unit HSC Mathematics CHEM342 Electrochemical Solar Energy 5 CHEM241, MATHI02 MATHII2 Mathematics 112# 10 MATHIII

Conversion 5 or MATH112 MATHI02 Mathematics 102# 10 See 2 or MATH)) 1 CHEM343 Molecular Spectroscopy 5 CHEM241 MATHI03 Mathematics 103 10 See 2 or MATHl02 CHEM361 Environmental Chemistry 10 CHEM261 or (MATHIII & GEOGRAPHY MATHII2) GEOGIOI Introduction to Physical Geography 10 See' MATH201 Multivariable Calculus 5 (MATHI02 & MATHI03) GEOGI02 Introduction to Human Geography 10 See' or (MATH I II &MATHII2) GEOG201 Methods in Physical Geography 10 GEOGIOI or (MATHI02 & Permission GEOG202 Methods in Human Geography 10 GEOGI02 of the H.O.D.J). GEOG203 Biogeography & Climatology 10 GEOGIOI MATH202 Partial Differential Equations 1 5 MATH201 MATH203 GEOG204 Geomorphology of Australia 10 GEOGIOI MATH203 Ordinary Differential Equations 1 5 (MATHl02 & MATHI03) GEOG207 Population, Culture & Resources 10 GEOGI02 or (MATH I II &MATHII2)

GEOG208 Cities & Regions 10 GEOGI02 or (MATH 1 02 & Permission

GEOG301 Advanced Methods in Physical Geography 10 GEOG201 plus either of the H.O.D.J).

GEOG203 or GEOG204 MATH204 Real Analysis 5 (MATHI02 & MATHI03)

GEOG302 Advanced Methods in Human Geography 10 GEOG202 plus either or (MATHI II &MATHII2 & MATHI03) GEOG205 or GEOG206

MATH205 Analysis of Metric Spaces 5 MATH204' GEOG304 The Biosphere & Conservation 10 GEOG203 MATH206 Complex Analysis 1 5 (MATHI02 & MATHI03) or MATH201 GEOG305 Climatic Problems 10 GEOG203

(MATH III & MA THII2) GEOG306 Geography of Australia: An 10 GEOG202 plus either or (MATHI02 & Permission

Historical Perspective GEOG205 or GEOG206 of H.O.D.J) GEOG309 Society & Space 10 GEOG202 plus either MATH207 Complex Analysis 2 5 MA TH206 & MA THI03

GEOG205 or GEOG206 MATH209 Algebra 5 MATH2184

GEOG31O Directed Studies in Human Geography 10 GEOG202 plus either MATH210 Geometry 1 5 (MATHI02 & MATHI03) GEOG205 or GEOG206 or (MATH II I &MATHII2

GEOG311 Hydrology 10 GEOG201 GEOG203 &MATHI03) GEOG315 Production, Work & Territory 10 GECXJ202 plus either MATH211 Group Theory 5 (MATHI02 & MATHI03)

GEOG205 or GEOG206 or (MATHII 1 &MATHII2

GEOG316 Directed Studies in Physical Geography Not in 1993 GECXJ201 plus either & MATHI03) GE0G203 or GEOG204 MATH212 Discrete Mathematics 5 MATHI02or MATHl03

GEOLOGY or (MATHII 1 & MATHII2)

GOOLlOI The Environment 10 MATH213 Mathematical Modelling 5 (MATH 102 & MATHI03)or GEOLl02 Earth Materials 10 GEOLIOI (MATH III & MA THII2) GOOL211 Optical Mineralogy 5 GEOLl02 MATH214 Mechanics 5 (MATHI02 & MATHI03) GOOL212 Introductory Petrology 10 GEOL211 or (MATHIII & MATHI12 GOOL213 Ancient Environments & Organisms 10 GEOLl02 & MATHI03) GOOL214 Geological Structures & Resources 10 GEOLl02 MATH215 Operations Research 5 MATHI02or MATHI03 GOOL215 Geology Field Course 215 10 GEOLl02 or (MATH II I & MATHII2) GEOL216 Geology Field Course 216 5 GEOL215 MATH216 Numerical Analysis 5 (MATHI02 & MATHI03) GOOL311 Igneous Petrology & Crustal Evolution 10 GEOL312 or (MATHIII & MATH! 12 GOOL312 Metamorphic Petrology 10 GEOL212 & COMPIOI) or (MATHIII GEOL313 Structural Geology & Geophysics 10 GEOL214 & MATHlI2 & MATHI03) GEOL314 Stratigraphic Methods 10 GEOL213

24 25

SECTION THREE

Cod.

tMATHZI7

tMATHZIS

MATH301

MATH302 MATH303

MATH304

MATH305

MATH306

MATH307

MATH30S

MATH309 MATH310 MATH311 MATH312

MATH313

MATH314 MATH315

MATH316

MATH317 MATH31S

PHYSICS PHYS101 PHYSIOZ PHYS103 PHYS201 PHYS20Z PHYS203 PHYS205

PHYS301

PHYS30Z

26

Name

Linear Algebra 1

Linear Algebra 2

Logic & Set Theory

General Tensors & Relativity Variational Methods and Integral Equations Ordinary Differential Equations 2

Partial Differential Equations 2

Fluid Mechanics

Quantum & Statistical Mechanics

Geometry 2

Combinatorics Functional Analysis Measure Theory & Integration Algebra

Numerical Analysis (Theory)

Optimization Mathematical Biology

Industrial Modelling

Number Theory

Topology

Physics 101 Physics 102 Physics 103

Credit Points

5

5

Nolin 1993

Not in 1993 Not in 1993

10

10

10

10

\0

Not in 1993 10

Not in 1993 10

10

10 10

Not in 1993

Not in 1993 10

10 10 10

Quantum Mechanics & Electromagnetism 10 Mechanics & Thermal Physics 10 Solid Slate & Atomic Physics 10 Scientific Measurements Principles, Processes & Applications 10 Mathemalical Methods & Quantum Mechanics 10

Electromagnetism & Electronics 10


Prerequisile

MATHIOZ or (MATH11 I &MATHllZ) (MATHI02 & MATHl03) or (MATH111 & MATH11Z &MATHI03)

20 c.p. from 200 level MATH incl. one of MATH204, 209, Zl1, ZIZ, ZIS' MATH201 MATHZIS' MATH201 MATHZ03 MATH204' MATH201 MA TH203 MATH204' MATHZIS' MATH201 MATH202 MA TH203 MA TH204' MATH201 MATHZ03 MA TH204' MA TH206 MATH201 MATHZ03 MATH206 20 c.p. from 200 level MATH incl. one of MATH209, MATHZII, MATHZIS' MATHZIS' MATHZ05 MATH205 MATH2184 & one of MATH209 MATHZ\o MATHZll MATH201 MATHZ03 MATH204' MATHZIS' MATH201 MATHZIS' MA TlU01 MA TH203 MATHZ13 MATH201 MATH20Z MATHZ03 MATHZI3 MATH216 & Permission ofH.O.D.

30 c.p. from 200 level MATH MA TH2045 or MA TH205

Sec' See 10r PHYS101

PHYS\oZ MATH \03 PHYS \03' MATHIOZ PHYSI03' PIIYS201

PHYS\oZ PHYSZOI MATHZOI, MATH203 PHYS201 MATH201

Corequisile

(Advisory) MATH207


Code Name Credil Points Prerequisile

PHYS203 PHYS301 PHYS20Z MATH201 PHYS302

Corequisile

PHYS303 PHYS304 PHYS305

PSYCHOLOGY

PSYCI01 PSYCI02 PSYC201

PSYC202 PSYC203 PSYC204 PSYC205 PSYC206 PSYC301

PSYC302 PSYC303 PSY004 PSY005 PSY006 PSY007 PSYOOS

PSY009

Atomic, Molecular & Solid Stale Physics 10 Statistical Physics & Relativity 10 Nuclear Physics & Advanced Electromagnetism 10

Psychology Introduction 1 . Psychology Introduction 2 Foundations for Psychology

Basic Processes DevelopmentaJ & Social Processes Individual Processes Applied Topics in Psychology 1 Applied Topics in Psychology 2 Advanced Foundations for Psychology

Independent Project Basic Processes 1

Basic Processes 2 Individual Processes Advanced Social Processes

\0

\0 \0 \0 \0 10

Not in 1993 Not in 1993

\0

Advanced Applied Topics in Psychology 1 Advanced Applied Topics in Psychology 2

Topics in Neural Science

\0 \0 10 \0 \0 10

\0 10

GROUP B SUBJECTS

PSYCI01 PSYCI02 PSYC102 PSYCI02 PSYC102 PSYCI02 PSYCI02 PSYC201, PSYC202 & PSYC203 PSYC201 PSYC201 PSYC201

PSYC201 PSYC201

PSYC201 PSYC201 PSYC201

PSYC201 PSYC201 PSYC201 PSYC201 PSYC201

PSYOO1 PSYOO1

PSYOO1 PSYOO1 PSYOOI PSYOO1 PSYOO1 PSYOO1

Group B Subjects may be chosen from subjects offered in courses leading to other degrees of the University, and must be approved by the Dean. Footnotes The normal pattern/or the Bachelor 0/ Science degree is 80 credit points at 100 level, 80 credit points at 200 level and 80 credit points at 300 level. Leave 0/ Absence-For the purposes a/Rule 10 a/the Rules Governing Academic Awards, a candidate shall be deemed to be in good standing if, at the conclusion 0/ th£ year of 1o.st enrolment in the courSt!, that candidate was eJigiblt! to re-enrol withoUl restrictions.

I Students should notc that GEOGI01 and GEOGI02 are prerequisites for a major study in Geography, and for admission to Geography Honours GEOG401.

1 Fntry requirement HSC 3 unit Mathematics with a mark of at least 120/150. 3 This option is for students who take MATH103 in second semester. ~ MA TH208 in 1990.

5 Students who have passed Mathematics I in 1989 or before do not need MA TH204. 6 Advisory entry requirement HSC 2 unit Mathematics with a performance in the top 30% of candidature. 7 Advisory entry requirement HSC 3 unit Mathematics with a mark of at least 110/150 and 2 unit

Physics or 4 unit Science with a performance in the top 50% of candidature for these subjects. • Students achieving a credit level or better in PIIYSI01 and PHYSI02 may be admitted with the approval of the llead of Department. # Credit cannot be obtained for both MATH112 and MATHI02 t Credit cannot be obtained for both MATH217 and MATH218

27

SECfION TIIREE

SCHEDULE- BACHELOR OF SCIENCE (AVIATION)


(1) To qualify for admission to the degree, candidates shall pass subjects totalling 240 credit points selected from the list of Approved Subjects and comprising:

(a) at least 60 credit points from 100 level Group A subjects;

(b) at least 60 credit points from 200 level subjects of which 50 credit points shall be from Group A; and

(c) at least 80 credit points from 300 level subjects of which 40 credit points shall be from Group A.

2 Credit

(1) Credit may be granted for studies completed which qualified the candidate for an award ofthe University or for studies completed at anolherinstitution up to a total of 120 credit points.


3 Time Requirements

28

(1) Except with the permission of the Faculty Board, a candidale shall complete the course within nine years of study.

(2) A candidate granted credit shall be deemed to have commenced the course from a date detennined by the Dean at the time at which credit is granted.

UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE AND DIPLOMA RULES SECTION THREE

APPROVED SUBJECTS

The subjects approved* by the Faculty Board for the award are:

GROUP A SUBJECTS

Code Name Credit Points

100 Level AVIAI09 Introductory Meteorology 5

AVIAIIO Introductory Navigation 5

AVIAl11 Introductory Aerodynamics 5

AVIAI13 Aircraft Performance & Systems 5

AVIA114 Right Rules & Procedures 5

AVIA115 Reciprocating Engines 5

AVIA116 Commercial Meteorology 5

AVIA117 Navigation 5

AVIA118 Aerodynamics 5

AVIAI20 Aviation Law, Commercial Right Rules & Procedures 10

AVIA121 Aircraft Systems & Propulsion 5

200 Level AVIA207 Aviation Meteorology 5 AVIA208 Instrument Navigation 5

AVIA209 Long Range Navigation 5

AVIA210 Compressible Aerodynamics 5

AVIA211 Jet Engines 5

AVIA213 Aircraft Structures & Materials 5 AVIA214 Jet Aircraft Right Planning 10 AVIA218 Advanced Aircraft Performance 5

AVIA219 High Altitude Meteorology and Forecasting 5 AVIA222 Management of Aviation 5 AVIA223 Aviation Computing and Electronics 5 300 Level AVIA306 Advanced Aircraft Operations 10

AVIA310 Advanced Navigation 10

AVIA312 Applied Aerodynamics 5 AVIA315 Advanced Aviation Management 5 AVIA317 Aviation Climatology 5 AVIA318 Aircraft Stability and Control 5 AVIA320 Aviation Instruction Practicum I 5 AVIA321 Aviation Instruction Practicum II 5

GROUP B SUBJECTS

100 Level AVIA112 Introduclory Human Factors 10 AVIA119 Aviation Psychology & Medicine 5 AVIA123 Aircraft Performance & Loading 5

200 Level

AVIA212 Human Factors 10 AVIA220 Aircraft Fatigue Management 5 AVIA221 Human Perrormance in Multi-Crew Operations 5


Prerequlsile

AVIAI09 AVIAll0

AVIAlll

AVIA114

AVIA116 AVIAI17 AVIA117 AVIA118 60 cp A VIA 1 00 level 60 cp A VIAl 00 level AVIA117 AVIA123 AVIA207 AVIA120 AVIA121

AVIA214 AVIA209 A VIA318 A VIA223 AVIA222 AVIA207

AVIA118

AVIA308

AVIA112 AVIA113

AVIA119 AVIA213 AVIA212

Coreq"lslU


29

SECfION THREE

Code

300 Level AVIA305

AVIA30S

AVIA3II

AVIA314

AVIA316

Footnotes

Name

Aircraft Design Aviation Instruction

Advanced Aviation Instruction

Directed Study

Right Deck PerfolDlance

Credit Points

5 10 10

10

5


Prerequisile

AVIA2I3

60 cp A VIA 200 level

AVIA30S

At least two of the following: A VIA306 AVIA30S AVIA310

AVIA31S

AVIA221

Coreq"lslU

AVIA3IS

The normal pal/ern/or the Bachelor of Science (Aviation) degree is SO crediJ points at }OO level, 80 credit points at 200 level and 80 credit points at 300 level.

Lea'le of Absence - For the purposes of Rule 10 of the Rules Governing Academic Awards, a candidate shall be deemed to be in good standing if, at the conclusion of the year 0/ last elU'o/ment in 1M cOUl'se. that candidate was eligible 10 re·enrol without restrictions.

* Refers to the list of approved subjects in the Schedule - Bachelor of Science, Group A Subjects.

30

SECf10N THREE

SCHEDULE- BACHELOR OF MATHEMATICS

1 Qualincation for the Degree

(1) To qualify for admission to the degree a candidate shall pass subjects totalling 240 credit points from the list of Approved Subjects and comprising:

(aJ not more than SO credit points from 100 level subjects of which 20 credit pointS shall be from Group A;

(b) at least 70 credit points from 200 level subjects of which:

(i) at least 25 credit points shall be from Group A;

(ii) at least 5 credit points shall be from Group B subjects; and

(iii) at least a further 30 credit points shall be from Group B and/or Group C~

(c) at least 80 credit points from 300 level subjects of which:

2 Credit

(i) at least 40 credit points shall be from Group A; and

(ii) at least a further 40 credit points shall be from Group A and/or Group C.

(1) Credit may be granted for studies completed which qUalified the candidate for an award of the University or for studies completed at another institution up to a total of 120 credit points including not more than:




(2) Credit may be granted for all subjects completed in the University which have not already been counted toward s a completed award.

3 Time Requirements

(1) Except with the permission of the Faculty Board. a candidate shall complete the course within nine years of study. from its commencement.

(2) A candidate who has been granted credit shall bedeemed to have commenced the course from a date detennined by the Dean at the time at which credit is granted.

4 Combined Degrees

A candidate may undertake one of the following combined degree programs in accordance with Rule 12 of the Rules Governing Academic awards, namely:

Mathematics/Arts;

Mathematics/Commerce;

Mathematics/Engineering;

Mathematics!Economics;

Mathematics/Computer Science;

Mathematics!Surveying;

Mathematics/Science.


31

SECfION THREE UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE AND DIPLOMA RULES SECTION TIlREE UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE AND DIPLOMA RULES

APPROVED SUBJECTS Code Name Credil Points Prerequisite Corequisile

The subjects approved· by the Faculty Board for the award are: MATH314 Optimization 10 MATH201 MATH21S'

GROUP A SUBJECTS MATH315 Mathematical Biology 10 MATH201 MATH203 MATH213

Code Name MATH316 Industrial Modelling Not in 1993 MA TH20! MA TH202

CrediJ Points Prerequisite Corequisilt MATH203 MATH213 MATHl02 Mathematics 1021 10 See20rMATHIli MATH216 & Pennission MATHI03 Mathematics 103 10 See2 or MATHI02 ofH.Q.D.

or (MATH 11 I & MATH311 Number Theory Not in 1993 30 c. p. from 200 level MATH

MATHI12) MATH31S Topology 10 MA TH204' or MA TH205 MATH112 Mathematics 1121 10 MATHI1 I STATIO! Statistical Inference 10 STAT201 STAT202 MATH201 Multivariable Calculus 5 (MATHI02 & MATHI03) MATH201

or (MATHII1 &MATHI12) STATI02 Study Design 10 STAT2O! STAT202

or (MATHI02 & Permission STATI03 Generalized Linear Models 10 STAT201 & STAT202 ofH.O.D.') Advisory ST A T301

MATH203 Ordinary Differential Equations 1 5 (MATHl02 & MATHI03) STATI04 Time Series Analysis 10 STA 1'201 & STA T202 or (MATH111 &MATHI12) Advisory ST A T301 or (MATHI02 & Permission ofH.O.D') GROUP B SUBJECTS

MATH204 Real Analysis 5 (MATHI02 & MATHI03) MATH213 Mathematical Modelling 5 (MATH 102 & MATHI03) or (MATH111 &MATHI12 or (MATHI1I & & MATHI03) MATHlI2)

MATH206 Complex Analysis 1 5 (MATHI02 & MATHI03) MATH201 Mechanics 5 (MATH 102 & MATHI03) MATH214 or (MATHI11 &MATHI12) or (MATH 11 I &MATHI12 or (MATHI02 & Permission & MATHl03)

ofH.O.D.') MATH215 Operations Research 5 MA THI 02 or MA THI03 MATH21S Linear Algebra 2 5 (MATHI02 & MATHI03) or (MATHI11 &MATHI12)

or (MATH 11 I &MATHlI2 GROUP C SUBJECTS

&MATHI03) MATH301 Logic & Set Theory Not in 1993 20 credit points from MATHII1 Mathematics 111 10 2 unit HSC Mathematics

200 level MATH incl. one MATH202 Partial Differential Equations 1 5 MATH20! MATH203

of MATH204, MATH209, MATH205 Analysis of Metric Spaces 5 MATH204'

MATH211, MATH212, MATH207 Complex Analysis 2 5 MATH206 & MATHl03

MATH21S' MATH209 Algebra 5 MATH2IS' MATH302 General Tensors & Relativity Not in 1993 MATH201 MATH21S' MATH210 Geometry 1 5 (MATH 102 & MATHI03) MATH303 Variational Methods and Not in 1993 MATH201 MATH203 or (MATHI 11 &MATHI12

Integral Equations MATH204s & MATHI03)

MATH304 Ordinary Differential Equations 2 10 MATH201 MATH203 MATH211 Group Theory 5 (MATH 102 & MATHI03)

MATH204' MATH21S' or (MATHI1 1 &MATHI12

MATH305 Partial Differential Equations 2 10 MA TH201 MA TH202 & MATHI03)

MA TH203 MA TH204' MATH212 Discrete Mathematics 5 MATHI020rMATH103

MATH306 Fluid Mechanics 10 MATH201 MATH203 Advisory or (MATHI1 1 &MATHlI2)

MA TH204' MA TH206 MATH207 MATH216 Numerical Analysis 5 (MATHI02 & MATHI03)

MATH307 Quantum & Statistical Mechanics 10 MA TH201 MA TH203 or (MATHI1 1 &MATHII2

MATH206 & COMPlOl) or (MATHII 1

MATH30S Geometry 2 10 2Oc. p. from 200 level MATH & MATHlI2 & MATHI03)

incl.one of MATH209 PHYSICS

MATH21I MATH21S' PHYS201 Quantum Mechanics & Electromagnetism 10 MATHI03 PHYS103'

MATH309 Combinatorics Nolin 1993 MATH21S' PHYS202 Mechanics & Thennal Physics 10 MATHI02 PHYSI03'

MATH310 Functional Analysis 10 MATH205 PHYS203 Solid Stale & Atomic Physics 10 PHYS20!

MATH311 Measure Theory & Integration Not in 1993 MATH205 PHYS205 Scientific Measurement Principles,

MATH312 Algebra 10 MATH2184 & one of MATH209 Processes and Applications 10 PHYSI02

MATH210 MATH211 PHYS301 Mathematical Methods & Quantum Mechanics 10 PHYS201 MATH2O! MATH203

MATH313 Numerical Analysis (Theory) 10 MATH201 MATH203 PHYS302 Electromagnetism & Flectronics 10 PHYS201 MATH201

MATH204'MATH21S' PHYS303 Atomic, Molecular & Solid Stale Physics 10 PHYS203 PHYS301 PHYS304 Statistical Physics & Relativity 10 PHYS202 MAT1I201

32 33

"

SECfION THREE UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE AND DlPLOMA RULES

Code Na",~ endil POUt" Prer~quisil~

PHYS305 Nuclear Physics &: Advanced Electromagnetism 10 PHYS302

STATISTICS

STATIO! Mathematical Statistics9 10 MATHl030rSTATl01 IL MATH 1 12 (or equivalent level of Mathematics)

STATIOZ Re&ression Analysis 10 STATIO! orSTATlO! & MATH1l2lMATHI02 or equivalent level of Mathematics

STATI03 Queues & Simulation 5 MATH1l2lMATHI02 STAT204for or eqUivalent BSe deere-

STATI04 Non-parametric Statistics 5 STATIOl orSTATlOl STAT203 for & MATHll21 MATH10Z BSe deere-or equivalent STAT203 for

STATI05 Engineerine Slalisticst 5 MATH1l20r MATH10Z COMPUTER SCIENCE COMPZ01 Advanced Data Structures 5 COMPZ05 & MATH212 COMP202 Computer Architecture 5 COMPZ03 COMPZ03 Assembly Language 5 COMPI01 or COMP212 COMP204 Proerammine Language Semantics 5 COMPZ05 COMPZ05 System Proeramming 5 COMPI010rCOMP212 COMP206 Theory of Computation 5 COMPI01 COMP212 MATH212 COMP212 Introduction to Programmine 5 COMP241 Cognitive Science 10 COMP3O! Compiler Desiifi 10 COMP201 COMP3OZ Artificial Intellieence 10 COMPI01 or COMP212 COMP303 Computer Networks 10 COMPZ01 COMP304 Database Design 10 COMP201 COMP305 Algorithm Desien & Analysis 10 COMPZ01, COMP206 COMP306 Computer Graphics 10 COMP201 MATH216 &

either MATH217 or MATH218 COMP307 Software Engineering PrincipleslO 10 COMP2Ol COMP308 Operating Systems 10 COMPZ01 COMP202 Footnotes The normal paltern/or tM Bachelor 0/ Matlwmatics Degree is 80 cruiit points at}OO level, 80 credit poin/s at 200 l~vel and 80 credit pointsal 300 i~vel.

Leave of Absence -For lIu! purposes of Rule }O o/t~ Ruks Governing Academic Awards, a candidiJt~ shall be deefMd to be in good standing if, at IN conciwsion O/IN year of last enrolnwnl in the COlUse, that candidate was eligible to r~-enrol wilhoUl restrictions.

I Credit cannot be obtained forbolh MATHI12and MATHI02

2 Entry requirement HSC 3 Wlit Mathematics with a mark of at least 120/150.

3 This option is for students who take MATH103 in second semester.

• MATH208 in 1990. !i Students who have passed Mathematics I in 1989 or before do oot need MA TH204.

6 Advisory entry requirement: HSC 2 unit Mathematics with peIfonnance in the top 30% of candidature.

7 Advisory entry requirement: HSC 3 unit Mathematics with a mark of alleast 110/150 and 2 Unit Physics or 4 Unit Science with a peIfonnance in the top 50% of candidature for these subjects.

• Students achievine a Credit level or better in PHYSI0t and PHYSI02 may be admitted with approval of the Head of Department. 9 Credit cannot be obtained for both STAT201 and STAT205.

10 COMP307 requires attendance at lectures in Semester 1 and completion of a Project report in Semester 2.

• Other approved subjects may be chosen from the schedules for the degrees offered elsewhere in the University, if approved by the Dean.

34

SECTION THREE

SCHEDULE- BACHELOR OF SCIENCE (pSYCHOLOGy)

1 Interpretation

In this schedule, "discipline" means a branch of leamina reco&nised as such by the FaQllty Board.

2 QualiOcation for the Degree

(1) To qualify for admission to the dearee. a candidate shall pass subjects totalling 320 credit points from the Hst of Approved Subjects and comprising:

(a) at least 60 credit points from 100 level subjects of which:

(i) 20 credit points shall befrom GroupA subjects; and

(ii) 40 credit points shall be comprised of 20 credit points from each of two disciplines,

(b) at least 60 credit points from 200 level subjects of which 40 credit points shall be from Group A subjects;

(c) at least 80 credit points from 300 level subjects of which 60 credit points shall be from Group A subjects; and

(d) 80 credit points from 400 level subjects taken from Group A subjects.

3 Grading of the Degree

(1) The degree shall be conferred as an ordinary de&ree except that, where the peIformance of a candidate has reached a standard determined by the Faculty Board to be of sufficient merit, the degree shall be conferred with Honours.

(2) There shall be three classes of Honours, namely Class I, Class II and Class III. Class II shall have two divisions, namely Division 1 and Division 2.

4 Credit





(2) Credit may be granted for 311 subjects completed in the University which have not already been counted towards a completed award.

S Time Requirements

(I) Except with the permission of the Faculty Board, a candidate shall complete the course within eleven years of study, from its commencement.

(2) A candidate who has been granted credit shall be deemed to have commenced the course from a date determined by the Dean at the time at which credit is granted.


35


APPROVED SUBJECTS

The subjects approved by the Faculty Board for the award consist of the following prescribed Group A and Group B subjects:

GROUP A SUBJECTS

Cod. Name Credil Points

100 Level PSYCIOI Psychology Introduction 1 10 PSYCI02 Psychology Introduction 2 10

200 Level

PSYC20l Foundations for Psychology 10 PSYC202 Basic Processes 10 PSYCZ03 Developmental & Social Processes 10 PSYC204 Individual Processes 10 PSYC205 Applied Topics in Psychology 1 Not in 1993

PSYC206 Applied Topics in Psychology 2 Not in 1993

300 Level

PSYOOl Advanced Foundations for Psychology \0

PSY002 Independent Project 10

and 40 cp from

PSY003 Basic Processes 1 10 PSY004 Basic Processes 2 10 PSY005 Individual Processes \0 PSY006 Advanced Social Processes \0 PSY007 Advanced Applied Topics in Psychology 1 10 PSY008 Advanced Applied Topics in Psychology 2 10 PSY009 Topics in Neura] Science \0

400 Level

PSYC40l Psychology Honours 401 40 PSYC402 Psychology Honours 402 40 or PSYC403 Psychology 403 30 PSYC404 Psychology 404 50 Footnotes

Prerequisile

PSYCIOI

PSYCI02

PSYCI02

PSYCI02 PSYCI02 PSYCI02

PSYCI02

PSYC201, PSYC202

PSYC203

PSYC201

PSYC201

PSYC20l

PSYC20l PSYC20l

PSYC201 PSYC201

PSYC201

see ' PSYC401

Consult Dept.

PSYC403

CorequisiU

PSYC201 PSYC201

PSYC201 PSYC201

PSYC201

PSYOOI

PSYOOI PSYOOI

PSYOOI PSYOOl

PSYOOl

PSYOOI

PSYOO1

The normal pattern/or the Bachelor 0/ Science (Psychology) degree is 80 credit points at 100 level, 80 credit points at 200 level, 80 credit points aJ 300 level and 80 credit points at 400 level.

uave 0/ Absence-For the purposes o/Rule 10 o/the Rules Governing Academic Awards, a candidate shalJ be deemed to be in good standing if, at the conclusion 0/ the year 0/ last enrolment in the course, that candidate was eligible to re-enrol without restrictions.

I Entry to PSYC401 and PSYC402 in the Bachelor of Science (Psychology) degree requires completion of 60 credit points at PSYC300 obtaining at least a Credit grade or better in each of four 300 level Psychology subjects including PSYC301 and PSYC302: consult the Department for details.

GROUP B SUBJECTS Group B Subjects are in the following discipline areas: Biological Sciences, Chemistry, Geography, Geology, Mathematics and Physics: they are referred to in the Bachelor of Science Schedule of Approved Group A Subjects (excepting the discipline of Psychology).

36

SECfION THREE

SCHEDULE - DIPLOMA IN A VIA TION SCIENCE

1 Qualification for the Diploma

(1) To qualify for admission to the diplomaacandidate shall pass subjects totalling 160 credit points from the list of Approved Subjects and comprising:

(a) at least 60 credit points from 100 level Group A subjects; and

(b) at least 60 credit points from 200 level subjects including at least 50 credit points from Group A subjects.

2 Grading

3

In cases where a candidate's performance in the course has reached a level determined by Ute Faculty Board, on the recommendation of the Board of Studies in Aviation, the Diploma may be conferred with Merit.

Time Requirements

(1) Except with the permission of the Faculty Board, a candidate shall complete the course within six years of study.

(2) A candidate who has beengranted credit shall bedeemed to have commenced the course from a date determined by the Dean at the time at which credit is granted.

UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE AND DIPLOMA RlIT..BS

37

SECf!ON THREE UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE AND DIPLOMA RULES

APPROVED SUBJECTS

1be subjects approved· by the Faculty Board for the award are:

GROUP A SUBJECTS

Cotk Name CTHil Points Prerequisile Corequism

100 Level

AVIA!09 Introductory Meteorology S AVIAI\o Introductory Navigation S AVIAll! Introductory Aerodynamics S AVIA113 Aircraft Performance & Systems S AVIA114 Flight Rules & Procedures S AVIA115 Reciprocating Engines 5 AVIA116 Commercial Meteorology 5 AVIAI09 AVIA117 Navigation 5 AVIAI10 AVIA118 Aerodynamics 5 AVIA111 AVIAI20 Aviation Law, Commercial Flight

Rules & Procedures \0 AVIA114

AVIAI21 Aircraft Systems & Propulsion 5

200 Leve!

AVIA207 Aviation Meteorology 5 AVIA116

AVIA208 Instrument Navigation 5 AVIA117 AVIA209 Long Range Navigation 5 AVIA117 AVIA2\o Compressible Aerodynamics 5 AVIA118 AVIA211 Jet Engines 5 60 cp A VIA 1 00 level AVIA213 Aircraft Structures & Materials 5 60 cp A VIAl 00 level AVIA214 Jet Aircraft FJiaht Planning \0 AVIAI17 AVIA218 Advanced Aircraft Perfonnance 5 AVIAI23 AVIA219 High Altitude Meteorology and Forecasting 5 AVIA207

AVIA222 Management of Aviation 5 AVIAI20 AVIA223 Aviation Computing and FJeclronics 5 AVIAI21

GROUP B SUBJECTS

100 Level AVIA112 Introductory Human Factors \0 AVIA119 Aviation Psychology & Medicine 5 AVIA112

AVIAI23 Aircraft Petformance & Loading 5 AVIAI13

200 Level

AVIA212 Human Factors \0 AVIA119 AVIA220 Aircraft Fatigue Management 5 AVIA213 AVIA221 Human Performance in Multi-Crew Operations 5 AVIA212

Footnotes

The normal pattern/or the Diploma in Aviation Science course is 80 credit points al100 level and 80 credit points at 200 level.

Leave of Absence-For the purposes of Rule 10 o/the Rules Governing Academic A wards, a candidate shall be deemed to be in good standing if, at the conclusion oflhe year 0/ last enrolment in the course, that candidate was eligible to re-enrol without restrictions.

• Refers to the list of approved subjects in the Schedule - Bachelor of Science Group A SUbjects.

38

SEcnONFOUR

APPROVED SUBJECTS FOR TIlE BACHELOR DEGREES

List of Approved Subjects Referred to in Bachelor Degree Schedules F::: Full Year; S1 :: Semester 1 ~ S2 = Semester 2

Number Subject Points When HIW Prerequisites Corequisites

1993 1994 1993

APPLIED SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY

Environmental Assessment and Management suhjects

Available only to Bachelor of Applied Science Environmental Assessment and Management candidates

EAMCI03 Contemporary Environmental 10 SI 3

Philosophy

EAMC113 Environment and Human 10 S2 3 EAMCI03

Values I

EAMC203 Environment and Human 10 Sl 3 EAMCI03

Values II EAMC1l3

EAMC213 Development and Social 10 S2 3 EAMCI03 EAMC203

Impact Assessment EAMC1l3

EAMC303 Occupational Hygiene & 10 FY 3 EAMC203

Toxicology EAMC213

EAMC313 Social Aspects of 10 52 3 EAMC203 EAMC303

Environmental Health EAMC213

EAM5101 Concepts of Ecology 10 SI 4

EAM5111 Systems Approach in Ecology 10 S2 4 EAM5101

EAMSI02 Monitoring and Statistics I 10 51 5

llAMSI12 Monitoring and Statistics II 10 52 5 EAM5102

llAM5104 Environmental Planning and 10 SI 4

Pollution Control Legislation

llAMSl14 Local and Regional 10 S2 4

Environmental Issues

llAMS201 Agricultural Systems 10 51 4 EAM5101

EAMS1l1

39

SECfION FOUR

Number Subject Points When

EAMS211 Industrial and Urban Systems 10

EAMS202 System Dynamics and Data

Analysis!

10

EAMS212 System Dynamics and Data 10 Analysis II

EAMS290 Hydrology and Soils Analysis 10

EAMS291 Water Resources Management 10

EAMS292 Plant Systematics and Plant 10

Ecology EAMS293 Animal Systematics and 10

Animal Ecology

EAMS301 Environmental Management I 10

EAMS311 Environmental Management II 10

EAMS302 Specialist Study

EAMS304 Regional and National Environmental Issues

EAMS314 Environmental Impact

Assessment

EAMS390 Soil ConselVation and Management

20

10

10

10

EAMS391 Water and Soils Applications 10 and Modelling

EAMS392 Flora Component of

Environmental Impact

Assessment

EAMS393 Fauna Component of

Environmental Impact Assessment

AVIATION

10

10

52

51

52

51

52

51

52

51

52

F

51

52

51

52

51

52

Availahle to Bachelor of Science (Aviation) candidates

A VIAl 09 Introductory Meteorology 5 SI A VIAl 10 Introductory Navigation 5 SI

A VIAl I I Introductory Aerodynamics 5 Sl

A VIAl12 Introductory Human Factors 10 SI

A VIAl 13 Aircraft Performance 5 SI

& Systems

A VIAl 14 Flight Rules & Procedures

A VIAl 15 Reciprocating Engines

A VIAl16 Commercial Meteorology

A VIAl 17 Navigation A VIAl18 Aerodynamics

40

5

5 5

5 5

51

51

52

52

52

ww

4

5

5

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

3

3

3

4

3

2 2 3

3 3

Prerequisites

1993 1994

EAM5101

EAM5111

EAM5102 EAM5112

EAM51 02

EAM5112 EAMSlO2

EAM5112

EAM5102

EAM5112

EAM5101

EAM5111

EAM5101

EAM5111

EAM5201

EAM5211

EAM5201 EAM5211

All Prescribed 200 level subjects

EAM5104 EAM5114

EAM5104

EAM5114

EAM5290 EAM5291

EAM5290

EAM5291 EAM5292

EAM5293

EAM5292

EAM5293

AVIA109

AVIAIIO

A VIA111

APPROVED SUBJEcrS

Corequisites

1993 EAM5201

EAM5202

EAM5290

EAM5292

EAM5301

EAM5390

SECfION FOUR


AVIAt19 Aviation Psychology

& Medicine 5

AVIAl20 Aviation Law, Commercial 10 Flight Rules and Procedures

A VIAl 21 Aircraft Systems

& Propulsion

AVIAl23 Aircraft Performance &

Loading

5

5

A VIA207 Aviation Meteorology 5 A VIA208 Instrument Navigation 5 A VIA209 Long Range Navigation 5 AVIA210 Compressible Aerodynamics 5

A VIA211 Jet Fngines 5

AVIA212 Human Factors 10 A VIA213 Aircraft Structures 5

& Materials A VIA214 Jet Aircraft Flight Planning 10

AVIA218 Advanced Aircraft 5

Performance

A VIA219 High Altitude

Meteorology and

Forecasting

A VIA220 Aircraft Fatigue

Management A VIA221 Human Performance

in Multi-Crew

Operations

AVIA222 Management in Aviation

AVIA223 Aviation Computing

and Electronics

AVIA305 Aircraft Design

A VIA306 Advanced Aircraft

Operations

A VIA308 Aviation Instruction

AVIA310 Advanced NaVigation

A VIA311 Advanced Aviation

Instruction

AVIA312 Applied Aerodynamics

A VIA314 Directed Study

Advanced Aviation

Management

5

5

5

5 5

5 10

10

10

10

5

10

5

52

52

52

52

51

51

51

51

52

51

51

52

51

52

52

52

52

52

51

51

51

51

52

52

52

52

ww

3

4

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

4

3

6

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

4

4

4

4

3

4

3

Prerequisites

1993 1994 AVIA112

AVIA114

AVIA113

AVIA116

AVIA117 AVIAI17

AVIA118

60cp AVIAIOO level

AVIA119 60cp A VIAlOO level AVIA117

AVIAI23

AVIA207

AVIA213

AVIA212

AVIA120

AVIA121

AVIA213 AVIA214

60 cp 200 level

AVIA209

AVIA308

AVIA318

AVIA223

At least two

of the following:

AVIA306

AVIA308


AVIA318

APPROVED SUBfficrs

Corequisites

1993

41

SECfION FOUR

Number Subject

A VIA316 Right Deck Performance

A VIA317 Aviation Climatology AVIA318 AircraftSlability

and Control A VIA320 Aviation Instruction

Practicum I AVIA321 Aviation Instruction

Practicum II

BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES

B10LlOI Plant & Animal Biology

BIOLI02 Cell Biology. C'.renetics

& Evolution

B10L201 Biochemistry

BIOL202 Animal Physiology

BIOL204 Cell & Molecular

Biology BIOL205 Molecular Genetics

BIOL206 Plant Physiology

B10L207 Ecology

BIOLJ01 Cell Processes

BIOL302 Reproductive

Physiology BI0L303 Environmental Plant

Physiology

BIOL304 Whole Plant

Development

BI0L305 Immunology

BI0L307 Molecular Biology of

Plant Development

BI0L309 Molecular Biology

BI0L310 Microbiology

42

Points When

5 5

5

5

5

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

52

52

51

51

51

51

52

51

51

52

51

52

52

Not in 1993

52

51

52

52

Not in

1993

52

51

ww

3 3

3

2

2

6 6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6 6

6

6

Prerequisites

1993 AYIA221

AYIA207

AYIA118

AYIAJ08

B10LlOI

BIOLl02

B10LlOI

B10LlO2

B10LlO1

BIOLl02

B10LlO1

B10L102

B10LlOI

B10Ll02

B10LlO1

BIOLl02

Students who

have completed

BIOL203 are

not eligible to

do this subject B10L201 & one BIOL200 Two BIOL200

TwoBIOL200

TWoBIOL200

TWoBIOL200

Two BIOL200

incI.one of

1994

BIOL201 or

B10L204 or mOL205

B10L201 and

BIOL205

BIOL201 &

one other BIOL200

(BIOL204 advisable)

APPROVED SUBJECTS

Corequisites

1993

AYIA308

AYIA311

AYIA320

SECTION FOUR


BI0L311 Environmenta1 Biology

BI0L312 Animal Development

CHEMISTRY

CHEM10l Chemistry 101 CHEMI02 Chemistry 102

CHEM211 Analytical Chemistry

CHEM221 Inorganic Chemistry

CHEM23 I Organic Chemistry

CHEM241 Physical Chemistry

CHEM251 Applied Chemistry

CHEM261 Environmental Chemistry

10

10

10 10 10

10

10

10

10

10

CHEM311 Analytical Chemistry 10

CHEM312 Chemometrics 5

CHEM313 Industrial Chemical Analysis 5

CHEM314 Trace Analysis in

Environmental Systems

CHEM321 Inorganic Chemistry

CHEM322 Metal-Metal Bonding

& Cluster Chemistry

CHEM323 Bioinorganic Co-

ordination Chemistry

CHEM331 Organic Chemistry

CHEM332 Heterocyclic Chemistry

CHEM333 Organic Reaction

Mechanism Identification of Natural Compounds

Organic Spectroscopy

5

10

5

5

10

5

5

5

5

51

51

51

52

52

51

51

52

Not in

1993

51

51

52

52

Not in

1993

51

52

52

51

52

Not in

1993

52

52

ww

6

6

6 6 6

6

6

6

6

6

6

3

3

3

6

3

3

6

3

3

3

Prerequisites

1993 BIOL203 or

BIOL207

Students who have completed

BIOLJ06are

not eligible to

do this subject

TwoBIOL200

Students who

have completed

BIOL308 are

not eligible to

do this subject

CHEM101

CHEM102

CHEM101

CHEMI02

CHEMIOI

CHEMI02

CHEM101

CHEM102

CHEM101

CHEMI02

CHEMIOI

CHEM102

CHEM211

CHEM211

MATHI02 (or

MATH112)

CHEM211

CHEM211

CHEM221

CHEM221

CHEM221

CHEM231

CHEM231

CHEM231

CHEM231

CHEM231

1994

APPROVED SUBJECTS

Corequisites

1993

43

SECfION FOUR APPROVED SUBJECfS

Number Subject

CHEM341 Physical Chemistry

CHEM342 Electrochemical Solar

Energy Conversion

CHEM343 Molecular 5pectroscopy

Points When

to SI

5 52

5 52

ww

6

3

3

Prerequisites

1993 1994 CHEM241

MATHl02 (or

MATHIl2)

CHEM241

MATHI02(or

MATHIl2)

CHEM241 CHEM361 Environmental Chemistry 10 S2 6 CHEM261

Corequisites

1993

NOTE Prior to 1991 CHEM211, CHEM221, CHEM231 and CHEM241 were numbered CHEM201 CHEM202 CHEM203 and CHEM204 respectively. ' ,

ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE SUBJECTS

Consult other Departmental lists for other prescribed subjeds required: See Award Rules Available only to Bachelor of Environmental Stience Degree candidates SCENI01 Environmental Investigations I 10 F 3

SCEN201 Environmental Investigations 1110 F 3 SCEN101 SCEN202 Environmental Planning & 10 SI 4

Pollution Control

SCEN203 Water Resources Management 10

SCEN301 Environmental Project

SCEN302 Environmental Impact

Assessment Techniques GEOGRAPHY

GEOOI01 Introduction to

Physical Geography GEOGI02 Introduction to

Human Geography GEOG201 Methods in Physical

Geography

GEOO202 Methods in Human

Geography

GEOO203 Biogeography & Climatology

GEOG204 Geomorphology of

Australia

GEOG207 PopUlation, Culture

& Resources

GEOO208 Cities & Regions

GEOO301 Advanced Methods in

Physical Geography

GEOG302 Advanced Methods in Human Geography

GEOG304 The Biosphere &

Conservation

44

to

to

10

to

to

to

10

10

to

to

to

to

10

52

3 days

F 52

51

52

51

52

52

51

51

52

52

51

51

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

5CEN201

5CEN202

see'

see'

GEooto1

GEOGto2

GEooto1

GEooto1

GEooto2

GEOG102

GEOG201 plus either GEOG203 or

GEOO204

GEOO202 plus either GEOG205 orGE0G206

GEOO203

GEOO202 plus either GEOO207

orGEOG208

SECfION FOUR APPROVED SUBJEcrs

Number Subject

GEOG305 Climatic Problems

GEOG306 Geography of Australia

An Historical Perspective

GEOG309 50ciety & 5pace

GEOO310 Directed Studies in Human Geography

GEOG311 Hydrology

GEOO315 Production, Work &

Territory

GEOG316 Directed Studies in Physical Geography

Footnote

Points When

to

10

10

10

to

10

10

52

51

52

To be

advised

51

52

Not in 1993

ww

4 4

4

4

4

4

4

Prerequisites

1993 1994 GEOG203

GEOG202 plus

either GEOG205

orGEOG206

GEOO202 plus

either GEOO205

orGEOG206

GEOG202 plus either GEOG205 orGEOO206

GEOG201

GEOO203

GEOO202 plus

either GEOG205

orGEOG206

GEOG201

plus either GEOO203 or

GEOG204

GEOG202

plus

GEOG207 orGEOG208

GEOG202

plus either

GEOG207 orGEOG208

GEOG202

plus either GEOG207

orGEOG208

GEOG202

plus either

GEOG207 or

GEOG208

Corequisites

1993

1 Students should note that GEOOI01 and GEOGI02 are prerequisites for a major study in Geography, and for admission to Geography Honours GEOG401

GEOLOGY

GEOL101 The Environment

GEOLl02 Earth Materials

GEOL211 Optical Mineralogy

GEOL212 Introductory Petrology

GEOL213 Ancient Environments &

Organisms GEOL214 Geological Structures &

Resources GEOL215 Geology Field Course 215

GEOL216 Geology Field Course 216

GE0L311 Igneous Petrology &

Crustal Evolution

GEOL312 Metamorphic Petrology

GE0L313 Structural Geology & Geophysics

GE0L314 Stratigraphic Methods

GE0L315 Sedimentology

10

10

5

10

10

10

10

5

10

10

10

10

10

51

52

51

52

52

51

51

52

52

51

51

52

52

6

6

3

6

6

6

14

days

7

days

6

6

6

6

6

GEOLlOI

GEOL102

GEOL211

GEOLl02

GEOLl02

GEOLl02

GEOL215

GEOL312

GEOL212

GEOL214

GEOL213

GEOL212&

GEOL213

45

SECTION FOUR APPROVED SUBJECTS SECTION FOUR APPROVED SUBJECTS

Number Subject Points When HIW Prerequisites Corequisites Number Subject Points When HIW Prerequisites Corequisites 1993 1994 1993 1993 1994 1993

GEOLJI6 Geology of Fuels 10 SI 6 GEOL213 (MATHI02& GEOLJI7 Resource & Exploration 10 SI 6 GEOL212& Permission of

Geology GEOL214 H.O.D.') GEOLJIS Geology Field Course 318 5 SI 7 GEOUI3 MATH207 Complex Analysis 2 5 S2 2 MATH206&

days MATH103 GEOLJ19 Geology Field Course 319 5 S2 10 GEOL216& MATH209 Algebra 5 S2 2 MATH21S'

days GEOLJ13 MATH2IO Geometry 1 5 S2 2 (MATHI02& GEOLJ20 Geology of Quaternary 10 S2 6 GEOU13 or MATHI03) or

Environments GEOG204 (MATHIII & GEOLJ21 Groundwater & Soils 10 Nolin 6 MATHII2&

1993 MATHI03) MATH211 Group Theory 5 SI 2 (MATHI02&

MATHEMATICS MATHI03)or MATHlll Mathematics 111 10 S1,S2 6 2 unit HSC Mathematics (MATH1II & #MATH112Mathematics 112 10 S1,S2 6 MATHIIl MATH112& #MATHI02Mathematics 102 10 SI 6 see20r MATHI03)

MATHlII MATH212 Discrete 5 SI 2 MATHI020r MATH103 Mathematics 103 10 S2 6 see2 or Mathematics MATHI03 or

MATHI020r (MATIlIll & (MATHlll & MATH112) MATH112) MATH2I3 Mathematical 5 S2 2 (MATHI02&

MATH201 Multivariable 5 SI 2 (MATHI02& Modelling MATHI03)or Calculus MATH103) or (MATHl11 &

(MATHlll & MATH112) MATH112) or MATH214 Mechanics 5 SI 2 (MATHI02& (MATHI02& MATHI03)or Permission of (MATHIll & H.O.D.') MATHlI2&

MATH202 Partial Differential 5 S2 2 MATH201 MATH203 MAnu 03) Equations 1 MATH21 5 Operalions 5 S2 2 MATH 102 or

MATH203 Ordinary Differential 5 S2 2 (MATHI02& Research MATHI03 or Equations 1 MATHI03) or (MATHlll &

(MATHl11 & MATH112) MATH112) or MATH216 Numerical Analysis 5 SZ 2 (MATHIOZ& (MATHIOZ& MATHI03)or Permission of (MATHl11 & H.D.D') MATH 112 &

MATH204 Real Analysis 5 SI 2 (MATHIOZ& CDMPI0l) or MATHI03) or (MATHlll & (MATHlII & MATH112& MATH II 2 & MATHI03) MATH103) tMATH217 Linear Algebra 1 5 SI 2 MATHI020r

MATH20S Analysis of 5 S2 2 MATH204' (MATH 1 11& Metric Spaces

MATH112) MATH206 Complex Analysis 1 5 SI 2 (MATHI02& MATH201 tMATH21S Linear Algebra 2 5 SI 2 (MATHl02 &

MATHI03) or MATH 103) or (MATH111 & (MATH111 & MATH112) or

MATH112&

46 MATH103)

47

SECTION FOUR APPROVED SUBJEcrs SECfION FOUR APPROVED sUBmcrs

Number Subject Points When HfW Prerequisites Corequlsites Number Subject Points When HfW Prerequisites Corequisites

1993 1994 1993 1993 1994 1993

MATH301 Logic & Set JO Nolin 3 20cp from 200 level MATH316 Industrial JO NOlin 3 MATH2DI

Theory 1993 MATH inel. one of Modelling 1993 MATH2D2

MATH2D4, 209, 211, MATH2D3

212, 21S' MATH213

MATH302 General Tensors JO Nolin 3 MATH2DI MATH216&

& Relativity 1993 MATH21S' Permission of

MATH303 Variational Methods 10 NOlin 3 MATH2DI H.O.D.

and Integral Equations 1993 MATH2D3 MATH317 Number Theory 10 Not in 3 30cp from MA TH200

MATH2D4' 1993

MATH304 Ordinary Differential JO SI 3 MATH2DI MATH31S Topology JO S2 3 MATH2045 or

Equations 2 MATH2D3 MATII205

MATH2D4' Footnotes

MATH21S' 2 Entry requirement - HSC 3 unit Mathematics with a mark of at least 120/150

MATH305 Partial Differential JO S2 3 MATH2DI 3 This option is for certain students who take MATHI03 in second semester

Equations 2 MATH202 4 MATH2DS in 1990

MATHZ03 5 Students who have passed Mathematics I in 1989 or before do not need MATH2D4

MATH2D4' #Credit cannot be obtained for both MA THIl2 and MA THI 02

MA TH306 Fluid Mechanics 10 S2 3 MATH2DI (Advisory) tCredit cannot be obtained for both MA TH217- and MA TH218.

MATH203 MATH207

MATH204' DIVISION OF QUANTITATIVE METHODS

MATH206 MAQM214t Quantitative Methods 10 S2 4 INF0101 &

MATH307 Quantum & 10 S2 3 MATH2DI STATIOJ

Statistical MATH2D3 Subjects provided by the Division of Quantitative Methods to Bachelor of Education courses in the Faculty of Education in

Mechanics MATH206 1993

MATH30S Geometry 2 10 S2 3 20cp from 200 level These subjects are available only to Bachelor of Education students.

MATH inel. one of H.Ed (Mathematics Education)

MATH209, 211, 21S' MAQM135 Mathematics lA 2D F 4

MATH309 Combinatorics 10 Nolin 3 MATH21S' MAQM136 Mathematics 1 B 20 F 4

1993 MAQM235 Mathematics ITA 20 F 4 MAQM135

MATH3JO Functional 10 FY 1 l/Z MATHZ05 MAQM236 Mathematics lIB JO F 2

Analysis MAQM237 Mathematics lIe 10 F 2

MATH311 Measure Theory 10 Not in 3 MATHZ05 MAQM335_ Mathematics IllA 20 F 4 MAQM235

& Integration 1993 MAQM336 Mathematics IIIB IS F 3

MATH312 Algebra JO SI 3 MATH2184 & one of MAQM337 Mathematics me IS F 3

(MATH209, MAQM435 Mathematics IVA 10 F 2

MATH210 MAQM436 Mathematics IVB 10 F 2

MATH211) MAQM437 Mathematics rye JO F 2

MATH313 Numerical Analysis JO SI 3 MATH2DI H.Ed (Primary Education)

(Theory) MATH2D3 MAQM146 Foundation Studies IS F 3

MATH2045 in Elementary Mathematics

MATH21S' B.Ed (Early Childhood)

MATH314 Optimization JO FY 1 1/2 MATH201 MAQM147 Mathematics lEe JO SI 4

MATH2184 Footnote

MATH315 Mathematical JO SI 3 MATH2DI t Credit cannot be obtained for bath MATH215 and MAQM214

Biology MATH203

MATH213 PHYSICS

PHYSJOI Physics 101 JO SI 6 See6 PHYSJ02 Physics 102 JO SI,S2 6 See?

or PIIYSI01

4S 49

SECI'ION FOUR

Number Subject

PHYS103 Physics 103

PHYS201 Quantum

Mechanics

& Electromagnetism

PHYS202 Mechanics &

Thermal Physics

PHYS203 Solid Slale &

Atomic Physics

PHYS205 Scientific Measurement

Principles, Processes

and Applications

PHYS301 Mathematical

Methods & Quantum

Mechanics

PHYS302 Electroma20etism

& Electronics

PHYS303 Atomic, Molecular

& Solid State Physics

PHYS304 Statistical Physics

& Relativity

PHYS305 Nuclear Physics &

Advanced

Electromagnetism

Footnotes

Points When

10

10

10

10

10 10

10

10

10

10

S2

SI

SI

S2

S2

SI

SI

S2

S2

S2

6 Advisory entry requirement· HSC 2 unit Mathematics with a

perfonnance in the top 30% of candidature.

ww

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

Prerequisites

1993 PHYSI02

MATH103

PHYS103'

MATH102

PHYSI03'

PHYS201

PHYS102 PHYS201 MATH201

MATH203

PHYS201

MATH201

PHYS203 PHYS301

PHYS202

MATH201

PHYS302

1994

APPROVED SUBJECfS

Corequisites

1993

7 Assumed Imowled&e of HSC2 unit Physics or 4 unit Science (with a result in the top 50% of the candidature) and HSC3 unit mathematics (with a mark of at least 110/150). Students with lesser attainment than this are advised to attempt Physics 101, together with a first year mathematics subject before proceeding to Physics 102.

8 Students achieving a credit level or better in PHYSI01 and PHYSI02 may be admitted with approval of the Head of Department.

MATHll1 and MATH112 may substitute for MATHI03 with approval of Head of Department

PSYCHOLOGY

PSYCI01 Psychology Introduction I 10

PSYCI02 Psychology Introduction 2 10

PSYCZOI Foundations for Psychology 10

PSYC202 Basic Processes

PSYC203 Developmental & Social

Processes

PSYC204 Individual Processes

PSYC205 Applied Topics in

Psychology I

PSYC206 Applied Topics in

Psychology 2

PSYC301 Advanced Foundations

for Psychology

PSYC302 Independent Project

PSYC303 Basic Processes I

50

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

SI

S2

SI

SI

52

52

Not

in 1993

Not

in 1993

51

F

51

5 5 4

4

4

4

4

4

4

2

4

P5YCI01

PSYC102 P5YCI02

P5YCI02

P5YCI02 P5YCI02

PSYC102

PSYC20I,P5YC202

& P5YC203

P5YC201

P5YC201

PSYC201

PSYC201

PSYC201

PSYC201

PSYC201

PSYOOI

PSYOOI

SECTION FOUR

Number Subject

PSYC304 Basic Processes 2

PSYC305 Individual Processes

PSY006 Advanced Social

Processes

PSYC307 Advanced Applied Topics

in Psychology I

PSY008 Advanced Applied Topics

in Psychology 2

PSYC309 Topics in Neural Science

PSYC401 Psychology Honours 401

PSYC402 Psychology Honours 402

PSYC403 Psychology 403 PSYC404 Psychology 404

Footnote

Points When

10

10

10

10

10

10 40

40 30 50

S2

52

SI

51

S2

S2

F F F F

ww

4

4

4

4

4

4

12

12 8

16

Prerequisites

1993 PSYC201

PSYC201

PSYC201

PSYC201

PSYC201

PSYC201

See' PSYC401 Consult Dept.

PSYC403

1994

APPROVED SUBJECTS

Corequisites

1993 PSYOOI

PSYOO1

PSYOOI

PSYOOI

PSYOO1

PSYOOI

9 Entry to PSYC401 and PSYC402 in the Bachelor of Science (Psychology) degree requires completion of 60 credit points at PSYC300 obtaining a Credit grade in each of four 300 level subjects including PSYC301 and PSYC302. Additional conditions apply; see the Department for details.

LIST OF OTHER APPROVED SUBJECTS FROM GROUP B

COMPUTER SCIENCE

COMP101 Computer Science I

COMP201 Advanced Data Structures

COMP202 Computer Architecture

COMP203 Assembly Language

20

5

5

5

F

2

COMP204 Programming Language Semantics 5 2

COMP205 System Programming 5

COMP206 Theory of Computation 5

COMP212 Introduction to Programming 5

COMP241 Cognitive Science

COMP299 Project

COMP301 Compiler Design

COMP302 Artificial Intelligence

COMP303 Computer Networks

COMP304 Database Design

10

5

10

10

10

10

2

F

1,2,F I

2

2

COMPIOI orCOMP212

or Graduate

enrolment

COMP203 COMPIOI

orCOMP212

or Graduate

enrolment

COMP205

COMPIOI

orCOMP212

or Graduate

enrolment

COMPlOl

orCOMP212

or Graduate

enrolment

Permission of H.O.D.

COMP2Ol

COMPIOI

orCOMP212

COMP2Olor

Graduate enrolment

COMP2010r

Graduate enrolment

MATH212

MATH212

51

SECfION FOUR APPROVED SUBJEcrs

Number Subject Points When WW Prerequisites Corequisites

1993 1994 1993 COMP305 Algorithm Design and

Analysis 10 COMP201

COMP306 Computer Graphics 10 2 COMP201

MATH216

and either MATH217

orMATH218

COMP307 Software Engineering Principles 10 F** COMP2010r

Graduate enrolment

COMP308 Operating Systems 10 2 COMP201 COMP202

COMP391 Special Topic 1 10 Not in Yr II of BCompSc

1993

* Elective subjects. Not all elective subjects will be available in anyone year. Elective subjects indicated as potentially available may be cancelled if enrolments are insufficient. Availability should be confirmed with the Department Office.

** COMP307 requires attendance at lectures in Semester 1 and completion of a project report in Semester 2.

INFORMATION SCIENCE INF0101 Introduction to

Information Systems

LAW

Compulsory Subjects

10 SI,S2 5

The following subjects are compulsory for candidates enrolled in the combined Bachelor of SciencelBachelor of Laws degree: consult the Faculty of Law Handbook for further details.

LL.B.101 Legal Progress 20

LL.B.102 Criminal Law and Procedure 20

LL.B.201 Torts 20

LL.B.202 Property I 10

LL.B.301 Contracts 20

LL.B.401 Constitutional Law I 10

LL.B.402 Administrative Law I 10

LL.B.403 Equity and Trusts 10

LL.B.404 Civil Procedure 10

LL.B.405 Evidence 10

LL.B.406 Company Law I 10

LL.B.407 Jurisprudence 10

LL.B.408 Professional Conduct 10

PHILOSOPHY

PHIL207 Scientific Knowledge and 10 SI 4

Scientific Method STATISTICS STATIO! Introductory Statistics 10 SI, 5

S2

STATl03 Introductory Mathematical 10 S2 5 Advisory MATHt02

Statistics t and INFOIOI

52

SECTION FOUR

Number Subject Points When WW

STAT2O! Mathematical Statistics· 10 SI 4

STAT202 Regression Analysis 10 S2 4

STAT203 Queues & Simulation 5 SI 2

STAT204 Non-parametric Statistics 5 S2 2

STAT205 Engineering Statistics· 5 SI 2

STAT3O! Statistical Inference 10 SI 3

STAT302 Study Design 10 S2 3

STAT303 Generalized Linear Models 10 SI 3

STAT304 Time Series Analysis 10 S2 3

STAT310 Total Quality Management 10 S2 2 Footnote

Credit cannot be obtained for both STAT20t and STAT205

Credit cannot be obtained for both ST A Tl 01 and STATt 03

Prerequisites

1993 1994 MATH103 or STATIO! &

MATH112 (or equivalent level of Mathematics) STAT20lor

STATIOI &

MATHl12/MATHI02 (or equivalent level of Mathematics) MA TH112/MA THI 02

or equivalent

STAT2010r STATIO! & MATHl12/MATHI02

(or equivalent) MATHl12/MATHI02

STAT201 & MATH201

STAT201 &

STAT202

STAT201 &

STAT202

Advisory ST A T301

STAT201 &

STAT202

Advisory ST A nOt

APPROVED sUBmcrs

Corequisites

1993

STAT204

forBSc degree STAT203

forBSc degree

53

SECTION FIVE

UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS

Guide to Undergraduate Subject Entries Subject outlines and reading lists are set out in a standard fonnat to facilitate easy reference.

An explanation is given below of some of the technical terms used in this Handbook.

1. (a) Prerequisites are subjects which must be passed at a Pass level or betterbefore a candidate enrols in a particular subject.

(b) Where a subject is marked Advisory it refers to a pass in the Higher School Certificate. In such cases lectures will be given on the assumption that a pass has been achieved at the level indicated.

(c) Preparatory subjects are those which candidates are strongly advised to have completed before enrolling in the subject for which the preparatory subject is recommended.

2. Corequisites refer to subjects or topics which the candidate must either pass before enrolling in the particular subject or be taking concurrently.

3. Under examination rules "examination" includes mid-year examinations, assignments, tests or any other work by which the final grade of a candidate in a subject is assessed. Some attempt has been made to indicate for each subject how assessment is determined.

4. TeXIs are books recommended for purchase.

5. References are books relevant to the subject or topic which need not be purchased.

S4

Applied Science and Technology BACHELOR OF APPLIED SCIENCE ENVIRONMENTAL ASSESSMENT AND MANAGEMENT

EAMS/EAMC subjects are available only to candidates enrolled in the Bachelor of Applied Science Environmental Assessment and Management degree.

EAMSIOI CONCEPTS OF ECOLOGY lOcp

Hours 4 Hours per week for one semester.

Examination Written reports and end of semester examination.

Content

The fundamental concepts of ecology are examined in relation to various natural systems, including dry forests, rainforests, heathlands, lakes, and wetlands. The ecosystem processes of energy flow, nutrient and water cycling, population dynamics, and successional change are studied through both theoretical considerations and relevant field and laboratory investigations.

Text

Kormondy, E.J. 1986, Concepts of Ecology 3rd edn Prentice Hall.

References

Kupchella, C., and Hyland, M. 1989, Environmental Science Living wilhin the System of Nature Allyn and Bacon.

Recher, H.F. et al. 1986, A NaJural Legacy Ecology in Australia 2nd edn Pergamon.

EAMSlll SYSTEMS APPROACH IN ECOLOGY Hkp

Prerequisite EAMSlOl.


Examination Written reports and end of semester examination.

SEctION FIVE

Content

Theory of open, cybernetic systems, comprising inputs, changes, outputs and negative feedback mechanisms. Analysis of natural systems in systems terms. Employment of Odum symbols. Calculations of energy flow through both natural and human modified systems. Calculations of partitioning and budgeting of nutrients. Structure and dynamics of ecological communities.

Texl

Kormondy, E.J. 1986, Concepts of Ecology 3rd edn Prentice Hall.

References

Kupchella, c., and Hyland, M. 1989, Environmental Science Living within the System of Nature Allyn and Bacon.

Recher, H.F. et al. 1986, A Natural Legacy Ecology in Australia 2nd edn Pergamon.

EAMSI02 MONITORING AND STATISTICS I lOcp


Examination Final examination.

Content

Cell theory, diversity, Whittakers scheme of classification, microbiology of aquatic and terrestrial ecosystems sampling methods. Bright field, dark field, phase contrast, polarising microscopy and the use of the optical microscope in environmental analysis. Relevant introductory environmental chemistry. There is emphasis on group work and problem solving.

The statistics program runs parallel to the above and reviews basic mathematical analysis, probability. multinomial, binomial theories and patterns of distribution.

Texts

Curtis, H. and Barnes, N. 1985,Invitation to Biology 4th edn Worth.

Pentz, M. and Shott, M. 1988, Handling ExperimenJal Data Open University Press.

References

Willdnson,J.F.1986,AnlnJroductiontoMicrobiology Blackwell.

Kupchella, C. and Hyland, M. 1989, Environmental Science Allyn and Bacon.

EAMSIl2 MONITORING AND STATISTICS II lO,p

Prerequisite EAMS 1 02.


Examination Progressive assessment plus 2 hour final examination.

Content

An introduction to water qUality and water quality analysis using the concept of a water quality index as a model.

Student groups carry outan analysis of the water quality in alocal stream whilst they develop and refine laboratory skills in water quality analysis. Each group then embarks on a biogeographical study of a small enclosed water body in the Newcastle area

APPLIED SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS

Emphasis is placed on scientific method, group dynamics and a continuation of relevant principles in environmental chemistry.

The statistics program runs parallel and deals with tests of significance.

Text

Laidler, G. 1991, Environmental Chemistry Australian Perspective Longman.

Shield, MJ. 1984, Statistics Jacaranda

Reference

Rump, H. and Krist, H. 1988, Laboratory Manual for the examination of water waste and soil VCH.

EAMCI03 CONTEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL PHILOSOPHY lOcp


Examination Tutorial work and assessment, essay, take-home examination.

Content

The historical foundations of despotic and destructive attitudes toward the natural environment, contemporary responses to the need for an environmental ethic, eg, Stewardship, Animal and Ecological Rights - Liberation, the Land Ethic, Deep Ecology, Eco-feminism, Social Ecology and Eco-anarcrusm, Gaia and other "New Age" environmental philosophies.

References An extensive list of references will be provided at the commencement of lectures.

EAMC1l3 ENVIRONMENT AND HUMAN VALUES I lOcp

Prerequisite EAMC103.


ExaminaJion Tutorial assessment, essay, take-home examination.

Content

A. An examination of the major responses from economics to "green" philosophies and science. Responses include; Green Capitalism, Eco-Socialism, Buddhist Economics, Negative Growth Economics, Steady -Stale Economics andEcologically Sustainable Development (ESD).

B. The values that underpin scientific and technological knowledge and achievements. The Philosophy of Science, the social shaping of Science and Technology, Technology and Development.

References An extensive list of references will be provided at the commencement of lectures.

EAMSI04 ENVIRONMENTAL PLANNING AND POLLUTION CONTROL LEGISLATION lOcp

Hours 4 Hours per week lectures, field work and directed reading.

Examination Progressive assessment plus final examination.

SS

SECITON FIVE

Content

This course examines the environmental planning and development oontrol system in NSW and pollution control legislation. 1M emphasis in the course is to understand the system which regulates development and requires environmental studies to be undertaken.

Text

Farrier, D., Enllironmenlal Law Handbook Planning and Land Use in NSW Redfern Legal Centre, 1988.

Reference

Department of Environment and Planning. Manual for En'llironmenlallmpact Assessment 1985.

EAMS1I4 LOCAL AND REGIONAL ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES IOcp

Hours 4 Hours per week lectures, field work and directed reading.


Conlenl

Case studies of particular local and regional environmental issues including the environmental impact of mining, solid waste disposal, water quality management, industrial development and sewage treatment. Introduction to environmental assessment techniquesandanalysisofreasonsforconflict. Particularattenlion is given to skills in communication.

References

Beder,S.1989,ToxicFishandSewerSurfing Allen and Unwin.

Laidler, G.1991, Environmental Chemistry 2nd ed Longman Cheshire.

EAMS201 AGRICULTURAL SYSTEMS IOcp

PrerequisiJe EAMS101, EAMSl11.


Examination Assignments and final examination.

Content

The effect of human disturbance of natural ecosystems is studied using agriculture as the focus. Systems concepts are further developed using a series of agricultural systems of increasing complexity and energy demand.

Text

Kupchella, C. and Hyland, M. 1989, Environmental Science Living within the System of Nature Allyn and Bacon.

References

Wilson, J. 1988, Changing Agriculture. An Introduction to Systems Thinking Kangaroo Press.

Checkland, P. 1981 ~ Systems Thinking, Systems Practice Wiley.

Checkland, P. and Scholes, J. 1990, Soft Systems Methodology in Action Wiley.

EAMS211 INDUSTRIAL AND URBAN SYSTEMS IO<p

Prerequisite EAMSI0l, EAMS111.

56

APPLIED SCIENCE AND lECHNOLOGY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS

Corequisite EAMS201

HOUTS 4 Hours per week for one semester.

ExmninaJion Assignments and final examination.

Conknt

Industrial and urban systems are the focus for further studies of the impact of humans on the natural environment. 1be notion of Human Activity Systems is developed as an approach to the improvement of complex, environmental issues.

Text

KupcheUa, C. and Hyland, M. 1989, Environmental Science Living within the System o/NaJure Allyn and Bacon.

References

Wilson, J. 1988, Changing Agriculture. An Introduction to Systems Thinking Kangaroo Press,

Checkland, P. 1981, Systems Thinking, Systems Practice Wiley.

Checkland, P. and Scholes, 1. 1990, Soft Systems Methodology in Action Wiley.

EAMS202 SYSTEMS DYNAMICS AND DATA ANALYSIS I IOcp

Prerequisite EAMS102, EAMS112.

Hours S Hours per week for one semester.

Examination Progressive assessment and final examination.

Conlenl

This module develops system dynamics theory using Forresters system dynamics language as applied to natural and man made systems. It examines positive and negative feedback control loops, rates, levels, auxiliaries, sources, sinks, information feedback and system boundaries, Models are developed taking account of perspective, reference modes, time horizons and policy choices. Emphasis is placed upon the importance of group work and action research.

Models of a chosen catchment are developed as part of an ongoing catchment management study.

The data analysis program runs parallel. It reviews and further develops tests of significance using the minitab software program.

References

Roberts, N., et al. 1983,Inlrodudion to Computer Simulation A system dynamics modelling approach Addison Wesley.

Ryan, B., et al. 1985. Minitab Handbook 2nd edn PSW Kent

EAMS212 SYSTEM DYNAMICS AND DATA ANALYSIS II IOcp

PrerequisiJe EAMSI02, EAMSI12.

Corequisite EAMS202.


Examination Progressive assessment and final examination.

Content

Further development of system dynamics models, Introduction to computer modeUing, rate and level equations. Dynamo language.

SECTION FIVE

Data analysis runs parallel and involves computer applications of group developed models and their analysis.

Reference

Roberts, N. et al. 1983,Inlroduclion to computer simulation A system dynamics modelling approach Addison Wesley.

EAMC203 ENVIRONMENT AND HUMAN· VALUES II IOcp

PrerequisiJe EAMC103, EAMCI13.


Examination Tutorial assessment, essay, take·homeexamination.

Conlent

Public policy and environmental issues; eg energy policy, ecologically sustainable development, ethics and a sustainable society, ethics and acceptable risk. ideology and green political thought in the national and international contexts.

References

An extensive set of references for this subject will be given to students at the commencement of the semester.

EAMC213 DEVELOPMENT AND SOCIAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT IOcp

Prerequisites EAMC103, EAMCI13,

Corequisite EAMC203.


Examination Tutorial assessment, essay, take-home examination.

Content

The role of Social Impact Assessment (SIA) in Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA), theory and methods of SIA, social variables studies by SIA, Heritage considerations and the National Estate, Cultural values and SIA.

References An extensive set of references for this subject will be given to students at the commencement of the semester.

EAMS290 HYDROLOGY AND SOILS ANALYSIS

Prerequisites EAMSI02, EAMS112.

IOcp

Hours 4 Hours per week lectures and practicals, field work and directed reading.


Contenl

Basic components of the hydrologic cycle and soil classification and identification. Topics include rainfall/runeff analysis (RATIONAL method), soil moisture and permeability, interception, flood analysis, solute mixing, pollutant loading, instrumentation and small catchment hydrology.

References

Dunne, T. and Leopold, L. 1978, WalerinEnvironnumtaJPlanning Freeman.

Institution of Engineers, 1987, Australian Rainfall and Runoff lEA.

APPLIED SCIENCE AND lECHNOLOOY SUBJECT DlOSCRIPTIONS

McDonald, R.C. Isbell, R.F.,et al. 1990, Australian Soil and Survey, Field Handbook, 2nd edn Inkata Press.

EAMS291 WATER RESOURCES MANAGEMENT

PrereqllisiJes EAMSI02, EAMS112.


likP

HOUTS 4 Hours per week lectures and practicals, field work and directed ruding.


Contenl

Examination of many of the majorenviroruneruaJ. issues associated with water resources development. Topics covered include reseIVoir and catchment management, wateruse, entrophication, thermal stratification of storages, floodplain management, irrigation/salinisalion and wastewater disposal to land and water bodies.

References

Petts, G.E. 1984, Impounded Rivers Perspective/or Ecological Management 10hn Wiley,

Pigram,l,]. 1986, Issues in the Management of Australia's Water Resources Longman Cheshire.

Carter, L. 1986, Environmental Impact of Water Resources Projects Lewis Publishers.

EAMS292 PLANT SYSTEMATICS AND PLANT ECOLOGY IOcp

Prerequisites EAMSI01, EAMSll1.


Examination Assignments,laboralOIy and field reports, andfinal examination.

ContenJ

A study of botanical concepts and principles with particular emphasis upon Australian species and ecosystems, Students will acquire skills in plant identification and classification. Physiological processes and evolutionary adaptations will be studied along with checklists, distributions, and plant associations reflecting environmental factors. Current theories in plant ecology will be examined.

TexI To be advised.

Reference

Beadle, N.C.W. Evans et al., 1981, Flora oflhe SydfU!yRegion 2nd edn A.H. & A.W. Reed.

EAMS293 ANIMAL SYSTEMATICS AND ANIMAL ECOLOGY IOcp

Prerequisites EAMSI0l, EAMS111.



Examination Assignments, laboratory and field reports and final examination.

57

SECfION FIVE

Content

A study of the systematics, evolution, ecology and distribution of the Australianfauna. Theidentificalion of Australian vertebrates to at least the level of sub·class or order. Diagnostic structures such as skeletal and dental features will be studied along with trapping and tagging techniques to estimate population size and distribution. Terrestrial and aquatic systems will beexamined for life histories and ecological relationships.

Text To be advised.

EAMS301 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT I

Prerequisites EAMS201, EAMS211.


10 cp

Examination Assignments, field reports and final examination.

Conlenl

The skills, attitudes and knowledge needed for environmental management practices will be developed through experiential and team learning strategies. The economics of the ecologically sustainable utilisation of natural resources will be a prime focus. Management practices in AustraJia and selected foreign countries will be studied.

Text To be advised.

References

IUCN. WWF, and UNEP, 1991, Caring for tM Earth United Nations Environment Program.

World Commission on Environment and Development Our Common Future The Brnndtland Report.

UNEP, 1987.

Dorney, L.C, 1987 , TM Professional Practice of Environmental Managemenl Springer-Verlag.

EAMS311 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT II IOcp




Examination Assignments, field reports and final examination.

Content

The principles of land management and people management will be explored in relation to the impact of developments in Australia Restoration and rehabilitation techniques and practices will be studied in conjunction with cost/benefit analysis and the maintenance of biological diversity, freshwater, soil and marine resources.

Text To be advised.

References

IUCN, WWF, and UNEP, 1991, Caring for the Earth United Nations Environment Program.

World Commission on Environment and Development Our Common Future The Brundtland Report, UNEP, 1987.

58

APPLIED SCIENCE AND lECHNOLOOY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS

Dorney, L,C. 1987, The Professional Practice ofEnvironmenlal MantJgement Springer-Verlag.

EAMS301 SPECIALIST STUDY

Prerequisite All prescribed l..evel200 subjects,

20cp

Hours 4 Hours per week (minimum) for one year.

Examination Maintenance of log book, performance at viva. and submission of final report.

ConJenl

The student is assigned to a co-operating host organisation and placed in a problem solving orteam situation to study an issue or set of issues currently being addressed by that organisation, The student will report on the structure and functions of the host organisation and on progress made towards the resolution of the particular issue(s) under study.

References lists will be provided by the student's supervisor and by the host organisation.

EAMS304 REGIONAL AND NATIONAL ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES IOcp

Prerequisites EAMSI04, EAMSI14.

Hours 4 Hours per week, field work and directed reading.


Content

This course examines case studies of regional and national environmental issues which highlight the major types of environmental assessment. The Commonwealth environmental legislation and environmental law are also covered.

Reference

Thomas, I. 1987. Environmental Impact Assessment Australian Perspectives and Practice Monash University.

EAMS314 ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT IOcp

Prerequisites EAMS104. EAMSI14.

Hours 4 Hours per week, field work and directed reading.


Content

This course covers the rationale and methodology of environmental impact assessment (ElA). Also covered areimpact assessment techniques in the practice, the role of International Aid agencies, current developments in environmental management, environmental audits and risk analysis.

Texts

Walhem, P. (ed). 1988, EnvironmentallmpactAssessmentTMory and Practice Unwin Hyman.

Beder, S. (ed), 1990, Environmental Impact StatemenlsSelected Readings Sydney University.

Reference

Buckley, R. 1991 ,A Handbookfor EnvironmentalAudit AIDAB.

SECfION FIVE

EAMS390 SOIL CONSERVATION AND MANAGEMENT 10 cp


HOUTS 4 Houn per week lectures and practicals, field work and directed reading,


Contenl

Examination of soils,land use and conservation. particularly in relation to soils of NSW, Soil and water management principles for various types of land use including urban development. Practical analysis of control structures, sizing and prediction. Use of soils for domestic and industrial wastewater disposal and site rehabilitation.

Text

Channan, P,E.V. and Murphy, B. W. 1991 ,Soils Their Properties and Management Sydney University Press.

Reference

McDonald, R.C. Isbell, R.F. et all990, Australian Soil and Land Survey, Field Handbook, 2nd edn Inkata Press.

EAMS391 WATER AND SOILS APPLICATIONS AND MODELLING IOcp

Prerequisites EAMS290 EAMS291.


Hours 4 Hours per week lectures and practicals, field work and directed readings,


Content

The use and application of micro-computers to model water balances, runoff, stormwater quality, non-point source pollution and soil erosion. Specific examination of practical applications using POLLUTE, SOILOSS (USLE), ANSWERS, CREAMS, OPT and other soft ware models to simulate hydrologic processes and water quality and pollutant variables.

References

Lal,R. (ed) 1988, Soil ErosionResearchMethods Soil and Water Conservation Societ.

Various software manuals.

EAMS391 FLORA COMPONENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT IOcp



Examination Assignments, field reports, and f'mal examination

Content

A study of the skills and knowledge required for competence in the compilation of vegetation surveys in connection with environmental impact studies and plans of management in connection with both development projects and the conservation and management of natural ecosystems. The use of relevant field

APPLIED SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS

techniques of transect studies, species composition analyses, and assessment of physical and chemical factors will be studied.

References

Groves, R.H. (ed) 1981, Australian Vegetalion Cambridge University Pres.

Australian Surveying and Land Infonnation Group (AUSUG). 1990,AtlasofAustralianResourcesVol6VegetaiionGovemment Printer, Canberr.

EAMS393 FAUNA COMPONENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT IOcp

Prerequisite EAMS292, EAMS293.


Content

A study of the assessment of the faunal factor in environmental impact studies and plans of management. Fluctuations in animal populations due to various factors such as season, drought, fire and developmental impact will be studied.

References

Reader's Digest 1988, Complete Book of Australian Birds Reader's Digest Services, Ply Ltd.

Strahan, R. (ed) 1983, Complete Book of Australian Mammals Angus and Robertson.

Kennedy. M. (ed) 1990,Australia' s Endangered Species, Simon Schuste.

EAMC303 OCCUPATIONAL HYGIENE AND TOXICOLOGY IOcp

Prerequisites EAMC203, EAMC213 or equivalent.

Hours 2 hours per week for one year.

Examination Two major written assisgnments and an examination at the end of each semester.

Content

A study of human organ systems and the nature of environmental pollutants and theiradverseeffects on human health. TIlis subject also studies hazard identification, hygiene standards and the control of environmental conditions in the workplace. Visits to industrial sites are undertaken together with practice in the use of monitoring and protective devices.

Text

Harrington, J .M. and Gill, F.S. 1987, OccupationalHealLhPoc/cet Consultant, 2nd edn, Blackwell Scientific Publications,

References

An extensive list of references will be provided at the commencement of lectures.

EAMC3I3 THE SOCIAL ASPECTS OF ENVIRONMENTAL HEALTH IOcp

Prerequisites EAMC203, EAMC213.

Corequisile EAMC303

59

SECfION FIVE

Hours 2 hours per week for one semester.

Exanu:nation Tutorial assessment, essay, take·home examination.

ConlenJ

The social origins of disease, case studies and history, social forms of disease conteol, eg the sanitation movement, lifestyle related disease, standards of living and health, environmental degradation and health, ecologically sustainable development and health, the social construction of health related terminology, eg 'risk' ,risk .tak:ing and risk ·imposition, health protection policy, justice and the political economy of health at national and international levels.

References

An extensive list of references will be provided at the commencement of lectures.

60

AVIATION SUBlECf DESCRIPTIONS

Aviation SUbject Descriptions A VIA subjects areavailable only tocandldatesenrolled Intbe Bachelor of Science (Aviation) degree

100 Level Aviation Syllabus

The aviation syllabus is based upon four broad areas of study:

1 Aeronautical Engineering (aerodynamics, engines, systems and design);

2 Aviation Science (meteorology and navigation);

3 Human Factors (aviation psychology, medicine, and ergonomics);

4 Aviation Management (aviation law, administration, and computer applications).

The syllabus has a spiral design with a broad foundation in first year proceeding to in-depth and more individualised study in the third year. The project in third yearis designed as background to pursue a postgraduate Bachellro of Science (Aviation) Honours program. Group or individual projects are problem·based and requ~ stu4z"ts to gain industry experience to link theory and praCllce.

The sequence and scheduling of aviation subjects is determined by the needs of integration with flight training and commercial pilot licensing over the first two years of the degree.

AVIAI09 INTRODUCTORY METEOROLOGY s.:p


Examination Progressive assessment based on assignments and tutorials plus a 2 hour final examination.

Content

Introduction to atmospheric pressure, wind, humidity, thermodynamics, cloud, precipitation and icing; Structure of the atmosphere; Introduction 10 A vialion forecasts and meteorological reports.

Texl

P.P.L Meteorology

Bureau of Meteorology ,Manual of Meteorology Part I, General Meteorology, Part 2 Aviation Meteorology.

AVIAlIO INTRODUCTORY NAVIGATION Scp


ExaminaJion Progressive assessment based on assignments and tutorials plus a 2 hour examination.

COnlent

Practical methods of pilot navigation flight planning. The theoretical aspects of navigation; the fonn of the earth; map projections, scale and scale variation, confonnality; navigational astronomy; the vector triangle and its solution by plotting and by computing; flight and navigational instruments, theoretical aspects, accuracy, errors and use.

T"", Aeronautical Information Publication (CAA).

SECfION FIVE

AVIAIlI INTRODUCTORY AERODYNAMICS Scp


Examination Progressive assessment plus examination.

Content

Basicfluid mechanics of an incompressible flow • Reynold's No., Bernoulli's equation. The genera1ion of lift, drag,.induced drag, lift·augmentation devices, downwash and wake turbulence. Properties of aerofoils, three dimensional effects on section characteristics. Aerodynamic factors influencing aircraft performance drag index, IJD ratios, configuration and altitude effects, climb and descent.

References

Anderson, 1.D.1989, Introduction to Flighl 3rd edn McGrawHill.

Shevell, R.S. 1987, Funckunentals of Flighl 2nd edn PrenticeHall.

Dole, C.E. 1988, Flighl Theory for Pilots 2nd ed.

Thorn, T. Basic Aeronautical Knowledge Aviation Theory Centre.

AVIA1I2 INTRODUCTORY HUMAN FACTORS IOcp


Examination Progressive assessment based on class tests, seminars, assignments and a 2 hour examination.

Content

Information processing; vision/balance; spatial disorientation; perception; memory; decision making; motor control.

Texl

Trollip,S. &1ensen, R.1991,HumanFactorsforGeneraIAviation.

Reference

Green, R. 1991, Human Factors for Pilots.

A VIAIl3 AIRCRAFT PERFORMANCE AND SYSTEMS 5cp

Hours 3 Hours lecture and 2 Hours tutorial a week for one semester.

Examination Progressive assessment plus a final examination.

Conten!

(a) Principles of operation of aircraft fuel, hydraulicand electrical systems, undercaniageand flight controls. The application of mechanical linkages, and electrical circuits to these systems. Basic circuit theory.

(b) Aircraft weight and balance, performance and structural weight limitations, determination of take-off and landing weight and centre of gravity, aerodynamics reasons of centre of gravity limitations, use of aircraft loading systems (mathematical and graphical approaches), adjustment of weight and centre of gravity, regulatory requirements.

(c) International Standard Atmosphere, factors affecting aircraft penonnance, use of performance charts for take·off and landing, limitations and safety considerations, regulations and requirements for Authorised Landing Areas.

AVIATION SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS

Texts

Civil Aviation Regulalions (CAA).

Civil Aviation Orders 20-99.

Aeronautical Information Publicatwn (CAA).

Thom, T.BasicAeronautical Knowledge Aviation Theory Centre.

A VIAIl4 FLIGHT RULES AND PROCEDURES s.:p


Examinmion Progressive assessment plus a fmal examination.

Content

Overview of International aviation regulation. Australian Civil Aviation Regulations and Orders governing aircrew procedures and the airworthiness of aircraft and their design standards. Aircrew licensing requirements, Air Traffic Control procedures and pilot's airworthiness responsibilities. The course introduces CAA requirements to the level of the Private Pilot licence and addresses the international and local regulations of aviation activities.

Texts

Civil Aviation Regulations (CAA).

Civil Aviation Orders 20-99,100.101,104, (CAA).

Enroute Supplement - Australia (CAA).

Aeronauticallnformmion Publication (CAA).

Aerodrome Diagrams (CAA).

A VIA115 RECIPROCATING ENGINES


Scp

Examination Progressive assessment based on assignments plus end of semester examination.

Conten!

Air standard thennodynamic cycles, two and four stroke cycles, petrol and diesel engines, construction features, induction, lu brication and cooling, engine instrumentation, effect of altitude and mixture on combustion, power output, aircraft engine operation, turbo/superchargers, thermodynamic efficiency, vibrations and balancing.

Text

Bent, R.D. & McIGnJey, J.L. 1985, Aircraft Powerplants, 5th edn, McGraw-Hili.

A VIA116 COMMERCIAL METEOROLOGY Scp

Prerequisite AVIAI09.


Examination Progressive assessment based on assignments, tutorials, seminars, and a 2 hour final examination.

Content

Atmospheric pressure; wind, humidity and thermodynamics; c1oud, precipitation and i clog; orographic effects; thunderstorms; tropical meteorology; synoptic situations and fronts;jet streams.

Hazardous weather windshear, microbursts and macrobursts.

61

SEcrION FIVE

Text

Manual of Meteorology Parts 1 and 2 (A.G.P.S.).

AVIA117 NAVIGATION Scp

Prerequ~ile A VlAllO.


Examination Progressive assessment based on assignments, tutorials presenta1ions and a 2 hour final examination.

Content

Theoretical aspects of Rhumb line navigation. The development of pilot navigation techniques from air plot and track plot meUtods. The development of metal DR and of orientation systems. Pilot navigation radio aids. Their basic principles, signal propagation, use, errors.

Flight planning for twin piston engined aircraft. The point of no return and critical point.

Text

AeronaUlicallnformo.tion Publication (CAA).

A VlA118 AERODYNAMICS Scp

Prerequisite A VIA 111.


Examination Progressive assessment based on laboratory reports and assignments plus a final examination.

ConJent

Aircraft stability and control; longitudinal and lateral stability, aerodynamic coupling, CG effects on stability, gyroscopic coupling; effect of aircraft configuration on stability, wing sweep, dihedral, canards. Aerofoil characteristics. Boundary layer· laminar and turbulent and transition. Wind Tunnel experiments. Incompressible fluid dynamics. Vorticity. Propeller analysis blade element and disc Uteories, propeller efficiency and sizing, constant speed units.

References

Shevell, R.S. 1989, Fundamentals of Flight, 2nd edn, Hall.

Houghton, E.L. and Canuthers, N.B. 1989, Aerodynamicsfor Engineering Students Arnold.

AVIA119 AVIATION PSYCHOLOGY AND MEDICINE

Prerequisite AVIAI12.


Scp

Examination Progressive assessment based on class tests, assignments, tutorials and a 2 hour examination.

ContenJ

Medicine altitude, atmosphere and respiration; acceleration, vision, hearing, air sickness; health, drugs; first aid, pilot fitness; fatigue;

Psychology attention, workload, stress, personality, communications.

62

AVIATION SUBJEcr DESCRIPTIONS

Texis

O'Hare. D. and Roscoe, S. 1990, FlighldeckPerformance-The Human Factor, Iowa U.P.

References

Harding & Mills. 1988, Aviation Medicine, British Medical Associalion,.London.

A VIAl20 A VIA TlON LAW, COMMERCIAL FLIGHT RULES & PROCEDURES lOcp

Prerequisite AVIA114.


Examination Progressive assessment based on assignments and tutorials plus a 2 hour final examination on Part A and a 3 hour final examination on Part B.

Content

Part A The origins of Law in Australia; Legal Institutions in Australia; Constitution; Tort (Negligence); Criminal Law; Contract (Hire & Insurance); Criminal Law; Deregulation of the Aviation Industry; International Conventions; Administrative Law;

Part B Australian Civil Aviation Regulations and Orders governing aircrew licensing and procedures to the level of Commercial Pilot Licence.

Texts


Civil Aviation Orders 20-99,100, (CAA).

AVIA121 AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS AND PROPULSION


Scp

Examination Assessment based on assignments and laboratory reports plus a final examination.

Content

Hydraulic and mechanical systems on aircraft, air conditioning and pressurisation including thermodynamics, ice protection and fire systems, under caniage and flight controls. Electrical systems, analo gdevices, basic circuit anal ysis using Kirchoff and Thevenin methods, tuning circuits, filters. Introduction to database and spreadsheet software

References

Smith, RJ. 1987, Electronics Circuits and Devices Wile.

Pallet, Aircraft Electrical Systems.

Lombardo, D.A. 1988, Aircraft Systems- Understanding Your Aeroplane TAB.

Basic Functional Devices and Systems (CAA).

A VIA123 AIRCRAFT PERFORMANCE AND LOADING Scp



Examination Progressive assessment plus a fmal examination.

SEcrION FIVE

Content

(a) Mean Aerodynamic Chord; advanced use of loading charts; adjustment of weight and centre of gravity.

(b) Multi·engine operations and performance consideIations~ use of take-off enToute; and landing performance charts for single and multi·engine aircraft, knowledge of Ute perfonnance and operation of Ute Echo MK IV aeroplane. .

Texts


Civil Aviation Orders 20-99 (CAA).

Aeronaulicallnformation Publication (CAA).

Abridged Performance and Operation Manualfor Echo Mk IV.

AVIA207 AVIATION METEOROLOGY Scp

Prerequisite A VIA116.


Examination Progressive assessment plus a 2 hour final examination.

ContenJ

Operational meteorology, tropical meteorology, complex. thennodynamics, micro and meso·sca1e winds, surface synoptic charts, dynamics of lows and highs, visibility, fog, hazardous weather analysis.

Text

Bureau of Meteorology, Manual of Meteorology Parts 1 and 2

Department of Aviation Meteorology Handbook

A VIA208 INSTRUMENT NA VIGA T[ON Scp




Content

Radio Navigation Systems and Aids; Radio Navigation teclutiques using conventional aids; ADF/NDB, VOR, DME, U.s, Right Director, Radar; Principles and errors of radio and radar aids.

Instrument Flight Procedures, Airspace, and Air Traffic Control; Departure Procedures; Enroute Procedures; Holding Procedures; Instrument Approach Procedures; Emergency Procedures; IFR Right Planning

Texts

Enroute Charts (CAA).

Departure and Approach Procedures (CAA).

Tenninal Area Charts.

CAO's.

Enroute supplement.

A.J.P.'s.

A VIA nON SUBJEcr DESCRIPTIONS

Reference

Heel, S. 1992, Instrument Rating Course, Action Aviation Supplies.

Thorn, T.lnslrumenl Rating Manual, Vol. 1 & 2 Aviation Theory Centre.

A VIA209 LONG RANGE NA VIGA TlON Scp



Examination Progressive assessment plUS a 2 hour final examination.

Conlent

The construction properties and use of orthomorphic charts suitable for long range navigation. The calculation of great circle tracks and distances. Grid navigation; navigation in polar regions; navigation on the climb and descent~ high speed/high altitude navigation including the use of radio aids and area navigation systems; weather radar; inertial navigation systems; operational problems including the use of off track alternates; searches.

Text To be advised.

AVIA210 COMPRESSIBLE AERODYNAMICS Scp



Examination Progressive assessment, tutorials plus a final examination.

Content

Thennodynamics of a compressible perfect gas, effects of compressibility on lift, Prandtl·Glauert equation, critical mach number, shock stall and drag of vergence. Supersonic and transonic aerofoils and wings, wave drag, area ruling.

Vortex lift at low speeds from delta wings and strakes.

References

Houghton, E.L. & Carruthers, N.B. 1989, Aerodynamics for Engineering Students, 3rd edn, Arnold.

Shevell, R.S. 1989, Fundamentals of Right, 2nd edn, Prentice· Hall.

McCormick, B.W. Aerodynamics, Aeronautics and Flight Mechanics.

AVIA211 JET ENGINES Scp

Prerequisite 60 credit points A VIAl00 level

Hours 3 Hours per week for one semester plus field trip.


ContenJ

Characteristics of gas turbine engines and basic thermodynamic analysis, requirements for combustion, fuel specifications, combustion chambers, turbines, compresor design features, materials employed in aviation gas turbines, turbo·jets, turbofans, turbo-props, ramjets, requirements for supersonic intake and nozzle designs, developments in transonic, supersonic and

63

SECfION FIVE

hypersonic propulsion systems. Jet and Turbo-prop operations with application to in-service aircraft engines.

TexJ

Gas Turbine Powerplants and Their Maintenance on Aircraft (1987 AGPS-DTC-CAA Main! TexJ 6).

Reference

Rolls Royce, 1986, The Jet Engine, 4th edn, Derby, Rolls Royce.

A VIA212 HUMAN FACTORS lOcp



Examination Progressive assessment plus a 2hourexamination.

Content

Ergonomics; displays; aircraft concrol; automation; simulation; training; stress/arousal; flight phobia; fatigue.

Text

Weiner, E.L & Nagel, P. 1988, Human Factors in Aviation, Academic Press.

Reference

O'Hare, D., & Roscoe, S. 1990, Flightdeck Performance- The Human Factor, Iowa U.P.

A VIA213 AIRCRAFT STRUCTURES AND MATERIALS Scp

Prerequisite 60 credit point A VIA 1 00 level

Hours 3 Hours per week for one semester

Examination Progressive assessment based on assignments and lab reports plus examination

Content

Properties of materials commonly used in aircraft construction and typical fabrication methods. Loads applied to aircraft structures, the Manoeuvre Fnvelope, Gust Loads.

Material stress and strain, strength and ductility. Introduction to Metallurgy. Metal corrosion and methods employed in protection. Intnxluction to sandwich and fibre -matrix composite structures.

References

Shigley, J.E. 1985, Mechanical Engineering Design Metric edn McGraw-Hill.

Dole, C.E. Fundamentals of Aircraft Material Factors, Aviation Books.

AC 43.13 Acceptable Metlwds, Techniquuand Practices FAA/ lAP

US FAR 23 FAA Regulatory Data

A VIA214 JET AIRCRAFT FLIGHT PLANNING lOcp

Prerequisite A VIA 117


Examination Progressive assessment and a 2 hour final examination.

64

A VIA nON SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS

Content

This course provides the core component of the study of flight planning, bringing together jet aircraft performance; safety requirements; legal requirements; the economics of aircraft operation; the route structure. 1be requirements for all stages of the flight, (including emergency operations) are considered and evaluated

TexJ

8727 Performance Manual CAA.

References

Jet Transport Operations and Performance.

Manuals - as available.

A VIA218 ADVANCED AIRCRAFT PERFORMANCE

PrerequisiJe A VIA 123.


Scp


Content

Application of knowledge and skills gained in principles of flight; engines, systems, and instrumentation; aircraft perfonnance and operations; navigation; meteorology; and flight rules and procedures to the operation of charter flights in multi-engine aeroplanes.

a) Concepts and considerations which are distinctive to multiengine flight.

b) Determining the performance that can be expected following an engine failure and explaining the aerodynamic factors and piloting techniques involved with single-engine flight

c) Fuel requirements, fuel planning for holding or alternate requirements, fuel planning for multi-stage flights, finding the minimum or maximum fuel.

d) Determining the maximum take-off weight, esablishing a performance limited or landing weight, finding the maximum payload, picking up or dropping off weight at intennedia1e landing points.

e) Weight and Balance, adding weight while keeping the centre of gravity constant, shifting weight to place the C of G on forward or aft limits.

o Right planning and operations requirements, critical point, planning for alternate and/or holding requirements, use of flow charts.

g) Overwater flying. mountain flying and float flying.

Texts

Civil Aviation Regulations and Civil Aviation Orders 20-99.

Aeronautical Information Publication.

Abridged Performance and Operation Manual for Echo Mk N.

Different Twin Engine Aircraft Pilot Operating Handbooks.

SECIION FIVE

AVIA219 HIGH ALTITUDE METEOROLOGY AND FORECASTING Scp




Content

Upper air meteorology ,jet streams, c1earairturbulence, complex flows, thermal winds, wind shear, forecasting using radar, use of satellites, forecasting meso-scale phenomena

Text To be advised.

AVIA220 AIRCRAFT FATIGUE MANAGEMENT Scp


Hours 3 Hours a week for one semester.


Content

Concepts of safe life, fail safe and damage tolerance. The mechanism offatigue; stress concentration, dynamic load spectra, crack propagation, fatigue life determination,limitations offatigue test methods, non-destructive inspection techniques, damage tolerance ratings, certification requirements. aircraft structural inspection programmes, managing the "aging aircraft" fleet. Static structural overload: column and sheet instabilities. Failures in composites.

References

Shigley I.E. 1985, Mechanical Engineering Design metric edn McGraw Hill.

1991, Structural Integrity of Aging Airplanes Springer Verla

AVIA221 HUMAN PERFORMANCE IN MULTI-CREW OPERATIONS


Hours 3 Hours for one semester.

Scp

Examination Progressive assessment based on seminars, exercises (including demonstrated instruction), assignments and a final examination.

Content

Personality; communications; group processes; leadership; cabin safety.

Text

Wiener E.L.. & Nagel D.C. 1988, Hwnan Factors in Aviation Academic Pres.

AVIA222 MANAGEMENT OF AVIATION Scp



Examination Progressive assessment based on seminars. projects, exercises, plus a final examination.

A VIA TION SUBIECI DESCRIPTIONS

Content

Management of a charter airline operation. Industrial Relations. Financial Management, HumanResourceManagement Industrial safety including legal requirements and management responsibilities. Airworthiness regulatory requirements for the establishment and operation of organisations involved in various aviation activities.

References

CAO's 80 and 82. 100 - 104 series (CAA).

CAR's (CAA).

AVIA223 AVIATION COMPUTING AND ELECTRONICS



Scp


Content

Amplification and switching circuits using p-n jooctions. Boolean logic,logic gates, TTL and CMOS logic devices, multiplexers, comparators, analog-digital convertors, computer architecture, interfacing standards. The application of electronic circuits and computers in the control of aircraft systems; an oveIView of the glass COCkpit. Transducers; the application of electronic circuits and computers in data acquisition and the control of servo devices.

References

Smith, R J. 1987, Electronics Circuits and Devices, 2nd edn, Wiley.

Lancaster, 0.1989, TTL Cookbook Howard Sams.

1987, United Airlines Avionics Fundamentals IA.

Mitchell, Introduction to Electronics Design.

A VIA30S AIRCRAFT DESIGN

Prerequisite AVIA213

Corequisite AVIA318

I/OUTS 3 Hours per week for one semester

Scp

Examination Progressive assessment based on individual and syndicate tasks plus final examination.

Content

Parametric design of aircraft, performance estimation, power requirements, international design standards, market feasibility studies, aircraft development case studies. The syllabus addresses the various roles Lbe professional pilot may play in the multidisciplinary process of aircraft design and development.

References

Civil Aviation Orders 101, 103, 108 series

Stinton, D. 1985, The Design of the Aeroplane Collin.

Raymer D.P. 1989, Aircraft Design: A Conceptual Approach AlA.

65

SECfION FIVE

A VIA306 ADVANCED AIRCRAFT OPERATIONS

PrerequisiJe A VIA214.


10cp

Examination Progressive assessment by class tests, tutorial presentations and assignments.

Content

Standard and computerized flight planning. The evaluation of aircraft types for particular types of operation. The development of operational procedures and policy.

Text To be advised.

References

Performance Manuals and Right Planning Oataor CUrrent Aircraft Types.

AVIA308 AVIATION INSTRUCTION 10cp

Prerequisile 60 credit points A VIA200 level

Hours 4 Hours lecture and 2 Hours tutorial a week for semester one.

Examination Progressive evaluation based on seminar preparation and presentation, practice teaching. assignments andexaminations.

Content

The psychology ofleaming. instructional methods, evaluation of instruction and leaming,lesson planning, use and preparation of teaching aids. Teaching in the aviation environment.

Texls

Telfer, R. and Biggs 1. 1988, The Psyclwlogy of Flight Training Iowa State University Press.

1988. eAA FlighJ Instructor's Manual CAA,.

References

Cole, P & Chan, L. 1989, Teaching Principles and Practice, Prentice Hall.

Cooper, J.M. et al199O, Classroom Teaching Skills, Heath.

A VIA310 ADVANCED NA VIGA TlON IOcp

Prerequisites AVIA209.


Examination Progressive assessment by class tests, tutorials, presentations and assignments.

Content

This course covers the spectrum of navigation aids, methods and systems, past, present and projected. The mathematical and physical basis of navigation and navaids. System accuracy and reliability requirements.

Text To be advised

References

Janes Avionics 1989 -1990.

Manufacturers Technical and Operating Manuals.

66

A VIA TION SUBlECf DESCRIPTIONS

AVIAJII ADVANCED AVIATION INSTRUCTION

Prerequisite A V1A308.

10cp

Hours 4 Hours of lectures and 2 Hours of tutorials a week in semester two.

ExaminationProgressiveassessmentbasedonseminarpreparation and presentations, practice teaching, assignments and examination.

Content

Inslructional design, problem-based learning, computers in instruction, simulation, training environments, student stress and training, aircrew perfonnance assessment.

Text to be advised.

References

Cole, P. and Chan, L.1989. TMching Principles and Practice Prentice Hall.

Cooper, J.M. et al. 1990, Classroom Teaching Skills, Heath.

A VIA312 APPLIED AERODYNAMICS 5cp

Prerequisites A VIA318, A VIA223


Examination Progressive assessment plus final examination

Conlent

a) flight simulation using analog and digital computezs, modelling stability and control characteristics from flight lest data. simulator fidelity, aircraft flight control computers.

b) The use of computers in predicting aerodynamic peIformance; comparison of computer predictions with wind tunnel results. modelling real aircraft effects including boundary layers, and compressibility.

References

Elkin, B. 1982, Dynamics of FlighJ ,Wil.

HOUghton, E.L. & Canuthers, N.B. 1989, Aerodynamics for Engineering Students 3rd edn Arnol.

Katz,J. and Plotkin, A. 1990, Low Speed Aerodynamics McGraw Hill.

Nelson. R.C. Flight Stability and AUZomatic Control

AVIA314 DIRECTED STUDY 10cp

Prerequisites Atleasl two of the following: A VIA306,A VIA308. A VIA310, AVIA318

Hours 4 Hours per week in semester two.

Examination Satisfactory completion of project.

Conlent

This subject is designed for students interested in developing a specialist topic under the supervision of alecturer. The approval of the lecturer and Year III co-ordinator is required.

A detailed proposal indicating objective(s) and workplan are to be submitted by the end of semester one. The resultant project should represent the allocation of four Hours per week for the

SECfION FlVE

second semester, and is due on the first week of the examination period at the end of the semester.

Text To be advised.

A VlAJlS ADVANCED AVIATION MANAGEMENT 5cp



Examination Progressive assessment based on seminars, assignments and final project.

Content

Students will be assigned to groups of four which will be responsible for the production of a group report on an aviation management topic to be decided in consultation.

AVIA316 FLIGHT DECK PERFORMANCE 5cp



Examination Progressive assessment and final exam.

Content

Systems theory in aviation; selection and testing of pilots; human factors research methods; accident investigation.

Text

Flightdeck Performance: Course Resource Materials

AVIA317 AVIATION CLIMATOLOGY Scp




Content

Comparative urban and regional climatology. Implication for international flight planning and flying. Localised hazardous climates Europe; North America; the Atlantic routes; polar routes; Asia and the Pacific.

Text To be advised.

A VIA318 AIRCRAFT STABILITY AND CONTROL Scp

Prerequisite A VIA 118

Hours 3 Hours per week

Aircraft stability and control. aerodynamic couplir:.g, stick fixed / free longitudinal static stability. neutral point, cg margin. static margin, lateral and directional stability. configuration effects, control surface sizing. Introduction to Aeroelasticity.

References

Houghton. E.L. & Carruthers. N.B. 1989, Aerodynamics for Engineering Students, 3rd edn, Arnol.

Stinton. D. 1985, The Design of 1M Aeroplane Collin.

AVIATION SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS

AVIAJ20 AVIATION INSTRUCTION PRACTICUM I 5cp

Corequisile A VIA 308


Examinations Progressive assessment based on seminars, preparation and presentation of lesson plans.

The purpose of the practicum is to enable prospective flight instructors to apply their knowledge of learning and teaching principles to the preparation of lessons plans adapted to the flight training environment. Italsoaimstoprovidenewflightinstructors with the basis of future development in the practice and theory of aviation education.

A problem-based approach will be used, through small group discussion and team teaching, to examine the teaching practices and problems encountered in flight instruction. Special emphasis will be placedon teaching in a non-traditional and oftenthreatening environment.

Texls

Telfer, R & Biggs, J. 1988. The Psychology of Flighl Training, Iowa Slate University Press.

Civil Aviation Aurhorily 1988. FlighJ Ins/ruc/or's Manual.

References

Cole, P. & Chan, L. 1989, Teaching Principles and Practice, Prentice Hall.

Cooper, J.M. et al. 1990. Classroom Teaching Skills. Heath.

Turney, C. et aI. 1976, Sydney Micro Skills. Teaching SkiUs Developmenl Project, Sydney University Press.

AVIA321 AVIATION INSTRUCTION PRACTICUM II

Prerequisites AVIA308

Corequisite AVIA 311, A VIA320


s cp

Examinations Progressive assessment based on seminars, presentations, and practice teaching.

Conlent

The purpose of the practicum is to enable prospective flight instructors to practice their teaching skills and apply their knowledge of learning and teaching principles in the flight training environment under the supervision of practising flight instructors and university supervisors.

The practicum will offer demonstrations by practisinginstruClors, followed by discussions, and supervised practical teaching experience for the students. It offers practical links for the academic components of the aviation instruction courses and provides the opportunity to integrate the knowledge gained to the aviation instruction context. It will expose student instructors to the variety and complexity of working in the flight training environment and allows them to gain professional experience and development.

67

SECfION FIVE

Tuls

Telfer, R & Biggs, J. 1988, TM Psychology ofFlighi Training, Iowa State University Press.

Cillil AlIialionAUlhority. 1988, Flighllnstructor's Manual.

References

Cole, P. & Chan, L. '1989, Teaching Principles and Practice, Prentice Hall.

Cooper, J.M. et aI. 1990, Classroom Teacmng Skills, Heath.

Tumey, C. et aI. 1976, Sydney Micro Skills, Teaching Skills Dellelopment Project, Sydney University Press.

68

BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS

Biological Sciences Subject Descriptions

BIOLlOI PLANT & ANIMAL BIOLOGY IOcp

Prerequisites Nil - see notes on BIOLlOl under "Assumed Knowledge for Entry to the Faculty".


ExaminaJion One 3 hour paper.

Content

The course is organised into 2 units.

Unit 1

Plant Diversity - Form and Function.

Theme Structural specialization to facilitate efficient functional capacity.

Topics

The major plant groups and their life cycles. Higher plant structure and function. Plant development. Plant diversity as a consequence of adaptation forsuIVival in a range of environments.

Unit2

Animal Diversity - Form and Function

Theme The variety of structural and functional adaptations which have allowed ani mals to exploit the wide range of available environments.

Topics

The Animal Phyla - organisation of tissues and organs, body plans, body cavities, patterns of development.

Animal Function - digestion, circulation, respiration, integration and control, homeostasis, reproduction and development.

TexlS

Villee, C.A., Solomon, H.P. et al.1989, "Biology" 2nd edn, Saunders College Publishing, Philadelphia/Sydney.

or

Keeton, W.T. & Gould, J.L. 1986, Biological Science, 4th edn, Norton.

Abercrombie, M., Hickman, C.J. et al 1985, The Penguin Dictionary of Biology Penguin.

References

Pearse & Buchsbaum,el al. 1987 ,Living Invertebrates BlackweW Boxwood.

Taiz, L. Wld Zeijer, E. 1991, Plant Physiology The Benjamin! Cummings Publishing Co.

BIOLl02 CELL BIOLOGY, GENETICS & EVOLUTION IOcp

Prerequisite See notes on BIOL1 01 under" Assumed Knowledge for Entry to the Faculty".


Examination One 3 hour paper.

SECfION FIVE

Content

Cell Biology

Theme The evolution and functional organization of cells.

Topics

Biological molecules - the structure of proteins, carbohydrates and lipids.

Cell organization - emphasis on organelle ultrastructure and principal function, evolution of cells.

Biological energy processes - photosynthesis, cellularrespiration.

Genetics

Cell division, Mendelian genetics, Scientific method. Molecular biology. Gene action; development and differentiation. Probability. Tests of significance. Immunology.

An introduction to ecology.

Texts

Villee, C.A., Solomon, E.P., et al1989, "Biology" 2nd edn Saunders College Publishing, Philadelphia/Sydney.

or

Keeton, W.T. & Gould, J.L. 1986, Biological Science, 4th edn, Norton.

Abercrombie, M., Hickman, C.J. et al 1985, The Penguin Dictionary of Biology Penguin.

References

Ayala, F.M. & Kiger, J.A. 1984, Modern Genetics, Benjamin Cummings.

Moroney, MJ. 1984, Facts from Figures, Penguin.

Parker, RE. 1973, Introductory Statistics for Biology, Edward Arnold.

Tamarin, R 1991, Principles of Genetics, 3rd edn, Wm. C. Brown.

BIOL201 BIOCHEMISTRY

Prerequisites BIOLlOl, BI0L102.



Content

IOcp

Carbohydrates, lipids, amino acids Wld proteins. Vitamins and coenzymes. Enzymes. Intermediary metabolism.

Texl

Mathews, C.K & van Holde, K. E. 1990, Biochemistry, Benjamin! Cummings Publishing Co.

References

Zuhay, G. 1988, BiocMmistry, 2nd edn MacMillan.

Conn, E.E., Stumpf, P.K. et aI. 1987, Outlines of BiocMmistry , 5th edn, Wiley.

Lehninger, A.L. 1983, PrincipiesofBiochemistryGeneralAspecls ,7th edn McGraw-Hil.

McGilvery, R.W. 1983, Biochemistry. A Functional Approach, 3rd edn Saunders.


BIOL202 ANIMAL PHYSIOLOGY

Prerequisites BI0L101, BIOLl02



ConunJ

Uk"

Consideration of the processes involved in the transport of oxygen in mammals and emphasizing the relation between structure and function. The course examines molecule. cell and tissue structure and function, particularly of nerve and muscle. and therespiralory ,cardiovascular andcontrol systems. Particular emphasis is given to physiological adaptations to the environment and the effects of the environment on physiological functions.

References

Eckert, R. & Randall, D. 1983, Animal Physiology Mechanisms and Adaptations, 3rd edn, Freeman.

Bloom, W. & Fawcett,D.W. 1975,A TextbookofHistology ,10th edn, Saunders.

Prosser, C.L. 1973, Comparative Animal Physiology, 3td edn Saunders.

Ruch, T.e. & Patton, H.D. 1974, Physiology and Biophysics If CircuJationRespiralionand Fluid Balance ,20thedn, Saunders.

McGilvery, RW. 1983, Biochemistry A Functional Approach, 3rd edn Saunders.

BIOL204 CELL AND MOL,~,CULAR BIOLOGY lOcp

Prerequisites BIOL101, BIOLl02.

Hours 6 Hours per week. for one semester.


Content

Cellular organisation and inter-relalionships. Organelles, their structure & function. Cellular processes.

Texl

Alberts, B., Bray, D. et aI. 1989, Molecular Biology oftMCell, 2nd edn, Garland.

BIOL205 MOLECULAR GENETICS

Prerequisites BIOL101, BIOLl02.



ContenJ

IOcp

The structure of chromosomes and chromatin. Genetic mapping and recombination. DNA structure, replication and repair, Gene action and its control. Immunogenetics.

Recombinant DNA technology and genetic engineering.

TeXIs

Tamarin, R. 1991, Principles of Genetics, 3rd edn, Wm. C. Brown.

Old, R.W. & Primrose, S.B. 1989, Principles of Gene Manipulation, 4th edn, Blackwell.

69

SECfION FIVE

References

Alberts. B., Bray. D. el aI. 1989, Molecular Biology o/the Cell. 2nd edn, Garland.

Sambrook. J" Fritsch. liF. et aI. 1989, Molecular Cloning. 2nd edn, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory.

BIOL206 PLANT PHYSIOLOGY

Prerequisites BIOLlOt, BIOLI02.



Content

lOc:p

Fundamental processes peculiar to plant cells are examined. Theseincludecell walerreiations, membrane transport of solutes, fixation of atmospheric nitrogen, and photosynthesis. Cellular regulation of the processes is emphasized.

Text

Taiz. L. & Zeijer. E. 1991, Plant Physiology The Benjamin! Cummings Publishing Co.

Reference

Salisbury, F.B. & Ross, C.W. 1985, Plant Physiology. 3rd edn, Wadsworth.

BIOL207 ECOLOGY lOc:p Prerequisites BIOLIOl.BIOLl02.

Only one of BIOL203 and BIOL207 can be credited towards a degree.



ConJenJ

A course in animal and plant ecology. Topics will include

life tables and population growth equations. The estimation of population parameters. The effect of environmental factors on the survival and reproduction of organisms and hence on their distribution and abundance. The effect of pollutants on animals and plants. The detection of patterns within plant communities and the causes of such patterns. Energy flow andresourcecycling in communities. Species diversity - measurement and relationship between species diversity in an area and the environment. Quantitative methO(1s for comparing communities. Rehabilitation studies.

Texl

Krebs, C.J.1985,Ecology 3rd edn, Harper & Row.

References

Recher, H., Lurmey, D. et al (eds). 1986, A Natural Legacy Pergamon Press.

Krebs, C.J. 1989, Ecological Methodology, Harper & Row.

Hedrick, P.W. 1984. Population Biology. Jones & Bartlett.

BIOLJOI CELL PROCF.5SES lOcp

Not offered in 1993.

70


BIOLJ02 REPRODUCTIVE PHYSIOLOGY

PrerequisiJes Two BIOL200.


Emminalion One 2 hour paper.

Content

lOc:p

Biology of reproduction with particular emphasis on sexual differentiation and gamete physiology. Particular emphasis is given to physiological adaptations to the environmenL

References

Johnson, M.H. & Everitt, B.l. 1988, EssenJial Reproduction Blackwell.

Torrey, T.W. & Feduccia.. A. 1979, Morphogenesis of the VertebraJes , 4th edn Wiley.

Bloom, W. &Fawcett,D.W.1973,ATexlbookofHistology, 10th edn, Saunders.

McGilvery, R. W. Biochemistry. 1983, A Functional Approach, 3rd edn, Saunders.

BIOL303 ENVIRONMENTAL PLANT PHYSIOLOGY

Prerequisites Two BIOL200.



Content

lOc:p

Environmental impacts on whole plant growth are interpreted in tenns of the responses of susceptible components of key physiological processes. The processes examined include whole plant water relations, photosynthesis, mineral ion acquisition and nutrient transport.

ReJerences

Hay, R.K.M. & Walker, Al. 1989, An Introduction to the Physiology oJCrop Yield, Longman Scientific & Technical.

Milthorpe, F.L. & Moorby, 1. 1980, An introduction to Crop Physiology, 2nd edn, Cambridge U.P.

Salisbury, F.B. & Ross, C.W. 1985,Plant Physiology, 3rd edn, Wadsworth.

Taiz, L. & Zeijer, E. 1991, Plant Physiology, The Benjamin/ Cummings Publishing Co.

BIOLJ04 WHOLE PLANT DEVELOPMENT

Prerequisites Two BlOL200.



ConJent

lOc:p

The co-ordinated development of the structural organization and functional capacity of plants from their meristems. The role of environmenta1 parameters, plant growth regulators and selective gene expression in regUlation of developmental patterns.

References

Esau, K. 1960. Anatomy of Seed Plants • Wiley.

SECTION FIVE

Lyndon, R.F. Plant DevelopmenJ. The Cellular Basis. Topics in Plant Physiology 3, M. Black and J. Chapman (eds). Unwin Hyman, London.

Salisbury, F.B. & Ross, C.W. 1985, Plant Physiology, 3rd edn, Wadsworth.

Steeves, T.A. and Sussex, I.M. 1989, Patterns in Plant Development, 2nd edn, Cambridge Univ.Press.·

Taiz, L & Zeijer, E. 1991, Plant Physiology, The Benjamin! Cummings Publishing Co.

BIOLJOS IMMUNOLOGY

Prerequisites Two BIOL200.



Content

lOc:p

Molecular and cellular aspects of the function of the immune system including phylogeny, reproductive and tumour immunology.

Text

Roitt, I.M. 1991, Essential Immunology, 7th edn, Blacnell.

BIOLJ07 MOLECULAR BIOLOGY OF PLANT DEVELOPMENT

Not offered in 1993

BIOLJ09 MOLECULAR BIOLOGY

Prerequisites BIOL2Ql and BIOL205.



Content

lOc:p

lOc:p

How genes function - and their control. Organisms and techniques used in recombinant DNA technology. Applications of recombinant DNA technology in biology and medicine. The generation of immunological specificity. The control of cell proliferation. The origins and genetic basis of cancer. The origins of life.

Special Conditions: Because of limitations of laboratory space and resources, student numbers in this subject will be limited to one laboratory class (48 students). Because the laboratory sessions need to be continuous, they will be held over four consecutive days during the September recess. Students intending to enrol in this subject are required to indicate this during the Semester 1 enrolment period.

Texts

Watson, J.D., HopkinS, N. H. et al1987, Molecular B:'ology of the Gene, Vols. 1 and 11. Benjamin/Cummings Publishing Co., Menlo Park, California and Sydney.

Old, R.W. & Primrose, S.B. 1989, Principles of Gene Manipulation. Blackwell, Oxford and Melbourne.

References

Beiger, S.L. & Kimmel, AR. eds 1987, Guide to Molecular


Cloning Techniques. Methods in Enzymology, Volume 152, Academic Press, San Diego and Sydney.

Sarnbrook, J. Fritsch, E.F. & Maniatis, T. 1989, Molecular Cloning. A Laboratory Manti<U., 2nd edn, (3 vols) Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory press, Cold Spring Harbor, N.Y.

Ausubel, P.M., Brent, R., et al eds 1987 and continuous updates, Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, (2 vols), John Wiley &. Sons, New YorkIBrisbane.

BIOLJIO MICROBIOLOGY 1Oc:p

Prerequisites BIOL201 and one other BIOL200 (BIOL204 advisable).

HoUl's 6 Hours per week for one semester.


Content

Bacteria, fungi, viruses, mycoplasma, protozoa and algae; comparative biochemistry; nutrient cycles; pathogenicity (interactions of agricultural and human significance); industrial microbiology/biotechnology.

Text

Prescott, L.M. 1990, Microbiology Harley & Klein.

References

Brock, T.D. & Madigan, M.T.I991,BiologyofMicro-organisms , Prentice-Hall.

Mathews, c.K. & van Holde, K.E.1990,Biochemistry,Benjamin/ Cummings Publishing Company.

Cano, R.I. & Colome, J.S. 1986, Microbiology West.

BIOLJIl ENVIRONMENTAL BIOLOGY lOc:p Only one of BI0L306 and BIOL311 may be credited towards a degree.

Prerequisites BIOL203 or BIOL207.

Hours 2 Hours of lectures per week for one semester. A threeday field excursion and some laboratory classes.


Content

The course covers applied aspects of both anima1 and plant ecology.

SECTION A Topics include:

Island ecology - thereduclion in species diversity of communities and genetic variability within populations. Evolutionary prospects of island popUlations. Nature Resenres as ecological islands.

Community change - succession, eutrophication and fire in the Australian environment.

Eva1uation of pest control methods (including biological conttol) on environmental and economic grounds as well as their short and long tenn effectiveness.

Under population effects, particularly the relevance of threshold levels for endangered species.

71

SECfION FIVE

SECTION B A selection of topics will be taken from:

The threat of modem agricultural practices to genetic diversity

The potential of microbiology for waste management

Methods for detecting biological pollution

The principles of conservation

Environmental animal and plant physiology studies

The interaction between vegetation, water.table. irrigation and soil salt levels

The commercial harvesting of natura} populations - fish, whale and kangaroo models

Evolution of plant-herbivore and predator-prey systems and otherinterspecificinteractions - implications forcontro] programs

Environmental consequences of the release of genetically engineered species.

The choice of IOpiCS in Section B should be determined in consultation with the Head of Department.

TexI

Krebs. C.!. 1985, EcoLogy, Harper and Row.

References

Hedrick. P.W. 1984, PopUlation Biology, Jones & Bartlett.

Krebs, C.J. 1989, Ecological Methodology ,Harper and Row.

Recher, H., Lunney,D. et al 1988. Natural Legacy ,Pergamon Press.

BIOL312 ANIMAL DEVELOPMENT IOcp

Only one of BIOLJ08 and BlOLJ12 can be credited towards a degree.

Prerequisites Two BIOL200



ConJenJ

The course deals with molecular, cellular and physiological aspects of the development and differentiation of invertebrates and vertebrates. Specific topics include gametes & fertilization, cleavage & gastrulation, molecular biology of development, mammalian development and placentation, sex determination & differentiation, embryos & reproductive technologies, and abnormal development & the role of environmental agents.

References

Alberts, B., Bray, D. et al1989, Molecular Biology of the Cell, 2nd edn. Garland.

Austin, C.R. & Short R V. 1982,ReproductioninMammais vols 1 & 2, 2nd edn, Cambridge.

72

CHEMISTRY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS

Chemistry Subject Descriptions

CHEMIOI CHEMISTRY 101 IOcp

Students who have not studied Chemistry previously are strongly advised to read the first six chapters in the main teXt (Brown and leMay) before commencement of the academic year.

Adlluory subjects Atleast Mathematics (2 unit course), Otemistry (2 unitcourse) and Physics (2 unit course), with ranking in the top 50% in each case.

Hours 3 lecture Hours, 1 hour of tutorial and 2 Hours of laboratory classes per week for one semester.

Examinalion One 3 hour paper. The laboratory work will count for 10% of the final assessment but a pass in the laboratory work is a prerequisite for a pass in the subject.

ConJenJ

General Chemistry (approximately 12 lectures)

Revision of basic chemical principles. Introduction to atomic and molecular concepts. Simple ionic and covalent bonding models.

Organic Chemistry (approximately 241ectures)

Historical development. The shapes, structures and names of organic compounds; reactions of common functional groups; synthesis, differentiation and structural elucidation of organic compounds. Applications of organic chemistry.

Texts

EITHER

Brown, W.H. 1988,lnJroduction to Organic Chemistry, 4th edn, Wadsworth student edn, Brooks/Cole & Nelson.

OR

Hart, H. 1991, Organic Chemistry-A Short Course ,8th edn, International student edn, Houghton Mifflin Co.

Aylward,G.H. & Findlay, T.J.V. 1974, S.l. Chemical Data, 2nd edn, Wiley.

Brown, T.L., LeMay,H.E.,eta1.1991,CMmistry-TMCenJral Science, 5th edn, Prentice-Hall.

Lehman,J. W. 1984,Molecular Model SetforOrganic CMmistry, Allyn & Bacon.

CHEMI02 CHEMISTRY 102 IOcp

Hours 3 lecture Hours and 1 hour of tutorial and 2 Hours of laboratory classes per week for one semester.

Examination One 3 hour paper. The laboratory work will count for 10% of the final assessment but a pass in the laboratory work is a prerequisite for a pass in the subject.

CoflienJ

Inorganic Chemistry (approximately 12 lectures)

Inorganic solids and their structures. Simple molecular orbital theory and structure and bonding in metals. Transition metal chemistry, coordination compounds.

Physical Chemistry (approximately 24 lectures)

Chemical equilibria, thermodynamics, electrochemistry, chemical kinetics.

SECTION FIVE

Text

Brown. T.L.. LeMay. H.E .•• ! aI. 1991. Chemistry- The Cenlral Science, 5th edn, Prentice-Hall.

CHEM211 ANAL ITICAL CHEMISTRY IOcp

Prerequisites CHEMI 01, CHEMI02.

Hours 2 Hours of lectures, 1 hour of tutorials/workshops and 3 Hours of laboratory work each week for one semester.

Examination One 2 hour paper. The laboratory work will count for 15% of the final assessment buta pass in the laboratory work is a prerequisite for a pass in the subject.

ConJefli

Evaluation and manipulation of analytical data, tiuimetric methods of analysis including theory of acid-base, complex fonnation and oxidation - reduction titrations.

Selected instrumental methods of analysis, atomic spectroscopy, absorption spectrophotometry, potentiometric techniques, gas chromatography.

Text

Hargis, L.G. 1988, Analytical Chemistry, Principles and Techniques, Prentice-Hall.

CHEM221 INORGANIC CHEMISTRY

Prerequisites CHEMI01,CHEMI02.

IOcp



ConJem

Main group chemistry and transition metal chemistry. Coordination complexes and metal ion-ligand interactions~ ionic bonding; symmetry and structure.

Introduction to reactions and mechanisms, synthesis, spectroscopic methods, bonding and ligand field theory in coordination compounds and organometallic chemistry.

Text

Cotton, F.A., Wilkinson, G.,d aI. 1987 .Basic Inorganic Chemistry ,2nd edn, Wiley.

CHEM231 ORGANIC CHEMISTRY

Prerequisites CHEMI01, CHEMI02.

IOcp



CoflienJ

A course covering the basic chemistry of aliphatic and aromatic compounds and their spectroscopic properties.

An introduction to spectroscopic methods of structure

CHEMISTRY SURlECTDESCRlPTIONS

determination (infra-red, proton magnetic resonance, mass spectrometry); acidity and basicity of organic compounds; reactions of carbonyl compounds; aromaticity; electrophilic substitution in aromatic systems; reactions of aromatic compounds. An introduction to the chemistry of some biologically important compounds including carbohydrates, amino acids, proteins and nucleic acids.

Texis

Solomons, T.W.G. 1988, Organic Chemistry ,4th edn, Wiley.

OR

(Recommended for students proceeding to Level 300 subjects).

Morrison, R. T. & Boyd, R.N. 1987, Organic CMmistry, 5th edn, Allyn & Bacon.

Lehman,J.W. 1984, Molecular Model Set for Organic Chemistry Allyn & Bacon.

CHEM241 PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY

Prerequisites CHEM10t, CHEMI02.

IOcp


Examinillion One 2 hour paper. The laboratory work will count for 15% of the final assessment but a pass in the laboratory work is a prerequisite for a pass in the subject.

CofllenJ

Chemical Dynamics - rate laws of chemical kinetics, principles of mechanism, determination; transition stale theory; electrolyte activity; thermodynamics of galvanic cells.

Surface Chemistry - definitions; binding in crystals; condensation coefficient; sticking probability; adsorption isothenns; Langmuir modeJ; types of isotherms; detennination of sunace area of adsorbents (BET); applications of adsorptions.

Atomic & Molecular Spectroscopy - structure of free atom~ Bohr model; electronic structure of diatomic molecules; potential energy cUJVes; rotational spectroscopy; vibrational spectroscopy; vibration-rotation spectroscopy.

Texl

Atkins, P.W. 1990, Physical Chemistry, 4th edn, Oxford.

CHEM251 APPLIED CHEMISTRY


IOcp

CHEM261 ENVIRONMENTAL CHEMISTRY IOcp

Prerequisites CHEMI01, CHEMI02.

Hours 2 Hours of lectures, 1 hour of tutorials/workshops and 3 Hours of laboratory each week for one semester.

Examination One 2 hour paper. The laboratory work will count for 15% of the final assessment but a pass in this work is a prerequisite for a pass in the subject.

Cofllefll

This subject is an introduction to environmental chemistry, focussing on the hydrosphere and the atmosphere. Specific topics include general introduction; properties, composition,

73

SECTION FIVE

redox equilibria and complexation in natural and waste waters; chemical aspects of microbial cycles; water pollution; nature and composition oftheatmosphere; inorganic atmospheric pollutants; photochemical smog; atmospheric mOnitoring; an overview of energy sources.

Text

Manahan,S.B. 1990. Environmenlal Chemistry ,5thedn, Lewis.

CHEM311 ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY lOcp

Prerequisile CHEM211.


ExaminaJion One 2 hour paper. The laboratory work will count for 20% of the final assessment but a pass in the laboratory work is a prerequisite for a pass in the subject.

Content

Principles of selected instrumental techniques (e.g. emission spectroscopy and electro-analytical procedures). Solvent extraction; chromatogmphy (theory and techniques).

Text

Christian. G.D. & O'Reilly. I. E. 1986. Instrumental Analysis, 2nd edn. Allyn & Bacon.

CHEM312 CHEMOMETRICS Scp

Prerequisites CHEM211. MATH102 (or MATH 1 12)

Hours 2 Hours of lectures, 1 hour of tutorials/workshops and 3 Hours of laboratory work/assignments each week for half a semester.

Examination One 1 hour paper. Thelaboralory/assignment work will count for 20% of the final assessment but a pass in the laboratory/assignment work is a prerequisite for a pass in the subject.

Content

Use of computers in chemistry to improve the performance of procedures using optimisation methods and to enhance the analysis of measurements using linear and non-linear regression and factor analysis. Theory is exemplified with lypical everyday problems.

Text No formal text; material to be advised.

CHEM313 INDUSTRIAL CHEMICAL ANALYSIS Scp

Prerequisite CHEM2Jl.


ExaminaJion One 1 hour paper. Thelaboratory/assignment work will count for 20% of the final assessment but a pass in the laboratory/assignment work is a prerequisite for a pass in the subject.

Content

A survey of selected techniques for specialised or high volume analysis used in areas as diverse as industriaJ, R & D,hos pital and

74


nuclear chemistry. TopiCS include electronic analytical signal processing; automated analysis (flow analysers, batch anaJysers, samplers); applications of computers and robots; X-ray/electron microprobe analysis; radiochemical analysis; kinetic and enzymatic methods of analysis.

Text No fOImai text; material to be advised.

CHEM314 TRACE ANALYSIS IN ENVIRONMENTAL SYSTEMS

Not available in 1993.

CHEM321 INORGANIC CHEMISTRY

Prerequisite CHEM221.

Scp

lOcp


Exmninalion One 2 hour paper. The laboratory work will count for 20% of the final assessment but a pass in the laboratory work is a prerequisite for a pass in the subject.

Content

A general course exploring the range of modem inorganic chemistry. including synthesis, reactivity and applications of spectroscopic methods.

Metal Chemistry - transition elements and coordination chemistry; isomerism, f -block elements, inorganic reaction mechanisms, electron transfer and voltammetry.

Organometallic Chemistry - main group and transition metals; structure and bonding; cyclic donors; carbonyl and olefin complexes; applications to industrial cataJysis.

Inorganic Spectroscopy - electronic spectroscopy; vibrational spectroscopy; nuclear magnetic resonance spectroscopy; introduction to other methods (e.g. Mossbauer, eleclron spin resonance, and chiroptical spectroscopy).

Text

Purcell, K.F. & Kotz, J.e. 1980, An Introduction to Inorganic Chemistry, International edn, Holt-Saunders.

CHEM322 METAL·METAL BONDING AND CLUSTER CHEMISTRY Scp



Examination One 1 hour paper. Thelaboratory/assignment work: will count for 20% of the final assessment but a pass in the laboratory/assignment work is a prerequisite for a pass in the subject.

Content

Metal-metal multiple bonding; lower halide clusters. structure and bonding in boranes and transition metal clusters; higher nuclearity clusters; clusters and catalysis; Zinll species.

Text No formallext~ material to be advised.

GENERAL INFORMATION Principal Dates 1993

(See separate entry for the Bachelor of Medicine degree course).

January

1 Friday Public Holiday - New Year's Day

6 Wednesday Last day for return of Enrolment Application Forms - Continuing Students

February

5 Friday New students accept UAC main round offer

12 Friday

TO New students enrol

22 Monday

26 Friday last date for payment of General Service Charge

March

1 Monday First Semester begins

30 Tuesday Last day for variation of program in relation

to HECS liability for Semester I.

April

9 Friday Good Friday - Easter Recess commences

19 Monday - Lectures Resume

June

7 Monday Public Holiday- Queen's Birthday

11 Friday FirstSemesterconcludes - Last date for withdrawal from Semester 1 subjects.

14 Monday Mid year Examinations begin

30 Wednesday Closing date for applications for selection to the BachelorofMedicine and BachelorofScience (Aviation) in 1994.

July

2 Friday Mid Year Examinations end

19 Monday Second Semester hegins

August

30 Monday Last day for variation of program in relation to HECS liability for Semester 2.

September

25 Saturday Mid Semester recess hegins

PRINCIPAL DATES 1993

30 Thursday Closing date for UAC applications for enrolment in 1994 (Undergraduate courses other than Medicine and Aviation.

October

4 MoNJay Public Holiday-Labour Day

11 Monday Lectures resume

November

5 Friday Second Semester concludes -last date for withdrawal from Semester 2 and Full Year subjects

8 Monday Annual EKaminations begin

26 Friday Annual Examinations end

1994 February

MOIlday First Tenn begins l

DATES FOR THE 1993 ACADEMIC YEAR FOR THE BACHEWR OF MEDICINE PROGRAM

Year I

Semester 1 commences Monday 1 March, 1993

recess Friday 9 April 1993

10

Friday 16 April 1993

resumes Monday 19 April 1993

concludes Friday 2 July 1993

Semester 2 commences Monday 19July 1993

recess Monday 27 September 1993

10

Friday 8 October 1993

resumes Monday 11 October 1993

concludes Friday 5 November 1993

Examinations commence Monday 8 November 1993

conclude Friday 19 November 1993

Mini-Elective commences Monday 22 November 1993

concludes Friday 3 December 1993

NOTE:

Semester One consists of Block One (10 weeks) and 7 weeks of Block

Two.

Semester Two consists of the remaining 3 weeks of Block Two, all of Block Three (10 weeks), and Sluvac (1 week).

1 Date to be fiNllised

ADVICE AND INFORMA nON

Year Two

Semester 1 commences Monday I March 1993 rece" Friday 9 April 1993

to

Friday 16 April 1993 reswnes Monday 19 April 1993 concludes Friday 2 July 1993

Semester 2 commences Monday 19 July 1993

""''''' Monday 27 September 1993 to

Friday 8 October 1993 resumes Monday 11 October 1993 concludes Friday 5 November 1993

Examinations commence Monday 8 November 1993 conclude Friday 19 November 1993

Mini-Elective commences Monday 22 November 1993 concludes Friday 3 December 1993

NOTE:

Semester One C01lSists of Block Four { 10 weeks) and 7 weeks of Block Five.

Semeste: Two consists oflhe remaining 3 weeks of Block. Five, all of Block SIX(JO weeb) and Stuvac (J week)

Year Three Block 7

Block 8

Vacation

Block 9

Stuvac

Assessment

Vacation

Block 10

Year Four

Clinical Auachmentia

Clinical Allachment lb

Vacation Clinical Attachment 2a

Clinical Attachment 2b

Vacation

Clinical Attachment 3a

Clinical Attachment 3b

GPPeriod

Stuvac

Assessment

Year Five

Clinical AUachrnent 1 Clinical AUachrnent 2

ii

PebS - April 30 12 weeks: llweekblock

May 3 - June 25

June 28- July 9

1 week A VCC/Easter

Vacation 9-16/4

8 weeks

2 weeks (A VCC

common week)

July 12 - Sept 10 9 weeks: 8 week block

1 week review Sept 13 - Sept 17 1 week

Sept 20 - Oct 8 3 weeks

Oct 11 - Detl5 1 week

Oct 18 - Dec 10 8 weeks Elective

Peb I - Mar 12 6 weeks

Mar 15 - April 30 6 week attachment

May3 - May7

May 10- June 18 June21- July30

Aug2 - Aug 13

Aug 16 - Sept 24 Sept 27 - Nov 5

1 week A VCC/Easter

Vacation 9-16/4

I week

6 weeks

6 weeks

2 weeks

6 weeks

6 weeks

Nov 8 - Nov 17 One and a half weeks

(inclusive)

Nov 18- Nov 26 Oneandahalfweeks

Nov 29 - Dec 7 One and a half weeks

Feb I - Mar 19 7 weeks

Mar 22 - May 7 7 weeks

(Easter 9-16/4)

Assessment May 10- May 14 I week Vacalioo May 17- May21 I week Clinical Audunent 3 May24- July9 7 weeks Clinical Attachment 4 July 12 - Aug 27 7 week, Stuvac Aug 30- Sept 3 I week Assessment Sept6 - Sept17 2 weeks 2nd Assessment Sept 20 - Sept 2A I week Elective Attachment Sepl27- Nov 19 8 weeks FinaJ Assessment Nov 22- Nov 26 I week

Nok_" Years 3,4 & 5 do fIOt co1lformwith the UniversityojNewcastie' s Sem.es~T da~s.

Advice and Information

Themainpointofcontactforenquiriesconcemingcoursesandenrolment is the Fagdty Office The Faculty Office can provide advice on Faculty rules and policies, course requirements, procedures relating to course administration and so on. If academic advice is required, the Faculty Office can direct enquiries to the appropriate Dean, Assistant Dean, Course Co-ordinator" or Head of Department.

FACULlY OFFICES

Facility Colllaci Location Telephone Architecture JennieGow 1-06N 215570 Art, Design & Sheila Proust ABI-31 216525 Communication Maryanne Cartwright

Vicki Drewe ABI-10 215639 Art, David Donnelly CU32 215323 Economics & Linda H8JTigan S18 215984 Commerce Natalie Downing S16 215983 Education Chandra Murti ABI-4I 216529

Katrina Killel ABI-43 216530 Irene Blyth ABI-39 216528 Nerida Vee ABI-22 216531

Engineering Geoff Gordon EA206 216064 Jill Norbwn EA204 216061 Helen Jackson EAW5 216066

Health Sciences Jenny Hughes ABI-37 216527 Maurice Chalmers ABl-18 216524

Law Linda Harrigan S18 215984 Medicine Brian Kelleher K607A 215676 Music Chris Palmer CONLG4 294207 Nursing Janet Hallinan ABI-33 216523

Estelle Graham ABI-16 216534 Science & Helen Hotchkiss SB210 215562 Mathematics Kristine Hodyl SB210 215569 Socia1 Sciences Susan Eade CU31 216526 THE STUDENT ENQUIRY COUNTER

Located in the Chancellery, the Student Enquiry Counter is the main point of contact for enquiries relating to 'non-academic' aspects of student administration, such as the issue of travel concessions matters relating to the administration of the Higher Education Con~ibution Scheme (flECS), and the issue and receipt of various forms, such as Change of NRfIle/Address and Transcript Request forms. The Enquiry Counter also acts as a point of referral for general student enquiries.

STUDENT SERVICES

~vailable for all students to assist with many practical matters which may affect personal adjuShnent to University and success in studies.

Most services are located in the Temporary Buildings adjacent to the Computer Teaching Building except where indicated. Most services are also available on the Central Coast Campus.

The Dean of Students, Professor K.R. Dutton (located in the Bowman Building) is responsible for the network of SlUdent Services and his assistance or advice is available to srudents where appropriate. The SubDean, Ms. M. Kibby (Hunter Building Room Cl8) will advise students on the correct procedures to follow in cases of appeal or grievance applications. Both can be contacted on 215806.

Accommodation Omce

Offers advice onrental matters and assistance inresolving accommodation problems. Maintains lists of accommodation available off-campus in private homes,rooms, flats and houses. Mrs Kalh Dacey ,Accommodation Officer. Enquiries phone (049) 215593.

Careers & Student Employment Office

A free service to students atany stage of their studies covering all matterS relating to employment: careers information and planning, resume and interview preparation workshops, graduate recruitment, vacation employment and part~time student employment service. Ms H. Parker, phone (049) 215588.

Chaplaincy

The Chaplaincy Centres are located in the temporary buildings adjacent to the Computer Teaching Building and also in Room A 187 in the Hunter Building nearthe Huxley Library. Pastoral and spiritual care is available from denominational chaplains. Phone (049) 215571 or (049) 216648.

Counselling ServIce

Location: Courtyard level Auchmuty Library building. Assists people whoare having academic orpersonal difficulties, orwho simply want to function more effectively. Individual counselling and group courses are available. Phone (049) 215806.

Health Service

Doctor's surgery is located in the Shortland Union building basement, phone(049) 21 6000. A nursing sister is available on the main concourse Hunter Building, phone 216452. The health service offers medical care similar to a general doctor's surgery with a special interest in the health needs of students. Patients are bulk-billed. All consulwions are strictly confidential. Health education and infonnation also provided. Dr. S. Brookman, phone (049)216000.

Sport & Recreation Omce

Promotes, controls and administers all sporting activities of the University. Organises classes in wide range of sporting and recreational pursuits. Provides assistance to the sludent sporting and recreation clubs. Coordinates participation in the Australian University championships. Administers the student accident insurance scheme on behalf of the Sports Union. Mr A. Lakin, phone (049) 215584.

Student Support Omce

Student Service enquiries, student loans and financial advice for students on low incomes, advice and referal on other welfare matters and assistance and infonnation for students with disabilities. Ms A. Rudd phone (049) 216467.

STUDENTS WIlli DISABILITIES

The University of Newcastle has a policy to provide equal opportunity to students with Special Needs.

Practical assistance, which may be required by students with adisability to facilitate their participation in their course of study, can be arranged through the Student Support Officer. Ms Annette Rudd ,located in the Temporary buildings opposite Mathematics, phone (049) 216467.

STUDENTS WITH DISABILITIES

Special equipment is available in some lecture theatres and in the Libraries.

If you need academic assistance, please do not hesitate to contact your rele.vant Faculty Adviser.

Fatuity Advisers

Architecture Mr Arthur Kingsland (049)215783

Art, Design & Comm. Mr Bruce Wilson 216606

Am A/Prof. A. Barthofer 215372

Economics & Commerce Ms. Anne Finlay 216769

Education Ms Margaret Davies 216283

Engineering Dr David Wood 216198

Health Sciences Mr Andrew Bertram 216733

Medicine A/Prof. David Powis 215625

Music Mr Paul Curtis 294133

Nursing Ms Suzanne Lyons 216312

Science & Mathematics Dr Graham Couper 215529

Social Science Ms Sue Muloin 216787

University Ubraries Ms Anne Robinson 215831 Mr Gary Jones 216465

ENROLMENT OF NEW UNDERGRADUATE STUDENTS

Persons offered enrolment are required to attend in person at the Greal Hall in February to enrol. Detailed inslructions are given in the Enrolment Guide which Is sent out with the UAC offer.

TRANSFER OF COURSE

Students currently enrolled in an undergraduate course who wish to transfer to adifferent undergraduate course in 1993 must apply through the Universities Admission Centre (UAC) by 30 September 1992. Late applications will be accepted through UAC until 31 October if accompanied by a $60.00 late fee. Late applications will be accepted after 31 October direct to the University, but such applications will only be considered if places remain after applications that have been submitted through UAC are considered.

If a student's request to transfer to another course is successful, the studentmustcomplete a separate Higher Education Contribution Scheme (HECS) Payment Option fonn for the new course at enrolment time. Payment of the General Service Charge must be made using the notice issued as part of the re-enrolment process.

RE.ENROLMENT BY CONTINUING STUDENTS

There are five steps involved for re-enrolment by continuing srudents:

receive a re-enrolment kit in the mail

lodge the Enrolment Application fonn with details of your proposed program

receive a fees & charges notice in the mail in late January.

payment of the General Service Charge a1 any Commonwealth Bank by 26 Februaryl993.

receive an approved program and student card.

Re-Enrolment Kits

Re-enrolment kits for 1993 will be mailed to students in October. The re-enrolment kit contains the student's Enrolment Application and Statistical Fonn, the 1993 Class Timetable, the 1993 HECS booklet and Enrohnent Guide.

A fees and charges notice will be mailed separately in late January (Please note a Fees and Charges Notice will not be sent until all outstanding debts/fines have been paid.)

iii

RE-ADMISSION AFTER ABSENCE

Lodging Enrolment Application Forms

The Enrolment Application fonn must be completed carefully and lodged at the Srudent Division Office by 6 January 1993. Srudents should know theireum in81ion results beforecomple ting the re-enrolment form. There is no late charge payable if the form is late, but it is very Important that the Enrolment Application fonn is lodged by 6 January 1993 as late lodgement will mean that enrolment approval and student card may nOl: be available for the slart of the semester.

Enrolment Approval

All re-enrolling students will receive in early February either a confirmation program and student card or a letter asking them to attend in person because there is a problem with their proposed program. Enrolment in tutorial or laboratory sessions should be arranged with Departments on an individual basis.

Payment of Cbarges

The Fees and Charges Notice will be mailed to re-enrolling students in late January (please note aPeesand Charges Notice will not be sent until all outstanding debts/fines have been paid). The 1993 General Service Charge must be paid at any Commonwealth Bank branch using the Pees and Charges Notice. Payments made after 26 February 1993 will incur a $50.00 late fee.

All charges listed on the Pees and Charges Notice must be paid. The Bank will not accept part payment.

SCHOLARSIDP HOLDERS AND SPONSORED STUDENTS

Students holding scholarships or receiving other forms of financial assistance must lodge with the Cashier their Pees and Charges Notice together with a warrant or other written evidence that charges will be paid by the sponsor. Spoosors must provide a separate voucher warrant or letter for each student sponsored.

LATE PAYMENT

The Final date for payment of the GeneraJ Service Charge is 26 February 1992. Payments made after this date will incur a $50.00 late tee.

Thereafter enrolment wIll be cancelled lfcharges remain unpaid by 19 March.

FAILURE TO PAY OVERDUE DEBTS

Any student who is indebted tothe University by reason of non-payment of any fee or charge, non-payment of any fine imposed, or who h as failed to pay any overdue debts shall nOl: be permitted to:

complete enrolment in a following year;

receive a transcript of academic record;

graduate or be awarded a Diploma; or

receive a replacement Student ID Card

until such debts are paid.

Students are requested to pay any debts incWTed without delay.

STUDENT CARDS

Students will bemailed theirConfinnation of Program and StudentCard in early February. The Student Card should be carried by students when at the University. The SlUdent Card has macl1ine readable lettering for use when borrowing boots from the University Library, and contains the student's interim password for access to facilities of the Computing Centre. Please note that the Student Card is not evidence of enrolment; students must also have paid the General Service Charge and fulfilled HECS requirements to be fully enrolled.

Students are urged to lake good care of their Student Card. If the card is lost or destroyed, !here is a service charge of $5 payable before the card wiU be replaced.

A swdeot who withdraws completely from studies should return the Student Card to the Student Division Office.

RE·ADMISSION AFrER ABSENCE

A person wishing to resume an undergraduate degree course who has been enroUed previously at the University of Newcastle, but 1IOl eN'olkd ;11 1992, is required to apply for admissiOQ again through the Universities Admissions Centre, U>cked Bag 500 Lidcombe 2141. Applicatioo forms may be obtained from the UAC or from the Student Division Office aod clo6e with the UAC OIl 30 September each year. There is a $60.00 fee for late applications. Students who withdrew from their course after 31 March 1992 are not required to apply for re~admission.

CHANGE OF ADDRESS

The University holds on record both an address for correspondence and a home address. Students are responsible for notifying the SlUdent Division Office in writing of any change in their address. A Change of Address form should be used and is available from the Student Division Office.

Failure to notify chaoges to your correspondence address could lead to important correspondence or course information not teQChing you. The University cannot accept responsibility if official communications fail toreach a student who has not notified the SlUdent Division Office of a change of address.

CHANGE OF NAME

Students who change their name should advise the Student Division Office. A marriage or deed poll certificate should be presented for sighting in order that the change can be noted on University records.

CHANGE OF PROGRAMME

Approval must be sought for any changes to the programme for which a srudenthas enroJled. This includes adding subjects, withdrawing from subjects or the course, or replacing one subje<:t with another.

All proposed changes should be entered on the Programme Variation section on the reverse side of the COnfirmation of Programme fomJ.. Where appropriate, reasons for changes and/or docum en\ar)' evidence in the form of medical or other relevant certificates must be submitted.

Programme Variation fQftns should be lodgedatormailed totherelevant Faculty Office.

Withdrawal from Subjects or Course

Applications received by the appropriate date listed below will be approved for withdrawal without a failure being recorded against the subject or subjects in question.

Wi!hdrawal Dates

Semester 1 Subie&ls

11 June 1993

Semester 2lFuil Year Syhiects

5 November 1993

Except wi!h permission of the Dean:

<a) a slUdent shall not be permitted to withdraw from a subject after the dates listed above

(b) a student shall nOl: be permitted to withdraw from a subject on more than two occasions.

If a student believes that a failure should not be recorded beca\lse of the circumstances leading to his or her withdrawal. it is important !hat fulJ dewls of these circumstances be provided with the application to withdraw.

AddlUon of Subjects

Students seeking to add a subject or SUbjects more than two weeks after the commencementoftherelevantsemester should seek advice from the Faculty Office prior to lodging their application. In SOnte instances Faculty policy or restrictions on class size preclude late enrolment and

students should make every attempt to flOai ise their enrolmen t within the first two weeks of semester.

ENROLMENTCONflRMATION

Students should ensure thataD details on theirConfjrmation of Program form are corTecL Failure tocheck: this information COIlld create problem s at examination time. Please note that it is the student'sresponsibility to

(i) ensure that all enrolment details are corTect and.

(ii) to withdraw from aSemester II subject if a failure has been incurred in the Prerequisite Semester I subject.

LEAVE OF ABSENCE

Undergraduate Awards

Subject to any provision concerning your course as set out in the schedule, a candidate in good academic standing in the course:

(a) may take leave of absence of one year from the course; or

(b) with the permission oftheDean, may take leave of absence for two consecutive years from the course

without prejudice to any right of the candidate to re-enrol in the couse following such absence.

Candid81es should also refer to the Rules Governing Undergraduate Awards, Rule 10 Leave of Absence, and the schedules regarding the defmition of'good standing'. You should also consult with your Faculty Officer. To re-enrol in your course after leave of absence, you must reapply through the Universities Admissions Centre (UAG, Locked Bag 500, Lidcombe, NSW, 2141. The closing date for applications is 30

Sepwmber each year.

Postgraduate Course work Awards

Leave of absence may not be available for some courses. Ca.'ldidates should refer to the course schedules, and also consult with their Faculty Officer regarding any requirement to lodge a formal application for

leave.

Research Higher Degrees

Leave of ab.sence is nOl: automatically granted, and candidates are required to lodge a written application for leave of absence prior to the end of the preceding semester. Applications should be lodged with the Postgraduate Studies Office for approval by the Graduate Studies Committee. Refer to the Masters and Doctoral Degree Rules.

Scholarship Recipients

Scholarship holders, both undergraduate and postgraduate, who wish to take leave of absence from their courSe, or who do not intend to lake a full-time program in any semester, are required to lodge a written appl ication for suspension of scholarhsip prior to the end of the preced ing semester. Applications for suspension should be lodged with the Scholarships Office for approval by the Scholarsh ips Commiuee. Refer to the Conditions of Award of your scholarship.

ATTENDANCE AT CLASSES

Where a student's attendance or progress has not been satisfactory, action may be taken under the Regulations Governing Unsatisfactory

Progress.

In the case of illness or absence for some other unavoidable cause, a student may be excused for non attendance at classes.

All applications for exemption from anendanceatclassesmust be made in writing to the Head of the Departmentoff ering the subject. Where tests or tenn examinations have been missed, this fact should be noted in the

application.

The granting of an exemption from auendance at classes does not carry with it any waiver of the General Services Charge.

EXAMINATIONS

GENERAL CONDUCT

In accepting membership of the University, students undertake to observe the by-laws and other requirements of the University.

Students .. e expected to conduct themselves at all times in a seemly fashion. Smoking is not permitted during let:tures, in examination rooms or in the University Library. Gambling is faroidden.

Members of the academic staff of the University, senioradministrative officers, and other peroons authorised for the purpose have authority to report on disorderly or improper conduct OCCUlTing in the University.

NOTICES

Official University notices are displayed on Departmental notice board s and students are expected to be acquainted with the contents of those announcements which concern them.

The Hunter Building Concourse is used for the specific purpose of displayingexaminationtime-tablesandothernoticesaboutexaminations and final results.

EXAMINATIONS

Tests and assessments may be held in any subject from lime to time. In theassessmentofastudent'sprogressinauniversitycourse,consideration will be given to laboratOry work, tutorials and assignments and to any term or other tests conducted throughout the year. The results of such assessments and class work may be incorporated with those of formal written examinations.

EXAMlNA TION PERIODS

Formal written examinations take place on prescribed dates within the following periods, Saturdays may be included:

MidYear; 14June-2July 1993

End of Year: 8t026November,l993

Timetables showing the date and time at which individual examinations will beheld will be displayed in the Hunter Building Concourse, specific Deparllnental noticeboards and other prominent locations on campus.

Mi steading of the timetable will not under any circumstances be accepted as an excuse for failure to attend an examination.

SITTING FOR EXAMINATIONS

Formal examinations, where prescribed, arecompulsory. Srudents should consult the final timetable in advance to find out the date and time of their

examinations.

LOCATION OF EXAMINATIONS

Seat allocation lists for examinations will be displayed about two weeks before the commencement of the examination period on the noticeboard of the Department running the subject and on a noticeboard outside the examination room on the day of the examination. Candidates should allow themselves plenty of time to get to the examination room so that they can take advantage of the 10 minutes reading time that is allowed before the exam ination commences. Normally,entry intothe examination room will be penn itted from 15 minutes before the acrual commencement of the examination writing time. This is to allow the candidate time to locate the allocated seat and complete the necessary attendance slipand any related necessary registration details before the commencement of reading time. During reading time no writing will be permitted. Materials which may betaken into each examination will also be displayed outside the examination room. A complete day seat listing will alsobe displayed in the Great Hall Foyer and Hunter Building Foyer.

PERMITTED AIDS

Students can take into any examination any writing instrument, drawing instrument or eraser. Logarithmic tables may not be taken in: they will be available from the supervisor if needed. Calculators may not be taken into an examination room unless the Examiner has instructed on the

v

EXAMINATIONS

examination paper that the calculator specified is a permitted aid. Calculatorsmust be hand held, battery operated and non-programmable" and sWdents should note that no concession will be granted:

(a) to a student who is prevented from bringing into a room a programmable calculator;

(b) to a student who uses a calculator incorrectly; or

(c) because of battery failure.

UNLISTED CANDIDATES

If you expect to sit for an examination and your name does not appear on the displayed seal allocation listing it could mean you are not formally recorded as being enrolled and eligible to sit and receive a result. In these circumstances you will need to visit the Examinations Office to identify the problem. If an enrolment problem is confinned you may also need to discuss the matter with your Faculty Officer.

RULES FOR FORMAL EXAMINATIONS

PART 1 - PRELIMINARY

Appllcatlon of Rules

1. These Rules shall apply to all examinations of the University with the exception of the examination of a thesis subm iued by a cand idate for a degree of Master or the degree of Doctor of Philosophy. The examinationofthesesforthesedegreesortheassessmentofpublished works submitted for Higher Doctoral Degrees shall be conducted in accordance with the requirements for the degree.

Interpretatlon

2. In these Rules, unless the context or subject matter otherwise indicates or requires:

"award" means the degree, diploma (including graduate diploma and associate diploma) or graduate certificate for which a candidate is enrolled;

"Department" means the department assigned responsibility for a particular subject and includes any other body so responsible;

"Departmental Examinations Committee" means the Departmental Examinations Committee of the Department constituted in accordance with the Rules governing Deparlments;

jjexamlnatlon" includes any form of examination, assignment, test or any other work by which the final grade of acandidate in asubject is assessed;

Uexternal examiner for a candidate" means an examiner, not being a member of the staff of the University, appointed to assist in the examination of an extended essay, project or similar work submitted by a candidate;

"externaJ examiner for the Department" means an examiner, not being a member of the staff of the University, appointed to assist in the examining processes within a Department;

''Faculty Board"means the Faculty Board of the Faculty responsible for the course in which a candidate is enrolled and includes a Board of Studies where given powers relevant to this Rule;

"formal written examination" means an eltamination conducted under Part 4 of these Rules;

usubJect" meansany partof acourseof study foran award for which a result may be recorded;

• A programmable calculator may be permitted if prescribed, provided that program cards and devices are not taken into the examination room and the H end of Department approves. Consideration is currently being given to the establishment of a listing of calculators approved for use where calcwators are specified as a permitted aid. vi

j'supervlsor" means the supervisor for an eltaminaUon appointed, in the case of a (onnal written examination, by the Academic Registrar and. in the case of any other examination, by the Head of Department.

j'supplementaryel.8mlnation"meansanexaminationadministered to a candidate in respect of whom any doubt exists as to the judgement to be recorded in an examination return.

PART 1 - GENERAL

Examinations other than in single department

3. (1) WhereaFaculty isnotcomposedofDepartments,the functions and responsibilities of the Head of a Department and the Departmental Examinations Committee shall be undertaken respectively by the person or body in that Faculty approved for the purpose of these Rules by the Academic Senate.

(2) WhereasubjectisnottheresponsibilityofasingleDepartment, thepersonorbodytoundertakethefunctionsandresponsibilities of the Head of a Departmentand the Departmental Examinations Committee in respect of that subject shall be decided by the Faculty Board concerned or, where Departments from more than one Faculty are involved, by theAcademicSenate.

Determination of nature and extent of examining

4. Each Faculty Board shall determine the natw'eand extent of examining in the subjects in the awards for which the Faculty is responsible and such examining may be written, oral, clinical or practical or any combination of these.

Publlcatlon of requirements

5. The Head of Department shall ensure the publication of the Department's examination requirements in each subject by the end of the second week of the semester in which the subject commences including the weight and timing of each task comprising the total assessment to be applied in determining the fmal grade.

PenaJUes

6. An infringement of any of the rules setout in Rule 16(1), other than pursuant to Rule 16(2), or the instructions referred to in Rule 19 shall constitute an offence against discipline.

PART3-PROCEDURES

External Examiners

7. (I) The Academic Senate may, on the recommendation of a Faculty Board made 00 the recommendation of a Head of Department appoint ODe or more external examiners for the Department. Such appointment shall be for a tenn of one year and, ellcept with the approval of the Academic Senate, no external ex.aminer for the Department shall be reappointed for more than four consecutive tenns of office.

(2) Where theappoinlmentof an external examiner for acandidate is prescribed by the Rules for an award, or where the Faculty Board considers it appropriate that an external examiner for a candidate by appointed, such appoinlment shall bemade by the Faculty Board or as otherwise prescribed in the Rules for that award.

Examining

8. The Head of each Deparlment shall arrange for the member or members of the academic staff responsible for each of the subjects offered by the Department:

(a) to prepare the examination papers in the subjects;

(b) in consultation with any other members of staff involved in the tuition or supervision of the candidates, to assess the scripts and other work submitted by candidates and, if required,

prescribe a further or supplementary examination for any candidate; and

(c) to record in an examination return a judgement in respect of each candidate fOT submission to the Departmental Examinations Committee.

Departmental recommendations of results

9. The Departmental Examinations Commiuee shall consider the judgementsrecordedforcandidatesandshallmakerecommendations to the Faculty Board as to the result in the subject to be recorded for each candidate.

Determination of results In subjects

10. (1) The recommendations of the Departmental Examinations Committee shall be presented totheFaculty Board by lheHead of the Department or the representative of that Head, who shall be entitled to vary any recommended result if of the view that it is appropriate to do so on the request of the Faculty Board.

(2) The Dean shall ensure that in making its recommendations the Departmental Examinations Commiuee has considered any request for special consideration made by a candidate pursuant to Rule 13.

(3) Each Faculty Board shaH consider the recommendations of the DepartmentalExaminationsCommitteeand,takingintoaccount any change to a recommendation under sub-rules (1) or (2), shall either:

(a) confinn the results; or

(b) defer the decision pending the outcome of such other action as the Faculty Board deems appropriate.

Grading of results In subjects

11. The result awarded in a subjecttoa candidate shaH be one of those in the list of approved results determined by the Academic Senate from time to time.

RevJew of result In subject

12. (I) A candidate may apply fora review of any result aWlU"ded in a subject to that candidate.

(2) An application made under sub-rule (1) shall be made to the Academic Regislrar on the prescribed form and shall be accompanied by the prescribed fee.

(3) A review of the result shall include a check:

(a) thatallrequiredpartsoftheassessmenthavebeenincluded in the final detennination of the result;

(b) that the content of examination scripts has been fairly considered, including, where possible, a review of marks awarded by the examiners; and

(c) that all marks contributing to the final grade have been correctly weighted and their total accurately obtained

but shall not include any review of earlier assessments which have been made available to the candidate on a continuing basis throughout the subject.

(4) If the Faculty Board,on the recommendation of the Head of the Department concerned or the representative of that Head, changes the result following review, the fee shall be refunded to the candidate.

Special Consideration

13. (1) A candidate who claims that:

Ca) study during the year or preparation for an ex.amination;

'"

EXAMINATIONS

(b) auendance at or performance in an examination

has been affected by illness, disability or other serious cause, may report the circumstances in writing, supported bymedical or other appropriate evidence to the Academic Registrar and request that they be taken into account in the assessment of the examination results of that candidate. Such request shall be made on the prescribed fonn.

(2) A request made pursuant to sub-rule (l)(a) shall be submitted by the candidate within seven days after any absence arising from. the illness or eventon which the request is based, or such longer-period as theDean of the Faculty in which the candidate is enrolled may accept.

(3) A request made pursuant to sub-rule (1)(b) shall be submitted by the candidate not later than three days after the date of the examination or within such further period as the Dean of the Faculty in which the candidate is enrolled may permiL

(4) Where a candidate is personally unable to take the action prescribed under this Rule, some other person may take such action on behalf of that candidate.

(5) The Academic Registrar may call for such other evidence in respectofthecandidate'srequestasmayhereasonablerequired.

(6) A candidate who is granted special consideration may be required to attend a further examination or to undertake further assessment to determine a result.

PART 4· FORMAL WRITTEN EXAMINATIONS

Responsibility

14. The Academic Registrar shall be responsible for the adminislration and superv ision of the fonnaJ written examinations of the University.

Timetable for formal written examinations

15. (I) The Academic Registrar shall publish a timetable showing when and where formal wrineo examinations will be held and it shall be the responsibility of candidates to attend those examinations prescribed for the subjects in which they are enrolled.

(2) Notwithstanding the previsions of Rule 15(1), where the Academic Registrar considers it justified on religious, conscientious or other grounds, special arrangements may be made to allow a candidate to attend a prescribed examination fOT a subject at a time and place different from that published in the examination timetable.

(3) Subject to the provision of Rule l30)Cb), candidates who fail to attend an examination which is show on the examination timetable will be deemed to have sat for and failed the examination.

Rules for formal written examinations

16. (1) Formal written ex.aminationsshall beconducted in accordance with the following rules:

(a) candidates shall comply with any instructions given by a supervisor relating to the conduct of the examination;

(b) before the examination begins candidates shall not read the examination paper until granted permission by the supervisor which shall be given ten minutes before the start of the examination;

Cc) no candidate shall enter the examination room afterthirty minutes from the time the examination has begun;

(d) no candidate shall leave the examination room during the first thirty minutes or the last ten minutes of the examination;

vii

SPECIAL CONSIDERATION REQUESTS

(e) no candidate shall re-enter the examination room after leavinj it unless during the full pel'iod of absence that candidate has been under approved supervision;

(0 acandidate shall not bring inlotheexaminationroomany bag. paper, book, written material, device or aid whlltSOever, other lhan such as may be specified for the particular examination:

(g) a candidate shall not by any means obtain or endeavour to obtain improper assistance, give or endeavour to give assistance to any other candidate, or commit any breach of good order;

(h) acandidate shall not take from the examination room any examination answer book, any examination paper so marked, graph paper, drawing paper or other material issued for use during the eumination;

(i) no candidate may smoke in the examination room.

(2) The provision of sub-rule (I) may be relaxed:

(a) by the Academic Registrar; and

(b) with the exception of paragraphs (e), (0, (g) and (h) by the supervisor upon the direction of the Academic Registrar or at the discretion oflbe supervisor, provided that the circumslances of anycase in which discretion has been exercised shall be reported in writi ng totheAcademic Registrar immediately following the conclusion of the examination.

PART 5 a OlHER EXAMINA nONS

Responsibility

17. The Head of Department shall be responsible for the administration and supervision of the eXhinations of the University, other than fonnal written examinations, in the subjects offered by the Departmenl

Timetable

18. (1) Where appropriate, the Head of Deparbnent shall publish a timetable showing when and where examinations will be held and it shaJ I be the res(X>nsibility of candidates to aUend those examinations prescribed for the subjects in which they are enrolled.

(2) NotwithstandingtheprovisionsofRule 18(1), where the Head of Department considers it justified on religious, conscientious or other arounds, special arrangements may be made to allow a c;mdidate to attend a prescribed examination for a subject at atimeand pJacedifferentfrom that published in the examination time~ble.

Compliance with Instructlons

19. Candidates shaJl comply with any instructions given by the Head of Department or the supervisor relating to an examination.

Any infri niement of these rules constitutes an offence against discipline.

FINAL EXAMINATION RESliL TS

End of year examination results will be mailed out by late December. Examination resulu for Semester I subjects will be mailed out the week: precedini the commencement of SemeEter 2.

Final examiantion results are also displayed in the Hunter Building Concourse as soon as they become available.

No results will be given by telephone.

REVIEW OF FINAL RESULT

After the release of both Semester I and end of year final examination resulls a student may apply to have a result reviewed. Part 3 of the

viii

University' sExamination Rules specifies procedures relating to Review of Rerult in a subject, for details see page ('Ii) and the necessary applicatioo form. You should read the inslrUctions on the application form before applying foraReview. There is achargeper subject, which is refundable in the event of an error being discovered, However, it should be noted that examination results are released only after careful assessment of slUdenls' performances and that, amongst other things, marginal failures are reviewed before results are released.(see page ix)

SPECIAL CONSlDERA TION REQUESTS

All applications for special consideration should be made on the Application for Special Consideration fonn.

The grmting of Special Consideration could involvea further examination or /ilSsessment held shortly after the formal examination. Any further examination or assessment administered will be by the Department that offered the subject Consequently you must therefore check wltb the Departmmt that offered the subject to .ascertaJn that Department's requirements. Yousbould also watch the"Deparlment'snooceboard for further advice concerning Special Consideration.

Application Forms may be obtained from your FaCUlty Omce, Student Division Enquiry Counter, Student Health Service, Student Counselling Unit and Examinations & Services Counter, Hunter Building.

Part 3 of the University's Examination Rules specifies procedures relating toSpecial Consideration Requests, for details see page (vi) and the necessary application fonn. You should read the inslructions on the application form before applying for Special Consideration.

STATEMENTS OF ACADEMIC RECORD

If you wish to he issued with a statement of your academic record, you must complete the appropriate application form and lodge it with the University Cashier along with the appropriate fee (see page x). The statement will be mailed out as soon as it becomes available, to the nominated address. Applicanls should allow adequate time for this to occur. Computer produced statements can normally be mailed within a week, St.ltements involving pre 1979 records might be expected to take longer to produce. Indebted applicants must dear their debt before statements can be Issued. Application fonns may be obtained from the Student Division Enquiry Counter, Chancellery Building and the Examination and Services Counter, Hunter Building.

UNSATISFACTORY PROGRESS

The University has adopted Rules Governing Unsatisfactory Progress which are set out below.

Students who become liable for action under the Rules will he infonned accordingly by mail after the release of the End of Ye .. examination results and will be informed of the procedure to be followed if they wish to 'show cause'.

Appeals Biainst exclusion must he lodged together with Enrohnent Application forms by Wednesday 6 January 1993.

The Faculty'S progress requirements are set out elsewhere in this volume.

RULES GOVERNING UNSATISFACTORY PROGRESS

Applk.Uon of Rules

1. These Rules shall apply 10all students of the University except those who we candidates for a degree of Master or Doctor.

Interpretation

2. In these Rules, unless the context or subject matter otherwise indicates or requires:

"the Committee" means theAdmi ssions and Progression Committee of the Academic Senate as constituted from time to time.

''Dean''meanstheDean of the Faculty in whiclt astudentis enrolled.

''Board'' means the Faculty Boa-d of the Faculty in which the

student is enrolled.

Termination of Enrolment by Head of Departmmt

3. (1) A student's enrolmenlin a subject may be terminated by the Head of the Department offering that subject if that student does not. maintain a rate of progreSE considered satisfactory by the Head of the Department. In determining whether a student is failing to maintain satisfactory progress the Head of Department may take into consideration such f~tor& as unsatisfactory attendanceorfailure tocomplete ata satJ~factory standard academic or professional componenls specIfied for

the subject.

(2) The enrolmentofa student in a subject shall nothe terminated pursuant to Rule 3(1) of these Rules unless that stu~nt has been given prior written notice of the intention to con~lder the matter with brief particu! ars of the ground s for so domg, and has a1~ been given a reasonable opportunity to make representations either in person or in writing or both.

(3) A student whose enrolment in a subject is tenninated under Rule 3(1) of these Rules may appeal to the Board which shall

determine the matter.

(4) A student whose enrolment in a subject is tenninated under this Rule shall be deemed to have failed the subject

Review of Performance by Board

4. (1) A Boord may review the academic performance of a student who does nolmainlain a ra1e of progress considered satisfactory

by the BoW'"d and may determine:

(2)

(3)

(a) that the student be pennitted to continue the course;

(b) that the student be permitted to continue the course subject to such conditions as the Board may decide;

(c) that the student be excluded from further enrolment:

(i) in the course; or

(ii) in the course and any other course offered in the

Faculty; or

(iii) in the Faculty; or

(d) if the Board considers its powers todeal with the case are inadequate, that the case be referred to the <:>mmittee together with a recommendation for such actJon as the

Board considers appropriate.

Before adecision is made und er Rule 4( 1 )(b), (c) or (d) of these Rules, the student shall be given an opportunity to m~e representations with respect to the matter either in person or ID

writing or both,

A student who has made representations to a Board may appeal against any decision made under Rule 4(1)(b) or (c) of these Rules to the Committee which shall determine the maUer.

Reference to Committee

5. Where the proaress of a student who is enrolled in a combi~ed course or who has previously been excluded from enrolme~t m another course or Faculty is considered by the Bowd to be unsatISfactory, the BOIlfd shall refer the matter to the Committee. toaether wi~ a recommendation for such action as the Board conSiders appropnate.

Hearing of Appeals by Committee

6. (I) An appeal made by astudenttotheCommiuee pursuantto~ule 4(3) of these Rules shall be in such fonn as may be preSCrIbed by the Committee, and shall be made within fourteen (14) days

CHARGES

from the date of posting to the Etudent of the notification of the decisiOll or such further period as the Committee may accept.

(2) lnhe.inganappealtheCommineemaylakeintoconsideratiOIl anycircumstances wb.atsoever, including matlennotprevlou~1y raised andmayseeksucbinfonnationasitthin.k:sfitconcermng the ~ic record of the appe1Iant and the making of the detennination by the Board. Neither the Dean nor the sub..

Dean shall act as a member of the Committee on the hearing of

any such appeal. (3) The appellant and the Dean. or the Dean's nominee shaH have

the right to be he.d in person by the Committee.

(4) The Committee may confinn the decision made by a&.d~ may substitute for it any other decision which the Board IS empowered to make pursuant to these Rules,

Committee ConslderaUon of Referred Cases

7. (1 ) The Committee shall consider any case refmed to it by a Board

and may:

(2)

(3)

(a) make any decision which the Board itself could have made pursuant to Rule 4(1 Xa), (b) or (c) Qfthese Rules;

'" (b) excludethestudentfromenrolmentinsuchothersubjects,

courses or Faculties as it thinks fit; or

(c) exclude the student from the University.

The Committee shall not make any decision pursuant to Rule 7(1)(b) or(c) of these Rules unless ithas first given ~e student the opportunity to be heard in person by the Committee.

A student may appeal to the Vice-Chancellor against any decision made by the Committee under this Rule.

Actlon by VlceaCbanceilor and Council

8. Where there is an appeal against any decision of the Conunittee made under Rule 7 of these Rules, the Vice-Chancellor may refer the m.ner back to the Committee with a recommendation or shall arrange for the appal to be heard by the Council. Th~ Counc~ may confum the decision of the Committee or may substitute for It any other decision which the Committee is empowered to make pursuant

to these Rules.

Reaenrolment

9. (I) A student who has been excluded from further enrohnent in a Faculty may enrol in acourse in another Faculty only with the pennissionoftheBoard ofthal Faculty and on such conditions

as it may detennine.

(2) A student who has heM excluded from further enrohnent in any course, Faculty of front the University Dt,Ider the~ Rules may apply for pennission to enrollherein agam, provIded that in no case shall such re-enrolment commence before the expiration of the period of exclusion. A decision on such

application shall be made:

(a) by the Bo.d, where the student has been excluded from a single course or a single Faculty; or

(b) by the Committee, in any other case,

Appeal Alalnst ReJ«tlon ofRe--enrolment Appllcatlon

10. (I) A student whose application to enrol pursuant to Rule 9(1) or 9(2Xa) of these Rules is rejected by a Board may appeal tothe

Committee.

(2) A studtmt whose application to enrol pursuant to Rule9(2)(b) of these Rules is rejected by the Committee may appeal to the

Vice-Chancellor.

SCHOLARSHIP HOLDERS AND SPONSORED Sl1JDENTS

CHARGES

The General ServlcesCbarge ( details below) is payable by all students.

In 1993, a fees and charges notice will be sent to continuing students in late January and to commencing students in mid February.

Students are expected to pay charges al any Commonwealth Bank. The last date for payment of charges with the Commonwealth Bank is 19 March 1993.

All other payments should be made directly tothe University by cheque, or in person to the Cashier, level 2, Chancellery.

1. General ServJces Charge Per Annum

(a) Students Proceeding to a Degree or Diploma $264

Plus Students joining Newcastle University Union for the first time

(b) Non-Degree Students Newcastle University Union Charge

(c) EXlerM/ Siudents

$35

$137

$37

The exact amount must be paid in full by the prescribed date.

2. Late Charges

Where the Fees and Charges NOlice is lodged with all charges payable after the 26 February 1993

3. Other Charges

(a) Examination under special supervision

(b) Review of examination results, per subject

(c) Replacement ofRe-enrolment kit

(d) Replacement of Student Card

(e) Statement of Matriculation Status

for non-member of the University

(f) Replacement of lost or damaged Testamur

(g) Academic Transcripts

(i) First copy

(ii) Second Copy

(iii) Each additional copy

Note:

$50

$15 per paper

$25

$10

$5

$10

$30

$10

No charge

$1

(i) Graduands will be providcd with two copies of their transcript free upon notification of e1igibility to graduate.

(ii) Transcripts will be issued on request free of charge to other tertiary education institutions ..

4. Indebted Students

All debts outstanding to the University must be paid before enrolment can be completed- part payment of total amount due will not be accepted.

IDGHER EDUCA nON CONTRIBUTION SCHEME (HE.C.s.)

The Higher Education Contribution Scheme (HECS) requires students to contribute towards the cost of their higher eduction. Each semester a student's HECS liability is calculated according to his or her Student Load. The liability for an 80 credit point full-time load in 1993 is $2328.00. Student Loads are calculated as at the census date each semester i.e. 31st March in Semester One and 31st Augustin Semester Two. Withdrawn subjects effective on or after the census dateand failed subjects incur HEes liability.

Some courses are exempt from HECS charges and some students are exempt. Exemption from payment of the Higher Education Contribution (HEC) applies to:

afee-paying student in a "fees-approved postgraduate award course"

a student in a ''basic nurse education course"

a "full-fee·paying overseas student"

a "student who has paid the Overseas Student Charge"

a "fully sponsored overseas student"

a student in an "enabling course"

a studmt in a "non-award" course

a student who has been awarded "a HECS postgraduate scbolarsh ip"

Basic Nurse education courses will not be exempt from HECS after 1993. Currently enrolled students continuing their studies in such a course will also be liable for HECS in 1994 and in subsequent years.

HECS is administered as part of the enrolment process. Students commencing a new course must select one of three sections on the HECS Payment Options form.

On enrolment students must do one of the following:

(a) Elect to pay up-front which would require payment of 75% of the contribution for the semester, with the balance to be paid by the Commonwealth. Students electing to pay up-front will be asked to pay at the CQlnmencement of each semester.

(b) Defer their HEC and elect to pay through the taxation system, in which case they must either provide a tax file number or apply for a tax file number as part of their enrolment. Institutions are required to ensure that the information given by students of their tax file number application is the same as that on their enrolment form.

Students electing to defer their HEC and pay through the taxation system are notrequired tomake a payment towards their contribution until their taxable income reaches a minimum threshold level. Por the 1991-92 financial year the minimum threshold was $27,098. This amount will be increased each year.

(c) As front 1993 NewZeaJandcitizens residing inAustrai iafor less than two years and permanent residents of Australia whose term address is overseas will berequired to pay their HECS contribution up-front. The 25% discount applies.

New Zealand citizens living outside Australia and enrolled in external courses at Australian institutions should be treated in the same way as permanent residents of Australia whose semester address is overseas and be required to pay up-fronl

The requirement to pay up-front will apply to both commencing and continuing students.

(d) Provide evidence of exemption from the HECS.

All students enrolling in a new course must complete a Payment Options fonn selecting one of the above three options. Deferred or Up-front re-enrolling students will retain their elected payment option (excluding sbJdents falling into category (c) above). A new Payment Options form must be completed if sbJdents transfer courses or wish to change their payment options. Students who wish to change their Payment Option in any semester must do so before the census date forth81 semester. Changes to the Up-front option will not be permitted after the due date for payment of Up-front accounts (check with HECS Office for cut-off dates).

FAILURE TO PAY UP-FRONT ACCOUNTS BY THE DUE DATE OR CHANGE TO THE DEFERRED OPTION BEFORE THE CENSUSDATEWlLLLEADTOAUTOMATICCANCELLATION OF ENROLMENT.

LATE PAYMENTS WILL NOT BE PERMItTED.

Please contact the HECS Office if further infonnation on HECS is required.

LOANS

Students who do not have sufficient funds ~ r:ay the ?eneral ~erv~ Charge should seek a loan from their bank, buddmg society, cred It UDlan

or other financial institution.

An application for a loan from the student loan fimds is possible when no other help is available. Appoinbnents for loan from these funds must be made before the 26 February, 1993 to avoid th~ a,ddition of a late fee. Student loan funds are available for other essenbal needs. ConlSCt the Student Support Omcer, Ms Annette Rudd, pbone (049) 216467 to

arrange an appointmenL

REFUND OF CHARGES

Arefund of the General Services Charge paid on enrolment wi'.l bemade when the student notifies theStudentDivision of a complete withdrawal

from studies under the following conditions:

(i) when a student notifies the University of a complete withdrawal from studies by the following dates, a refund will apply:

Notification on or before 31 March 100% refund

Notification by the end of first semester 50% refund

Notification after the end of first semester Nil refund

(H) when a student solely enrolled in a program of studi~ offered QD!l in Semester2 notifies the University of a complete Withdrawal from studies by the following dates, a refund will apply:

Notification on or before 31 August

Notification after 31 August

100% refund

Nil refund

provided that in exceptional c~c~~stances the Bursar may vary these provisions in the case of indiVidual students.

The $35 joining fee is not refundable.

A refund cheque will be mailed toa student or if applicable, a sponsor.

Any change of address must be notified.

A refund will not be made before 31 March.

CAMPUS TRAFFIC AND PARKING

Matters to do with traffic and pW'king on the campus are gove~ed ~y traffic and parking rules approved under the authority of the Umverslty

Council. These rules determine that it is a privilege to bring a vehicle onto ~e Un iversity csmpus and th at this priv ilege i s subject to traffic an~ ~lDg rules. The rules identify the conditions which govern the ~lDgmg of vehicles onto the campus, parting and movement of v~tllcl~, and matters to do with breaches and enforcemenL The underlytng rab~nale of these rules is to ensure the safe and orderly movement and ~~kmg of vehicles on the campus for the benefit of students, staff and VISitorS and to protect the University's physical environment and landscape.

Essentially the rules require that persons who seek to bring a m~tor vehicle, including motorbikes, onto the campus apply for. a vehicle parking permit. In so doing, the applicant undertakes to abide by. the traffic and parking rules and are automatically.subject to pre~bed penalties for infringements. It is importMt toreali~ ~at the granttng of a parking permit does not carry with it an autotnatlC fight to ~k on the campus. The University hasa seri~s under supplyof carpatkmg spaces and frequently it will not be posSIble to park on the campus.

The issue of a parking permit only entitles a member of the University

to park in a properly designated and m.ar"ed ~t car park ~pace to the extent that such a space is available. It IS essenllal that vehl~les W'e nOi. parked on grassed W'eas, footpaths, roadways and the like for the protection of the University'S landscape and for the safety of students,

staff and visitors.

Alternative parking to be utilised when on cam~us car parks.are full. is available on both sides of University Drive (subJCct tocompltance With

BANKING

traffic regulations in regard to bus stops, distance from pedestriSl

crossings, roundabouts etc).

The University is working with public transport au.thorilleS to im~ve the level of IJ8Dsport to the University ~ as to ~1~l8te ~ necessity for staff and ItUdmls to use priva&e vehicles. It IS m the mterests of all members of the University community, and to the d~elopment and mailltenaDCe of the campus busb.1and setting, to dramatically redu:e ~ numbers ofvehicles being brou.ghton to the ClWPUS, as .wen as asSlSr:mg

with the broader issues of air pollution, traffic congesbon and the like.

Students .e urged to coosider alternative modes of transport. such as blic ................... , and greater use ofbicycles to takeadvmtage of the new

po "--r-'. .L._ U· .'Y Car nnnlino arrmgements are also cycleways servtng ""'" mversl. r-- "0 •

encouraged and your Student Representative Council (SRC) can asSist

you in this regard. The traffIC md parking regulations are stated in full in ~ Universi~'s Calender Volume I. The scale of penalties for rraf(IC and parking infringements as contained in the rules are as follows:

(a) exceeding the spwilimiton University roads ......................... $30

(b) failing to stop when signalled to do so by an Attendant (patrol) ..................................................................... $30

(c) refusal to provide informalion requested by an Attendant (patrol) ............... " ...... " ....... " ................................... $30

(d) failing to obey instructions given by an 3 Attendant (patrol) ..................................................................... $ 0

(e) illegal parking: (D parking on University roadways ................................... $15

(ii) parking on footpaths ................................ · .. · ...... · .... · .. ·· .. $15

(iii) parking on areas marked by sign ................................... $50

(iv) parking in a way that may risk injury to others ............. $50

(v) not displaying parking penn it ....................................... $30

(vi) parking In a restncted area ....... " ............................. $15

(0 parking in an area reserved for handiCapped person . ""'.' ...... $.50

(g) any other breach of the traffic and parking rules ......... " ........... $1 0

The penalty will be imposed:

(a) on the spot by an infringement notice being put on the vehicle; or

(b) by sending an infringement notice by ordinary prepaid post. to the registered person respcnsible for the vehicle, or to the regIStered

owner of the vehicle.

Any objection to the imposition of ~e ~Ity must include full details of the grounds on which the obJecuon IS based and be lodged in writing with the Director PropertyService.s within 14 d~ys oflbe date the infringement notice shows the breach as havmg been

committed. The Director Property Services, after considering an objection,shall

either reject it or waive the penalty.

Penalties must be paid:

(a) within 28 days of the date the infringement notice shows the breach

as having been committed: or

(b) where applicable, within 28 days ofnotification,utat any objection has been rejected by the Director Property Services.

Any queries in relation to traffic and parking matlers may be referred to the Security patrol Office, located in the foyer of the Great Hall an~ ~mt the Property Services Office, located in the foyeroftheHunter BUI~dmg. Applicalion forms to bring a vehicle onto the campus are also available

from these offices.

xi

LOST PROPERTY

The traffic and partinS rules apply to all University campus locatio-ns. It ~ould be noted, however, that no University parking facilities are available at the Conservatorium of Music campus in Auckl8lld Street. Newcastle.

BANKING

I) Commonwealth Bank

The University of Newcastle branch of the CommonweaUh Bank is located on the pathway between the Chancellery and the Hunter Gymnasium (south oflhe Hunter Union. An aulOmatic teller machine is located outside. Hours ofOpenjng:

Monday to Friday 9.30am - 4.00pm Friday 9.30am - 5.00pm

JI) Credit Union

The main branch afthe Universities Credit Union is located with the Student Union on the fonner University side of the campus,

Hours of Opening

Monday to Friday 9.00am -4.00pm

An agency is located in the Hunter Union Building.

CASHIER The cashiers' office on-campus in located on First Floor Chancellery Building_ Credit card facoilities are Dot available. I

HolUs of Opening (a) During Semester

(b) Vacation Period

1D.00am - 4.00pm (Open during lunch break)

1O.00am - 12.3Opm 2.00pm - '.00pm

CHAPLAINCY SERVICE

The Chaplaincy Centres are located in the temporary buildings adjacent totheCornputerTeaching Building and alsoin Room A187 in theHunter Building near the Huxley Library.

Pastoral and spiritual care is available from the following denominational chaplains:-

Anglican Catholic

Baptist Presbyterian

Uniting Church Assembly of God

Russian Orthodolt Seventh Day Adventist

Both centres are open Monday to Friday 8.30 am - 5.00 pm.

The Central Coast Campus and the Conservatorium of Music are both covered on a regular basis.

COMMUNITY PROGRAMMES

The Department of Community Programmes offcrs 8 wide range of courses for .the. general public. Of parti cular interest to in lending students are the ~ndgJng Courses conducted during February and the Open FoundatIOn Course for mature age entry PUflXlses which commences in March.

St~dents interested in Bridging or preparatory courses should telephone, wnte oreall at the Department's office in RoomLG49, Lower Ground Floor, McMul.lin Building. The Department is also able to respond to requ~ts to tailor: make Co~s, Workshops, Seminars and Training Sessions for particular clients in virtually any subject area. Telephone. (049) 216017.

CONVOCATION

All students of the University of Newcasl1e become members of C~v~ion upon graduating. Convocation is the graduate body of the Umverslty of Newcastle and, under the provisions of the University of

xii

Newcastle Act, is one of the constituent parts of the Un iversity. By virtue of the Act and the University By-Laws, Convocation has a voice in the government of the University through its right to elect members of Council and the Standing Committee's right to direct COOlmunication with the Council and the Senate. Through its membership of the Australi. University Graduate Conference, Convocation also cooperates with its counterpart& in other universities to give effective eqll'e8sion of opinion on matters of concern to graduates.

The Coovocation Officer may be contacted on (049) 216464.

CO·OP BOOKSHOP

The Co-op Bookshop is located within the Shortland Student Union. It stocks textbooks, general publications, computer discs and Olher software audio-visual cassettes. Discounts are available to Co-op members. '

Hours of Opening

Monday, Wednesday and Friday

Tuesday and Thursday

First two weeks of semester

LOST PROPERTY

9.00 ... - 5.00pm

9.00"" - 6.00pm 8.30 ... - 7.00pm

Lost property may be collected from, or deposited at two locations on campus:

(a) Patrol Office, Great Hall between 9.00am - 4.00pm

(b) Propeny Services, ClIO, between 9.00am - 4.00pm (Hunter Building)

It is suggested that you telephone in advance.

NOTICEBOARDS

Students wishing to post notices within the glass-fronted locked noticeboards should contact Mr D. Heggan, Property Services in the Hunter Building.

POST OFFICE

Offers all normal postal services EXCEPT interviews for passpons.

HOUTS of Ope1lillg

(a) During Semester

(b) Vacation Period

Monday to Friday

Monday to Friday

PUBLIC TRANSPORT

9.00 ... - 5.00pm

9.ooam -1 2.3c.pm I.3Opm - 5.00pm

The State TransitAuthorityprovides acomprehensive bus service to the University front the following locations:

Newcastle (Parnell Place), Newcasl1eRegional Museum, The]unction, Tighes Hill, Broadmeadow, Adamstown, Larnbton Park, Mayfield, Waratah, ]esmond, Wallsend, Rankin Park, Cardiff, Charlestown, Belmont.

Bus Timetables are available from the Student enquiry counter in the ground floor of the Chancellery Building.

STUDENT INSURANCE COVER

Studentplan Insurance is an w:.cidentpolicy which is administered by the Sports Union/Sport and Recreation Office on behalf of American Insurance Underwriters (A.J.U.). This policy provides benefits for death, disabilit~, hospitalization, loss of wages and medical expenses (these are reslncted to injuries sustained whilst engaged in campus activities). The injury must be the result of a 'fortuitous act' (i.e. due to chance). It does not cover disability arising from sickness or disease. There is a $20.00 excess applying to each accident, not each claim. This excess is deducted from the first pan-claim only.

Student plan can cover:

i) Students who are members of the Sports Union (this does not include students who have deferred study). Membership of the Spons Union is included in the General Service (barge;

i i) Active life and active associate members of the Insured organisation;

iii) Staff of the Sports Union and staff of the University who join the

Sports Union.

For further information and claim forms, please contact the Sports and Recreation office dwing business hours on (049) 215584.

UNIVERSITY COMPUTING SERVICES

The University of Newcastle has made use of computers in research and teaching and for administrative purposes since the first computer was

installed in October 1963.

Computers are widely used in teaching wherever this is appropriate. Some of these are managed by the teacbing departments while others are maintained and supported by University Computing Services in puhlicly

available locations.

The central computers and many others are connected to the University Information Network (UIN) which in tum is connected totheAustralian Academic and Research Network (AARNet) and to the worldwide

Internet.

UniversityComputingServicesprovidesandsupportscomputingservices for most activities of the university: for academic departments, through the HelpDesk and Computer Laboratories Manager, for administrative divisions and for service units. Services are provided through central computers, through a campus network with extemallinks, and through assistance to users ofboth the central computers and distributed desk-top

computers.

There are more than 800 terminal connections directly to the campus network, allowing connection to various computers, both in University Computing Services and in Universitydepartments. A number of School and Departmental computers and networks are also connected to the

lJIN. Students are given access to central V AXNMS and UNlX computers and centrally located microcomputers (Apple Macintosh and IBM PCs or 'clones') and to departmental and special purpose CQlnputers as appropriate to their course of study. Many packages are available such as the NAG numerical libr8J}', statistical programs such as Minitab, SAS, SPSS-X and BMDP and word-processing. All students are free to use the electronic News and Mail services for on-campus use. AARNet access is only available to course work students when specifically

requested by course lecturers.

Students enrolling in a subject for which acomputer connect-time quota has been established are automatically given accounts on the cenlral computers. Research students (Research Masters and PhD) are not limited on connect-timeand are allocated disk quotas appropriate to their

wOO<. The computers nonnaIly operate continuously, with terminal rooms open from 08:00 to 21:00 on weekdays (and in the Computing and Information Sciences Building from 09:00 to 17:00 at weekends for

most of the academic year).

University Computing Services aim to provide a high quality modem computing environment for students. Use of this together with their experience in using School and Departmental computers, will ensure graduates have acquired broad and valuable computing experience.

Students are encouraged to seek guidance in computer use fr<m their lecturers, but the ues Help Desk also offers assistance to all users.

UNIVERSITY LmRAR1ES

Condltloos orUse

The University accepts no responsibility for any damage to or loss of data arising directly or indirectly from use of these facilities or for any cotlStIqUeatiaJ loss or damage. The Univel'sity makes no warranty, express (]I' implied regarding the computing services offered, or their

fitness for.y particular purpolle.

The University cannot guarantee the cooftdentiaJity of any information stored en any University computer or transmitted through its network. For the purpose of managing the resources, it may be necessary for the

University to monitor ftles and usage.

The University's liability in the event of any loss or d.:nage shall be limited to the fees and charges paid to the University for the use of the computing facilities which resulted in the loss or damage.

You may use only those facilities which have been authorised for yoot' use. If access is protected by a password, you are not to make this password available to Olhers. You may not use any account set up for another user, nor may you altetnpt to find out the password of .other user. This applies both to facUities within the University and to any accessible using the University'S network.

You may only use authorised facilities for authorised purposes. For example, facilities made available for teaching may not be used for

private gain.

You must be aware of the law of copyright as it affects computer softw.-e. Softwaremust not becopied except with the eqwess permission

of the copyright owner.

You may not attempt to copy infonnation belonging to other users (whether they be staff, students or other users) without their express

pennission.

You may not attempt to interfere with the operation of the Universitys' computers or any other facilities accessed by use of the Universitys'

computers or network.

You may not attempt to subvert the secwityofany of the Universitys' computing facilities or any others accessible by use of the Universitys'

facilities.

You maynOl. use the Universitys' computing facilities to send obscene,

offensive, bogus, barassing or illegal messages.

You may grant access to your own files by other users by setting

appropriate protection.

You may access computing and communications facilities on other siles only with their pennission and in a manner consistent with these terms.

You must, on request by an authorised member of staff, produce evidence ofidentity (for ell:ample by student card) when using University

computing facilities.

You are required to infonn the University of any breach of these Tenns (for example, if you become aware that someone else bas used your

account).

You must abide by any relevant instructions given by the Director or the Director's delegated officer. Such instructions may be issued by notice displayed in the vicinity of computing facilities, by letter, by electronic

communicalion, in pezSOl1 or otherwise.

UNIVERSITY LIBRARIES As a member of the University of Newcastle, you are entitled to use the Auchmuty, Huxley, Conservatorium and Central Coast Libraries as well

as the libraries of the teaching hospitals.

Aucbmuty Library

Located adjacent to the ShOftland Union, the Auchmuty Library is the main library on the Callaghan campus. It supports the teaching and research requirements of the F acw ties of Arch itecture, Arts, Ecomomics

xiii

UNIVERSITY LIBRARIES

and Commerce, Education, Engineering, Medicine, Science and Mathematics and Social Sciences. It holds an extensive range of government publications, microforms, audiovisual media, archival materials and a Rare Book Collection. Specialist services are provided in Biomedicine, Law, and audiovisual media.

Otberservicesinclude:Loans,ShortLoans,CD-ROMs,OnlineSearching, Reference Service, Inter Library Services, Archives.

The Sbort Loan Col lectJon contains materials in high demand: srudents may borrow these for restricted periods.

The Biomedical Reading Room houses books, serials, pamphlets and reference mater"ial in Biological Sciences and Medicine; i.e. within the classification ranges 016.57-016.619 and 570-619. It also includes a special area, Ie Medical Reserve, which holds a variety of resources and equipment supporting the Faculty of Medicine's innovative and highly resource-dependent curriculum.

Collections of resources are also maintained in seven country centre hospitals for the use of students in clinical learning stages: Taree, Tamworth, Gosford. Maitland, Orange, Usmore and Dubbo. There is a formal agreement between the University and theArea Health Board on the operation of the Gardiner Library Service under which registered usersofthcAuchmutyandGardinerLibrariesenjoycompletereciprocity.

The Law Reading Room houses books, serials. and primary law materials including law reports, acts, bills and regulations.

The Audiovisual section includes computer-based multimedia.

Furthec information and assistance can be obtained at the Auchmuty Library Reference Desk, 'phone 215851,

Huxley Ubrary

Located in the Hunter Building, this Library supports the teaching and research requirements of lhe Faculties of Health Sciences, Nursing, Education and Art, Design and Communication. The Library has an extensive collection of audiovisual media and curriculum material and receives all publications from the NSW DepanmentofSchool Education.

Other services include: Loans, Reference Service, CD-ROMs, Online searching, Inter-Library Services, Eltterna! SrudiesService, ShortLoans. Borrowers may have access to the Short Loan Collection for restricted periods.

Furtherinformation and assistance can beobtained attheHuxley Library Reference Desk, 'phone 216453.

Newcastle Conservatorlum of Music Ubrary

The Library contains a collection of books, serials, scores, CDs, and sound recordings, It is located at the Newcastle Conservatorium of Music, on the comer of Gibson and Auckland Streets, in the city.

Cturently only students and staff of the Conservatorium of Music can borrow from its Library. This includes Music Education students enrolled on the Callaghan campus.

Further information can be obtained by contacting the Librarian on 294133.

Central Coast Campus Ubrary

The Library has a small but growing collection of books, serials and audiovisualmediawhichsupporlste&ehingprogrammesinArts,Business, Social Sciences and Education.

Further infonnation can be obtained by ringing (043) 622077.

GardIner Ubrary Service

There are lhree separate libraries within the service: the John Hunter Hospital Branch, the Royal Newcastle Hospital Branch and tho.'! Mater

xiv

Hospital Branch. The specific opening hours for these libraries will be published through NEWCA T and the appropriate library guides.

FW1ber information can be obtained by ringing 21 3779.

Borrowing/Identification Cards

Students need an ideotificatioo c.d to borrow. Please remember to

caTy your c.d with you at all times if you wish to borrow CI' use li brary facilities. If books are borrowed 00 your card by anyone else, you are responsible for them. Report any lost card to the Loans Desk staff immediatelytopreveot unautboriseduse. Replacementcards are available for $5.00 &om the Student Division Office in the Chancellery.

Borrowlq Rtgbts

For the details of loan conditions students should refer to the Library Guide and the various handouts published at the beginning of each year.

Books must be returned to the Library from which they were borrowed. A fineofS2.00per item is levied when material istwodays overdue. The fine will increase by 50 cents per day per item until the material is returned. Borrowingrighls are also withdrawn. Iflibrary material is lost OI"damaged, thereplacernentcost, plus aprocessing fee, will becharged.

Access to Information

Library facilities include the computerised catalogue NEWCA T, which provides direct access to infonnation about materials held in the Auchmuty, Huxley, Conservatorium. Central Coast and Area Health Libraries. The Aucmnuty and Huxley Libraries also hold databases on CD-ROM to enable students and staff to {rod journal articles in their subject areas. The print versions of other indexes are available in the Reference Collection for manual searching. Some are on computerised databases available via telecommunication networks. AARNet, the Australian Academic Network, provides access to others.

Photocopying

Photocopying facilities are available in aU University Libraries. The machines .. e operated by magnetic-strip_cards which can be purchased in the Library. Credit for lhe photocopiers can be added to these cards from a dispenser as many times as needed. Users must observe the relevant Copyright Act provisions which are on display near the photocopiers.

InterLibrary Services

This service is available to academic staff, higher degree and hooours/ final year students. Material not held in the University of Newcastle Libraries may be obtained from other libraries within Australia or overseas. Books and serials readily available within Australia should arrive within two weeks. A Fast Track Service is available, at exira cost, for urgent requests.

Disabled Persons

All libraries provideaccess fOl"disabi ed srudents and staff. 80thAuchmuty and Huxley Libraries provide special services fOl" physically disabled and visually impaired library users. Contact librarians in each Library will help with infonnation about the library, parking, lift keys and other facilities such as the Braille Library, a Kurzweil machine which reads aloud from English printed text and access tolarge-print NEWCAT, the University Libraries' online catalogue. Please phone 215851.

Hours of Opening

AUCHMU1Y LmRARY

Term Hours:

Monday to Thursday

8.30arn to 10.00pm

Semester Breaks:

Monday to Friday

Friday Sarurday & Sunday

8.30arn to 7.00pm 1.00prn to 5.00pm

Sarurday & Sunday

UNIVERSITY LIBRARIES

8.30am to 7.00pm

Long Vacation:

Monday to Friday

8.30am to 5.00pm

Library Closed:

!.00pm Ie 5.00pm

Australia Day, Easter except Easter Monday, CbDstmas to New Year

Library Open:

Easter Monday. Anzac Day, Queen' s Birthday, Show Day. Labour Day

HUXLEY LIBRARY

Term Hours:

Monday to Thursday

8.30am to 9.00pm

Semester Breaks:

Wednesday

9.00am to 7.00pm

Long Vacation:

Monday to Friday

9.00am to 5,00pm

Library Closed:

A1I public holidays

Conservatorlum Library

Friday Saturday & Sunday

8.30am to 5.00pm 1.00prn to 5.00pm

Other Days Weekends

9.00am to 5.00pm Closed

Please contact the Library on 294133

Central Coast Campus Ubrary

Please contact the Library on (043) 622077.

t: \l

SECfION FIVE

CHEM323 BIOINORGANIC COORDINATION CHEMISTRY Scp


Hours 2 Hours oflectures, 1 hour of tutorials/Workshops and 3 Hours of laboratory work/assignments each week for half a semester.

Examination One 1 hour paper. Thelaboratory/asSignment work will count for 20% of the final assessment but a pass in Ute laboratory/assignment work is a prerequisite for a pass in the subject.

ConlenJ

Synthesis of complexes of multidentale and macrocyclic ligands; metal-directed reactions and stereoselectivity; metalloproteins and meta11oenzymes; bioelectrochemistry and redox proteins.

Text

No formal text; material to be advised.

CHEM331 ORGANIC CHEMISTRY lOcp

Prerequisile CHEM231.

HOUTS 2 Hours of lectures, 1 hour of tutorials/workshops and 3 Hours of laboratory work each week for one semester.


Content

The central theme of this course will be organic synthesis. A survey of important synthetic reactions for functional group transformations and carbon-carbon bond formation with em phasis on the chemo- and stereoselectivity and mechanisms of these reactions, Systematic approach to synthesis - the discotu1ection/ synthon method. Examples of syntheses and discussion of some literature classics.

Text

As for CHEM231.

CHEM332 HETEROCYCLIC CHEMISTRY


Scp


Examination One 1 hour paper. The laboratory/assignment work will count for 20% of the final assessment but a pass in the laboratory/assignment work is a prerequisite for a pass in the subject.

Content

The synthesis, reactions and spectroscopic properties of five and six membered heterocycles containing one or two N, 0 and S atoms and their benzo-analogs.

Text

Davies, D.T. 1992, Aromatic Heterocyclic Chemistry, Oxford University Press.

CHEMISTRY SUBJECT DESCRWflONS

CHEM333 ORGANIC REACTION MECHANISM 5cp

Not available in 1993.

CHEM334 IDENTIFICATION OF NATURAL COMPOUNDS Scp



Exiuninalion One 1 hour paper. 1belaboratory/assignment work will count for 20% of the final assessment but a pass in the laboratory/assessment work is a prerequisite for a pass in the subject.

ConJenl

The course explores several case studies from the chemical. literature in which the isolation, purification and identification of bacterial, fungal, plant or marine secondary metabolites are reported. Topics such as chromato- graphic methods, spectroscopy, simple procedures and biosynthesis will be discussed in the context of the identification of small organic compounds such as terpenes, steroids and oligopeptides.

TeXl


CHEM33S ORGANIC SPECTROSCOPY

Prerequisite CHEM231

Scp

Hours 2 Hours of lectures, 1 hour of tutorials and 3 Hours of workshops/laboratory each week for half a semester.

Examinalion One I hour paper. The laboratory/workshop work will count for 20% of the final assessment but a pass in the laboratory work is a prerequisite for a pass in the SUbject.

Contenl

The course will cover appli calions of ultraviolet/visible, infrared, IH and IlC nuclear magnetic resonance and mass spectrometry in the structural elucidation of organic compounds.

Text

Williams, D.H. and Fleming,!. 1988,Spectroscopic Methods in. Organic Chemistry, 4th edn, McGraw-Hill.

CHEM341 PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY

Prerequisiles CHEM241, MATHI02 (or MATHI12)

lOcp

II ours 2 Hours of lectures, I hour of tutorials/workshops and 3 Hours of laboratory work each week for one semester.


Content

Electrodics - the metal solution interface and structure of the double layer, rates of charge transfer reactions; determination of charge transf erreaclion mechani sms; electrochemical teclmiques; introduction to corrosion.

75

SECfION FIVE

Molecu~ar and Electronic Structure - the use of quantum mechanics and molecular group theory in chemistry; malter waves; free electron and particle in a box; atomic and molecular Schr~ger equation and solutions thereof; symmetry elements and ~Oln.t groups of molecules; symmetry adapted linear combmation of atomic orbitals; HUckel molecular orbital theory. Text

No fannal text; material to be advised.

CHEM342 ELECTROCHEMICAL SOLAR ENERGY CONVERSION Scp

Prerequisites CHEM241, MATHI02 (or MATHI12)


Examination One 1 hour paper. Thelaboratory/assignment work will count for. 20% of the final assessment but a pass in the la~ra1ory/asslgnment work is a prerequisite for a pass in the subject.

Content

Electroni~ ~cture of solids; semioonductor/solution interfaces; ~hotoexCUaIJon and charge transfer at semioonductor solution mterfaces;electrochemicalphotogalvanicceUsandelectrochemical photovoltaic cells.

Text

No formal text; material to be advised,

CHEM343 MOLECULAR SPECTROSCOPY Scp Prerequisite CHEM241.


~ination One 1 hour paper. The laboratory/assignment work will count for. 20% of the final assessment but a pass in the Ja~ory/asslgnment work is a prerequisite for a pass in the subject.

Content

At~m~c and Laser Spectroscopy - spontaneous emission of radlauon; measurement of radiative lifetimes of atoms and molecules; population inversion mechanism in gas lasers.

Photoelectron Spectroscopy - resonant multi photon ionisation photoelectron spectroscopy; He! and Hell photoelectron spectroscopy of diatomic molecules.

Text


CHEM361 ENVIRONMENTAL CHEMISTRY Prerequisite CHEM261.

lOcp

Hours 2 Hours of lectures. I hour of tutorials, and 3 Hours of laboratorynibrary/workshop/site visits each week for one semester.

76


Exami'~lio? One 2hourpaper. Thelaboralory/library/workshop/ S1~ VISitS ~ count for 20% of the final assessment buta passin thIS work IS a prerequisite for a pass in the subject.

ContenJ

Prin~ples laid down in CHEM261 will be expanded into a more detailed treatment of the chemistry of the hydrosphere, the ~m~sptte:e •. and the geosphere. Specific topics include gas. liqwd-solid mteractions in water chemistry; waler treatment meth~; environmental chemis':r'Y of the geosphere; particulate matter m the almos~here; orgaruc pollutants in the atmosphere and geosphere; envrronmental toxicology; the nature, sources, and chemistry of hazardous wastes.

Text

Manahan, S.E. 1990, Environmental Chemistry, 4th edn, Lewis.

SECfION FIVE

Environmental Science Subject Descriptions seEN subjects are available only to candidates enrolled in the Bachelor of Environmental Science degree.

SCENIOI ENVIRONMENTAL INVESTIGATIONS I IOcp

Hours 3 hours per week for two semesters.

Examination Progressive assessment and one 2 hour paper at the end of semester 2-

Content

A case study approach. utilizing the basic sciences to solve introductory environmental problems associated with human activity.

Text

Kupchella.. C.E. and Hyland, M.C. 1989,EnvironmenJai Science AUyn and Bacon, Sydney.

SCEN201 ENVIRONMENTAL INVESTIGA TlONS II IOcp

Prerequisite SCENIOI.


Examination Progressive assessment and one 2 hour eXamination at the end of semester 2.

ConJent

A field based study, utilizing analytical techniques from a range of scientific disciplines to investigate and provide solutions to environmental problems associated with human activity.

Text To be advised.

SCEN202 ENVIRONMENTAL PLANNING AND POLLUTION CONTROL IOcp

Hours 4 hours per week for one semester, field work.

Examination Progressive assessment and one 2 hour paper at the end of the semester.

Contem

This course examines the environmental planning and development control system in N.S. W. Reference is also made to current pollution control legislation. The emphasis in this course is to understand the system which controls development and the various requirements forenvironmentai assessment for different types of development. A number of local and regional case studies will be examined to illustrate the various legislative requirements.

Text

Farrier, 0.1988, Environmental Law Handbook: Planning and Landuse inN.S.W. Redfern LegaJ Centre, Redfern.

SCEN203 WATER RESOURCES MANAGEMENT lOcp

Hours 4 hours per week for one semester, 3 days field work.


ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS

Content

TItis course examines many of the major environmental issues associated with water resources development in Australia Following an introduction to hydrology and water qUality in the catchment ecosystem, issues covered include reservoir management, eutrophication, dredging, channelization, wetland and floodplain management, irrigation/salinisation and wastewater disposal. Catchment management is introduced as the basis for water resources planning and management.

Text To be advised.

SCEN301 ENVIRONMENTAL PROJECT IOcp

Prerequisite SCEN20t.

Content

An investigation and report of an environmental problem of interest to the student utilizing scientific methodology.

SCEN302 ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT TECHNIQUES IOcp

Prerequisite SCEN202.


Examination Progressive assessment and one 2hour paper al the end of the semester.

Content

This course will examine the rationale and methodology of environmental impact assessment (EIA) and wi11look at anumber of impact assessmem techniques in practice. The phenomenon of EIA will bediscussedand current developments inenvironmental management will be examined. Reference will also be made to environmental documentation prepared for various developments.

Texts

Wathem. P.(ed) 1988,Environmentallmpact Assessment, Unwin Hyman.

Beder, S. (ed) 1990. Environmental Impact StatemenlS, Selected Readings. Environmental Education Project. University of Sydney.

Other subjects undertaken in this degree are outlined in the Approved Subjects - Schedule - Bachelor of Environmental Science

77

SEcrION FIVE

Geography Subject Descriptions

GEOGlOI INTRODUCTION TO PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY IOcp

Prerequisites Nil. Students should note that GEOG101 and GEOGI02 are prerequisites for the Geography Majorin Arts and Science, and for Geography Honours GEQG401 and GEOG402.

HoW's 2 Hours lectures and 2 Hours of practical work per week for one semester. A one day field excursion.

ExaminaJion Progressive assessment and one 2 hour paper at the end of the semester.

Content

An introduction to physical geography including meteorology and climate; the influence of geomotphic processes on landforms; weathering, rivers, ice, frost, wind and the sea; the physical, chemical and biological characteristics of the soil and the development of soil profiles; environmental and historical factors that influence plant distribution.

Practical work includes an introduction to the study of climatic data and maps, and the use of topographic maps and aerial photographs for landform analysis.

Tex'

Briggs, D. & Smithson, P. 1985, FundamenJals of Physical Geography paperback Hutchinson.

GEOGI02 INTRODUCTION TO HUMAN GEOGRAPHY IOcp

Prerequisites Nil. Students should note that GEOGI01 and GEOOI02 are prerequisites for the Geography Majorin Arts and Science, and for Geography Honours GE0G401 and GEOG402.

HoW's 2 Hours lectures and 2 Hours of practical work per week for one semester. A one day field excursion.


Content

An introduction to hUman geography including cultural, population, economic, development and urban geography.

Practical work includes an introduction to elementary statistical data and its presentation by thematic maps in human geography.

GEOG201 METHODS IN PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY

Prerequisite GEOGI01.

HoW's 4 Hours per week for one semester.

Examination Progressive assessment.

Content

IOcp

An introduction to statistics and computing for Physical Geography. StUdy of cartographic, photographic and aerial photographic methods in geography.

78

GEOGRAPHY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS

GEOG202 METHODS IN HUMAN GEOGRAPHY IOcp


HoW's 4 Hours perweekforonesemester, up to 2daysfield work.


Content

Introductory methods appropriate to Human Geography descriptive and inferential statistics will be emphasised and there will bean introduction to computing, survey analysis and research. design.

GEOG203 BIOGEOGRAPHY AND CLIMATOLOGY

Prerequisite GEOG101. IOcp

HoW's 4 Hours per week for one semester; 2 days field work:.


COnJent

An introduction to biogeography. Definition and scope of the subject is examined and its interdisciplinary nature emphasised. Ways of describing and analysing the ranges of organisms in space and time are explored. Some emphasis is placed on rainforest for the illustration of principles and for the gaining of field experience.

An introduction to climatology on a synoptic and meso-scale including radiation and heat budgets; precipitation processes; general circulation; agricultural climatology; applied climatology.

Texts

Linacre, E. & Hobbs, 1. 1983, The Australian Climatic Environment, paperback Wiley.

Pears, N. 1985, Basic Biogeography, 2nd edn, Longman.

Williams, I.B. Harden, GJ. et al1984, Trees and shrubs in rainJorestsoJNSW andSoUlhernQueensland University of New England.

Reference

Attenborough, D. 1981, Life on Earth Fontana/Collins.

GEOG204 GEOMORPHOLOGY OF AUSTRALIA

Prerequisite GEOGIOI.

IOcp

/loW's 4 Hours per week for one semester; 2 days field work:.


Content

Rocks and their weathering, structural landforms, soils, slope development and mass movements, fluvial, aeolian and coastal processes and landforms, glacial and periglacial processes and landforms.

SEcrION FIVE

GEOG207 POPULATION, CULTURE AND RESOURCES


IOcp

HoW's 4 Hours per week for one semester; 2 days field work.

Examination Progressive assessment and one 2 hour paper at the end of Ute semester.

Conten!

The course examines three themes: popUlation and migration; culture and technology; resource use. These themes are illustrated by historical and contemporary case studies at a variety of spatial sca1es.

Topicsinclude: world and regional population growth; migration, population growth and settlement; culture, plural societies and development; culture, technology and resource use; agricultural origins, diffusion and practices.

GEOG208 CITIES AND REGIONS

Prerequisite GEOG102.

IOcp

HoW's 4 Hours per week for one semester 2 days field work.


Content

The course examines the changing nature and distribution of fundamental aspects of human geography: urban settlement and the mode of production. These themes are iUustrated by case studies of cities, industries, regions and communities.

Topics include: regional growth and industrial development; processes of urban andregional change; urban hierarchies; internal structure of the city; social impact of change; policy and planning.

GEOG301 ADVANCED METHODS IN PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY IOcp

Prerequisites GEOG201 plus either GEOG203 or GEOG204.

This course consists of a 6-day field excursion (i.e. 48 Hours of the 56-hour course) together with 2 Hours per week for 4 weeks).


Con!ent

The course mainly involves a field excursion to demonstrate methods of undertaking research in biogeography and soils in a specific area. The remaining time will bedevoted to methodology and analysis related to the field trip. The field trip will take place between first and second semesters.

GEOG302 ADVANCED METHODS IN HUMAN GEOGRAPHY IOcp


This course mainly involves a major field excursion.


Content

This course involves a major field excursion to investigate a contemporary human geography issue. Methods include survey

GEOGRAPHY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS

design, questionnaire construction, social analysis, computer aided mapping and geographic information systems.

"'NB The field trip is scheduled prior to the beginning of first semester. Please contact the Geography Department as soon as possible.

GEOG304 THE BIOSPHERE AND CONSERVATION

Prerequisite GEOG203.

IOcp

HoW's 4 Hours per week for one semester 4 days fieldworL

Examination Progressive assessment and one 2hourpaper at the end of the semester.

ConJen!

Biogeography: Emphasis on plant geography, with examination of both the ecological and historical aspects of the subject. A small herbarium coUection is required of each student.

Biological Conservation: An introduction to the subject, in which the importance of a genetically-based approach is emphasised.

Soils: Processes of soil erosion, soil conservation issues and methods.

Tex.ts

Morgan, R.P.C. 1986,SoilErosionandConservation Longman.

Smith, David 1990, Con!inen! in crisis Penguin.

Williams, J.B. and Harden, G.l. 1980, Rainforest Climbing Plants University of New England.

Reference

Kellman, M.C. 1980, Plant Geography, 2nd edn, Methuen.

GEOG30S CLIMATIC PROBLEMS IOcp

Prerequisite GEOG203 or permission of Head of Department.

HoW's 4 Hours per week for one semester 1 day fieldwork.

Examination Progressive assessment and one2hourpaperatlhe end of the semester.

ConJent

Introduces palaeoclimates in the Pleistocene and Holocene, and the reasons behind climate changes overthose periods. Describes anthropogenic impacts on climate, through air pollution, on local, regional and global scales. Evaluates near-future possible climate variations over the next century.

Text

Bridgman, B.A. 1990, Global Air Pollution Problems Jar the 1990s paperback Belhaven Press.

Recommended Reading

Bradley, R.S. 1985. Quaternary Paleaoclimatology Allen & Unwin.

GEOG306 GEOGRAPHY OF AUSTRALIA AN HISTORICAL PERSPECTIVE IOcp

Prerequisites GEOG202 plus either GEOG205 or GEOO206.

Hours 4 Hours per week for one semester; 2 days field work:.

79

SECTION FIVE

Exmninalion Progressive assessment and one 2 hour paper at the end of the semester.

Content

Selected aspects of the population, settlement and land use patterns of Australia. Topics to be studied inc1ude exploratory images, image-makers and distorters, and visions of Australia before 1900; migrationtotheNewWorld;populationof Austtalia 1788-1981; wbanisalion in Australia; agricultumlland use 1788 101914.

GEOG309 SOCIETY & SPACE IOcp


Hours 4 Hours per week for one semester; 2 days fieldwork/ project work.

Examination Progressive assessment and one 2haur paper at the end of the semester.

Con/em

This course examines the interaction of social groups with each other and with the urban environment. A variety of social groups defined by ethnic and socia-economic status, family structure and gender will be studied. The course will use a variety of methodological approaches to socio-spatial behaviour.

GEOG310 DIRECTED STUDIES IN HUMAN GEOGRAPHY 10cp

Prerequisites GROO202 plus either GEOG205 or GEOG206.

Hours 4 Hours per week for one semester; 2 days fieldwork! project work.

Examination Progressive assessment and one 2hour paper at the end of the semester,

Content

This course will nonnally be given by a visiting lecturer - the subject to be advised.

GEOG311 HYDROLOGY

Prerequisites GEOG201 , GEOJ203,

IOcp

Hours 4 Hours per week for one semester 2 days fieldwork.


ContenJ

The course examines the distribution of waterin the environment. Most attention will be given to atmospheric moisture, the hydrologic cycle, catchments, runoff, sediment and solute transport and soil water. Water resources are also considered

Texl

Ward, R.C.and Robinson, M. 1989,Principleso/Hydrology, 3rd edn, McGraw-Hill.

GEOG31S PRODUCTION, WORK AND TERRITORY 10 cp


Hours 4 Hours per week for one semester 2 days fieldwork.

80

GEOORAPHY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS

ExaminaJion Progressive assessment and one 2 hour paper at the end of the semester.

Content

The course examines contemporary changes in production, distribution and consumption, by referring to agriculture, manufacturing and seJVices. It focuses on the geography of employment and industrial change; and the evolution of food supply systems.

Topicsinclude: the territorial organisation of production, the role of large corporations, agribusiness, technological change, the farm problem, divisions of labour and the changing nature of work. and the changing role of the stale.

Case studies of impacts of economic change on people and communities are drawn from the Asia-Pacific basin, and from site visits in the Hunter.

Texts

Dicken, P. 1992, Global Shift. 2nd edn, Paul Chapman.

Lawrence, G. 1988, Capitalism and the Countryside, Pluto Press.

GEOG316 DIRECTED STUDIES IN PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY


IOcp

SECfION FIVE

Geology Subject Descriptions

GEOLIOI THE ENVIRONMENT IOcp

Hours 6 Hours per week for one semester, including lectures, practicals and field excursions. The course is repeated in the evening in Semester I

ExaminaJion One 3 hour paper, assignments 'and laboratory

practicals

Contem

A lecture, field and practical course which examines in the widest context the evolution of our planet and man's environment. Specific topics are the Earth in space; evolution and dynamics of the planet Earth; evolution of the atmosphere. hydrosphere, biosphere and life; the impact of climatic change; structures produced as a result of plate collision.

Texts Consult lecturers concerned

GEOLI02 EARTH MATERIALS lOcp

Prerequisite GEOL10t The Environment

Hours 6 Hours per week for one semester, including lectures,

practicals and excursions

Examination One 3 hour paper, assignments and practical

examinations.

Content

A course dealing with the features and internal structure of rock forming minerals, the characteristics of volcanoes and their prodUcts, weathering processes and deposi~on~ environmcn~s of sediments. The metamorphism of rocks m dIfferent tectornc settings. energy resources and ore deposits of different origins are

also discussed,

Texts

Press, F. & Siever, R. 1986. Earth, 4th edn, Freeman.

Whitten, D.G.A, 1973,..4 Dictionary a/Geology. Penguin.

GEOL21l OPTICAL MINERALOGY

Prerequisite GEOLt02

Not to count for credit with GEOL201

Scp


practicals and class assignments

Examination One 2 hour paper and practical examinations

Content

A basic course in crystallography, optical mineralogy and rock

forming minerals.

Texl

Gribble, C.D. and Hall, A.J. 1985, A practical inJroduction to

optical mimraiogy, Allen & Unwin.

GEOL212 INTRODUCTORY PETROLOGY

Prerequisite GEOL211

Advisory prerequisite CHEMt 02

lOcp

GEOLOGY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS


Hours 6 Hours per week forone semester, including lectures and practicals

Examinations One 3 hour paper, class assignments and practical

examinations

ConJem

An introduction to the petrography and petrology of igneous and sedimentary rocks,

Texi Gribble, CD. & Hall. A.J. 1985, A practical introduction 10

optical mimralogy, Allen & Unwin,

GEOL213 ANCIENT ENVIRONMENTS AND ORGANISMS IOcp

Prerequisite GEOLI02



practica1s and field excursions

Examination One 3 hour paper, class assignments and practical

examinations

Conlent

A course integrating ancient sedimentary environments with the evolution and morphology of ancient life, stratigraphic relationships and time, The course will be supported by field

excursions in the local area.

Texts Consult lecturers concerned

GEOL214 GEOLOGICAL STRUCTURES AND RESOURCES IOcp

Prerequisite GEOLI02


/lours 6 Hours per week for one semester

Examination One 3 hour paper, class assignments, practical.

examination

ConJent

A course dealing with geological structures and economic

resources,

Texts

Park, R.G. 1988, Foundations of Structural Geology, 2nd edn,

Blackie.

McClay, K. 1987, The Mapping of Geological Structures Open Univ. Press,

GEOL21S GEOLOGY FIELD COURSE Ilkp

Prerequisite GEOLl02

Not to counl for credit with GEOL205, GEOL206

Hours 14 days field work in two 7 day sessions forane semester (February, week before Semester I, Easter break)

Examination By report

81

SECfION FIVE

Conlenl

(i) Analysis of the southern margin of the Sydney Basin, igneous and metamorphic rocks of the Southern Lachlan Fold Bell. and mapping of a composite pluton. Preparation of reports and supporting tutorials. and lectures.

(ii) Mapping of metamorphosed sheH and trench sequences of the Southern Lachlan Fold Belt; integration and presentation in a report.

Text

McQay. K. 1987. The Mapping a/Geological StructUTes Open Univ.Press.

GEOL216 GEOLOGY FIELD COURSE



5cp

HOUTS 7 days field work for one semester (September break)


Conlenl

Mapping of low grade metamorphic rocks of the Cobar area; structural and stratigraphic interpretation; relationship of suJ prude rocks to sUUcture and stratigraphy; presentation of results and interpretation in a report.

Text

McQay. K. 1987. The Mapping a/Geological Structures, Open Univ. Press.

GEOL311 IGNEOUS PETROLOGY AND CRUSTAL EVOLUTION IOcp

Prerequisite GE0L312

Not to count for credit with GE0L303, GE0L306


Examination One 3 hour paper and class assignments

Conlenl

Igneous Petrology

Petrology of igneous rocks in relation to the tectonic environment. Changes in igneous petrogenesis throughout time.

Crustal Evolution

Geological evolution of selected Archaean and Proterozoic terrains in Australia: comparisons and contrasts with modem tectonic environments to assess the processes of continental growth throughout geological time.

Text

Wilson, M. 1989, Igneous Petrogenesis, A global tectonic approach., Unwin & Hyman.

GEOL312 METAMORPHIC PETROLOGY IOcp


Not to count for credit with GE0L303, GE0L306

HOUTS 6 Hours per week for one semester

Exmnination One 3 hour paper, c1ass assignments

82


Conlenl

Petrogenesis of metamorphic rocks; interpretation oftexwres of rocks fanned during prograde metamorphism, ductile shearing and accretion-subduction; processes involved in the production of grain shapes. intergranular and intragranular features.

Texts

Yardley. B.W.D. 1989, An introduction to Metamorphic Petrology, Longman.

Yardley, B.W.D., W.S. MacKenzie et al 1990. Atlas 0/ metamorphic rocks and their texlUTes , Longman.

Yardley, B.W.D., W.S. MacKenzie et all990, Inlroduction to Metamorphic Textures and Microstructures, Edward Arnold Australia

GEOL313 STRUCTURAL GEOLOGY AND GEOPHYSICS IOcp


Not to count forcredil with GEOL301, GEOL302.


Examination One 3 hour paper, class assignments

Conlenl

Structural Geology

Geometrical analysis of multiply -defonned terrains; ductile shear zones, kinematic indicators and analysis, strike slip faulting, thrust and extensional tectonics.

Exploration Geophysics

Geophysical techniques - their interpretation and application.

Text

Park, R.G. 1988, Foundations o/Structural Geology, 2nd edn, Blackie.

GEOL314 STRATIGRAPHIC METHODS IOcp


Not to count for credit with GEOL304, GEOL305


Examination One 3 hour paper, and class assignments

Content

Stratigraphic Methods

SLTatigraphic nomenclature; biostratigraphic zones; factors in lithostratigraphy; sLratigraphic breaks; stratigraphic facies changes; catastrophic stratigraphy versus unifonnitarianism; correlation; sLTatigraphic paJaeontology. Types of stratigraphic maps and sections; numerical anaJysis of data strings; numerical map analysis.

Micropalaeontology

Microfossils; their morphology, stratigraphiC dispersal and economic importance.

Geochronology and World Stratigraphy

Principles of age dating; regional geological patterns of selected provinces of the world.

SECTION FIVE

Texts Consult lecturer concerned.

GEOL3IS SEDIMENTOLOGY

Prerequisites GEOL212, GEOL213



Examination One three hour paper. class assignments

Content

IOcp

Lithologic associations in relation to the depositional facies of their ancient and recent environments off onnation with emphasis on the genetic connection between the geological setting of a depositional area and its sedimentary flll (basin analysis).

Texts

Reading, H.G. 1986, Sedimenlary environments and/acies ,2nd eOO, Blackwell Scientiflc Publications.

Walker, R.G. 1984, Facies Models, Geoscience Canada Reprint Series I, 2nd edn.

GEOL316 GEOLOGY OF FUELS




Examination One 3 hour paper, c1ass assignments

Conlenl

Coal Geology

IOcp

Origin. distribution, clasSification and economic potential of coal.

Petroleum Geology

Origin, source, migration, entrapment and distribution of petroleum and gas; the exploration and exploitation techniques of its detection, evaluation and recovery.

Texts ConSUlt lecturers concerned

GEOL317 RESOURCE AND EXPLORATION GEOLOGY IOcp


Not to count for credit with GE0L301, GEOL306



Contenl

This course presents fundamental criteria for the f<'nnation and characteristics of metallic ore deposits. An emphasis is placed on an understanding of ore-forming processes in magmatic hydrothermal and metamorphic settings. Laboratory study of material from world- class ore deposits complements the lecture course.

Texts

Evans. A.M. 1987, An Introduction to Ore Geology, 2nd edn, Blackwell.


Roberts, R.G. & Sheahan, P.A. 1988, Ore Deposit Models Geol.Ass.Canada.

GEOL3IS GEOLOGY FIELD COURSE


5cp

Hours 7 days fleldwork (February. week before Semester 1)


Content

A fleldcourse including core logging, section work, interpretation of data and basin analysis.

GEOL319 GEOLOGY FIELD COURSE


HOUTS 10 days fieldwork (July break)


Conlenl

5cp

Structural analysis 0 fa multiply -deformed structural/metamorphic terrain (Broken Hill Block). Evaluation of P-T -t histories in the terrain and integration with tectonic models.

Texts

Consult lecturers concerned

GEOL320 GEOLOGY OF QUATERNARY IOcp ENVIRONMENTS

Prerequisites GEOL213 or GEOG204



Conlent

This course will examine the historical basis for contemporary environmental change. The relation of present day environmental processes and resultant changes to the longer, Quaternary record will be examined critically. Topics covered include an overview of the general characteristics of the Pleistocene and Holocene, oceanic and terrestrial palaeoclimatic records, the fossil record and Pleistocene faunal extinctions. Quaternary dating methods, sea-level change and coastal evolution, glaciation, aridity, Malysis of Quaternary sediments, stratigraphic nomenclature and the archaeological record.

Texts Consult lecturer concerned

83

SECfION FIVE

Mathematics Subject Descriptions LEVEL 100 MATHEMATICS SEMESTER SUBJECTS

The usual route for study of Mathematics beyond first year - for example, to obtain a "Major in Mathematics" starts with MATHI02 in first semester, followed by MATHI03 in second semester. However, entry at this point requires an adequate level of knowledge and skill: The minimum level is a mark of at least 120 out of 150 in 3-unit Mathematics at the New South Wales H.S.C. examination.

Any student with less than this level of knowledge or skill has availableMATH111, followed by MATHI12. This combination allows entry to seven of the seventeen level-200 subjects in Mathematics. Such a student could take MA THI03 in alater year to meet the prerequisites for further mathematics subjects.

Note that MATHl11 is not appropriate for a student who has performed substantially above the minimum level for entry to MATHI02/103.

MATH111 MATHEMATICS 111

Prerequisite 2U mathematics at HSC level or equivalent.

Not to count for credit with MATHI0l.

IOcp

Hours 4 lecture Hours and 2 tutorial Hours per week for one semester. The subject is repealed in each semester.

Examination One 3 hour paper plus progressive assessment.

Content

Elementary algebra. trigonometry and geometry with applications. Calculus with applications of differentiation and integration. Newton's method. Trapezium and Simpson's Rules. Vector geometry, and its applications.

Texts

University of Newcastle 1993, Maliwmalics 111 TutorialNotes.

Stewart, J. 1991, Calculus, 2nd edn. Brooks/Cole.

(This book will also be a useful reference for MATH112, MATH201 and MATH203).

References

Ash, C. and Ash, R.B. 1987. TIu! Calculus Tutoring Book ,IEEE Press.

Dobson, Annette J. & Stokoe, Janet. 1986, Self-Paced 1ntroductory Matlu!matics 3rd edn, ANU Press.

MATH112 MATHEMATICS 112

Prerequisites MATHl11.

Not to count for credit with MATHI02.

10cp

Hours 4 lecture Hours and 2 tutorial Hours per week for one semester. The subject is repeated in each semester.

Examination One 3 hour paper plus progressive assessment.

Content

Teclmiques of integration with applications. Differential equations and applications. Calculus of several variables together with applications. Taylor Series expansions. Complex numbers and their applications. Matrix algebra Eigenvalues, eigenvectors.

84

MA TIlEMA TICS SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS

Texts

University of Newcastle 1993, TUlorial Notes for MATH 112.

Stewart. 1. 1991, Calculus, 2nd edn, Brooks!Cole.

(This book will also be a useful reference for MATH201 and MATH203).

References

Ash, C. and Ash, RB. 1987, The Calculus TUloring Book ,IEEE Press.

Stein, S.K. 1982, Calculus and Analytical Geometry, 3rd edn, McGraw-Hilt

MATHl02 MATHEMATICS 102 IOcp Prerequisites Either a performance of at least 120 out of 150 in 3 U Mathematics at the NSW HSC or equivalent or MATHl11.

Not to count for credit with MATH112.

Hours 4 lecture Hours and 2 tutorial Hours per week for one semester.


Content

Calculus of functions of a single variable. The Fundamental Theorem of Calculus. Taylor's series. Complex numbers. Differential equalions. An introduC1ion to the calculus OffWlCtiOns of two variables. Vectors. Matrix algebra. Eigenvalues, eigenvectors.

TexiS

University of Newcastle 1993, Tutorial Notesfor MATH1D2.

Edwards, c.H. & Penney. D.E. 1990. Calculus and Analytical Geometry 3rd edn, Prentice-Hall.

Advisory T exJ

Munro, G.P. 1991, Proofs & Problems in Calculus, 2nd edn, Carslaw.

References

Ayres, F. 1974. Calculus Schaum.

Anton, H. 1987. Elementary Linear Algebra, 5th edn, Wiley.

Farrand, S. & Poxton, N.J. 1984, Calculus Harcourt Brace Jovanovich.

Stein, S.K., 1982, CaLculus and Analytical Geometry, 3rd edn, McGraw-Hill.

Walters, FR.F.C. & Wehrhahn, K. 1989, Calculus 1, 2nd edn Carslaw.

MATHI03 MATHEMATICS 103 IOcp Prerequisites Either a performance of at least 120 out of 150 in 3 unit Mathematics at the NSW Higher School Certificate or "'luivalenlor MATHI02 or MATHIII and MATHII2.

Hours 4 lecture Hours and 2 tutorial Hours per week for one semester.


ConLent

An introduction to numerical mathematics and computing. Vector

SECTION FIVE

geometry and linear algebra: vectorspaces,linear maps. Analysis of the convergence of sequences and series. Power Series. Elementary Theorems of Mathematical Analysis.

Counting, probability, and an introduction to finite mathematical structures.

Text

University of Newcastle 1993, Tutorial notes/or MATH1D3.

Advisory TexJ

Munro, G.P. 1991, Proofs & Problems in Calculus, 2nd edn, Carslaw.

References

Binmore, K.G.1985, Mathematical Analysis, CUP.

Brisley, W. Notes for Linear Algebra Lecture notes in Mathematics, University of Newcastle, No.5.

or A Basis for Linear Algebra.

Chapman, C.RJ. 1973,lntroduction to Mathematical Analysis, Routledge & Kegan Paul.

Giles, J .RReaIAnalysis: An Introductory Course. Lecture notes in Mathematics, Univ.Newcastle, No.6.

Grimaldi, R.P. 1985, Discrete and Combinatorial Matiwmatics, Addison-Wesley.

LEVEL 200 MATHEMATICS SEMESTER SUBJECTS

MATH201 MULTIVARIABLE CALCULUS Scp

Prerequisite Both MATH111 and MATH112, or both MATHI02 and MATHI03, or MATHI02 and Permission of Head of Department.



Content

Partial derivatives, Vector operators, Taylor's Theorem, Line integrals,

Multipleandsurface integrals, Gauss, Green, Stokes' Theorems.

Text

University of Newcastle 1993, Mathematics /I Tutorial Noles.

Stewart, J. 1991, Calculus, 2nd edn ,Brooks/Cole.

or

Edwards, c.H. & Penney, D.E. 1990, Calculus and Analytical Geometry, 3rd edn, Prentice-Hall.

References

Adams, R.A. 1987, Calculus of Several Variables, Addison Wesley.

Curjel, C.R. 1990, Exercises in Multivarjable and Vector Calculus, McGraw-Hill.

Greenberg, M.D. 1988, Advanced Engineering MathemaJics Prentice-Hall.

Grossman, S.I. & Denick, W.R. 1988, Advanced Engineering Mathematics Harper & Row.

Kreyszig, E.1988.Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 6thedn,

MA 1HEMATICS SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS

paperback Wiley, earlier editions are acceptable.

Piskunov.N. 1981, Dif/erentialand Integral Calculus. Vol.Iand n, 2nd edn, Mir.

Spiegel,M.R.1974.Tlu!oryandProblemsofAdvancedCalcwlus , Schaum.

Widder, D.V. 1989. AdvancedCalcubu, Dover.

MA TH202 PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 1

Prerequisite MA TH201.

Corequisite MATH203.



ConLenl

Orthogonality. Sturm-Liouville systems and genemlisations, Series of Orthogonal functions, Fourier Series, Separation of variables, The classical partial differential equations (heat/ diffusion, wave, Laplace, Poisson).

Tal

University of Newcastle, 1993, MathemaJics 1/ Tutoruu Notes.

References

Broman, A. 1989. An Introduction to Partial Differential Equations Dover.

Churchill, R V. &Brown,J .W. 1978,F ourier SeriesandBoundary Value Problems McGraw-Hill.

Greenberg, M.D. 1988, Advanced Engineering Mathematics Prentice-Hall.

Grossman, 5.1. & Derrick, W.R. 1988, Advanced Engineering Mathemalics Harper & Row.

Kreyszig, E. 1988, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 6th edo. paperback Wiley, earlier editions are acceptable.

MATH203 ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 1 5<p

Prerequisite BothMATH111 andMATH1120rboth MA THI02 and MA 11-1103, or MATH102 and Permission of the Head of Department.



Content

Linear differential equations with constant coefficients, Linear differential equations - general case, Series solutions- special functions, Laplace transfoms, Applications.

Texis

University of Newcastle 1993, Mathematics 1/ Tutorial Notes.

Stewart, J. 1991, Calculus, 2nd edn, Brooks/Cole.

or

Edwards, C.H. & Penney, D.E. 1990, Calculus and AI141ytical Geometry, 3rd edn, Prentice-Hall.

85

SEcnONFIVE

References

Boyce, W.E. & Di Prima. R.C. 1986, Elementary Differential Equations and Boundary Value Problems Wiley.

Burghes, D. & Barrie, M. 1981. Modelling into Differential Equations Ellis---Horwood.

Grossman, 5.1. & Derrick. W.R. 1988, Advanced Engineering Mathemalics Harper & Row.

Hochstadt, H, DijferenJial Equations Dover.

Kreyszig, E. 1988,Advanced Enginuring MalhemaJics, 6th edn, paperback Wiley ,.earlier editions are acceptable.

Martin, W. T. & Reissner, Elementary DijJerenJial Equations Dover.

Sanchez, D.A., Allen, R.c. et a11988, DijferenJial Equations. 2nd edn, Addison Wesley.

MATH204 REAL ANALYSIS Scp

Prerequisite (MATHI02 and MATHI03) or (MATH111 and MATHI 12 and MATHI03).



Content

Study in an axiomatic way of the properties of the real number system and functions defined on the real numbers and on the Euclidean plane.

Properties of the real number system: the Supremum Axiom, completeness and compactness.

Convergence of sequences and series in the Euclidean plane.

Limits of functions and algebra of limits, continuity and algebra of continuous functions.

Properties of continuous functions: connectedness, compactness and unifonn continuity.

Properties of differentiable functions: Mean Value Theorems and Taylor polynomial approximation for functions on the real numbers and the Euclidean plane.

The theory of Riemann integration for functions on the real numbers, the study of class of integrable functions.

The Fundamental Theorem of Calculus for functions on the real numbers relating differential and integral calculus.

Text

Giles,J.R. RealAnalysis:an introductory course Lecture Notes in Mathematics. Univ.Newcastle, No.6.

References

Binmore, K. G. 1985, Mathematical Analysis CUP.

Clapham, C.R.J. 1973, Introduction to Mathematical Analysis Routledge & Kegan Paul.

Clark, C.W. 1982, Elementary Mathematical Analysis Wadsworth-Brooks.

Spivak, M. 1967, Calculus Benjamin.

86

MA lHEMA TICS SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS

MATH20S ANALYSIS OF METRIC SPACES 5cp

PrerequisiJe MA TH204.

HoUTS 2 Hours per week for one semester.

Examinalion One 2 hour paper.

Conlenl

Studyinan axiomatic way of the analysis of more abstract spaces: metric and normed linear spaces.

Convergence of sequences and series in Rn with Euclidean and other nanns.

Convergence of sequences and series in function spaces with uniform and integral norms, the three fundamental theorems on uniform convergence involving continuity, integration and differentiation and application to power series.

Completeness, closed ness and density in metric spaces;

Banach Fixed Point Theorem and its application to functions on the real line and to the solution of integral equations.

Local and global continuity of mappings on metric spaces and topological characterisations.

Sequential compactness and application in approximation theory.

Text

Giles, J.R. 1989,Inlroduction to the Analysis of Metric Spaces CUP.

References

Bartle, R.G. 1976. The Elemenls of Real Analysis Wiley.

Giles,J.R.ReaIAnalysis: An Introductory Course Lecture Notes in Mathematics, Univ.Newcastle, No.6.

Goldberg, R.R. 1964. Methods of Real Analysis, Ginn Blaisdel.

Simmons. G.F. 1963, Introduction to Topology and Modern Analysis, McGraw-HilI.

White, A.I. 1968, Real Analysis Addison-Wesley.

MATH206 COMPLEX ANALYSIS 1 Scp

Prerequisite Both MA THIll and MATH112orboth MATH1 02 and MATH103, or MATH102 and Permission of the Head of Department.




Conlenl

Complex numbers, Cartesian and polar fonns, geometry of the complex plane, solutions of polynomial equations. Complex functions, mapping theory, limits and continuity . Differentiation, the Cauchy-Riemann Theorem. Elementary functions, exponential,logarithmic,trigonometricandhyperbolicfunctions. Integration, the Cauchy-Goursat Theorem. Cauchy's integral formulae. Liouville's Theorem and the Fundamental Theorem of Algebra.

References

Churchill, R.V., Brown, I.W. etal.1984,Complex Variables and Applications McGraw-Hill.

SEcrION FIVE

Grove.E.A.&Ladas,G.I974,lntroductiontoComplexVariables , Houghton Mifflin.

Kreysig, E. 1979, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Wiley.

Levinson, N. & Redheffer, R.M. 1970, Complex Variables, Holden-Day.

O'Neill, P.V. 1983, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Wadsworth.

Spiegel, M.R. 1964, Theoryand Problems of Complex Variables , McGraw-Hill.

Tall, D.O. 1970, Functions of a Complex Variable I and fl. Routledge & Kegan Paul.

MATH207 COMPLEX ANALYSIS 2

Prerequisite MATH206 and MATHI03.



Content

Scp

Taylor and Laurent series, analytic continuation. Residue theory, evaluation of some rea] integrals and series, the Argument Principle and Rouche's Theorem, Conformal mapping and applications. Further examination of multivalued functions; branch cuts, Riemann surfaces.

References

Churchill, R.V., Brown,J.W. etal. 1984.Complex Variables and Applications, McGraw-Hill.

Grove, E.A. & Ladas, G. 1974.1nlroductionto Complex Variables. Houghton Mifflin.

Kreysig, E. 1979, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Wiley.

Levinson, N. & Redheffer, R.M. 1970, Complex Variables, Holden-Day.

O'Neill, P. V. 1983, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Wadsworth.

Spiegel, M.R. 1 %4, Theory and Problems of Complex Variables , McGraw-Hili.

Tall, D.O. 1970, Functions of a Complex Variable I and /[ , Routledge & Kegan Paul.

MATH209 ALGEBRA

Prerequisite MATH218.



Comen!

Scp

An introduction to algebraic structures. Groups, rings, algebras, fields. Applications.

References

Hillman, A.P. & Alexanderson,G.L. 1983,Ajirst uruiergraduate course in abstract algebra, Wadsworth.

Jones, A., Morris, S.A. et al1991, Abstract algebra aruifamous impossibilities Springer-Verla.

MA l1-1EMATICS SUBJECf DESCIUP110NS

MATHlIO GEOMETRY 1 Scp

Prerequisite (MATHI02 and MATHI03) or (MATHlll and MATH112 and MATHl03).


Examin4lion One 2 hour paper.

Content

An elementary approach, using models, touching Euclidean plane geometry, Hyperbolic plane geometry, Projective geometry, and their relationship to one another.

Text

Notes for Geometry, Mathematics Department, 1993.

References

Blumehtnal, L.M. 1970, Studies in Geometry, Freeman.

Eves, H. A. 1972, A Survey oj Geometry, Allyn & Bacon.

Gamer, L.E. 1981, An Outline of Projective Geometry, North Holland.

Greenberg, M.I. 1980, Euclidean and non-Euclidean Geometry, North Holland.

MATH2I1 GROUP THEORY Scp

Prerequisite (MATH102 and MATH103) or (MATHlll and MATH1l2and MATHI03).

HoUTS 2 Hours per week for one semester.


Con!enl

Groups, subgroups, isomorphism. Permutation groups, groups of linear transformations and matrices, isometries, sy mmetry groups of regular polygons and polyhedra. Cosets, Lagrange's theorem, normal subgroups, isomorphism theorems.

Text

Ledermann, W. 1976, Introduction to Group Theory Longman.

References

Baumslag. B. & Chandler, B. 1968, Group Theory, Schaum.

Budden, F.J. 1972, The Fascination of Groups CU.

Gardiner, C.F. 1980, A First Course in Group TMory Springer.

Herstein, LN. 1975, Topics in Algebra, 2nd edn ,Wiley.

Weyl, H. 1952, Symmetry Princeton.

MATH212 DISCRETE MATHEMATICS 5cp Prerequisites MATH102 or MATH103 or (MATHll1 and MATf1112).



Content

An introduction to various aspects of discrete mathematics: Graphs, set theory, relations and functions,logic, counting and recurrence equations.

87

SECTION FIVE

Tal Ross, K.A. & Wright, CR.B. 1988, Discrete MalMmalics, 2nd edn, Prentice-Hall.

References

Alagor. V.S. 1989, Fundamentals a/Computing, Prentice-Hall.

Grimaldi, R.P. 1985, Discrete and Combinatorial Malhi!masics • Addison~Wesley.

Kalmanson, K. 1986, An Introduction to Discrete Malhema1ics and its Applications Addison-Wesley.

Dierker, P.P. & Voxman, W.L. 1986, Discrete Mathematics, Harcourt Brace Jovanovich,.

MATH213 MATHEMATICAL MODELLING 5cp

Prerequisites (MA TH102 and MATHI03) or (MATHl11 and MATHl12).



Content

This topic is designed to introduce students to the idea of a mathematical model. Several realistic situations will be treated beginning with an analysis ofthenon-mathematical origin of the problem, the formulation of the mathematical model. solution of the mathematical problem and interpretation of the theoretical results. The use of computers is an integral part of this subject.

References

Andrews, J.G. & McClone, R.R. 1976, Mathematical Modelling Butterworth,.

Bender, E.A. 1978,An Introduction to Mathematical Modelling , Wiley,.

Clements, R.R. 1989, Matlumatical Modelling, CUP.

Cross, M. & Moscardini, A.O. 1985, Learning the Art of Matlumatical Modelling Ellis Horwood.

Dym, C.L. & Ivey. E.S. 1980, Principles of Matlumatical Modelling Academic.

Edwards, D. & Hamson, M. 1989, Guide to Mathematical Modelling, Macmillan.

Habennan, R. 1977, Mathematical Models, Prentice·Hall.

Lighthill, J. 1980, Newer Uses of Mathematics, Penguin.

Smith, J.M. 1971, Mathematical Ideas in Biology Cambridge.

Smith, J.M. 1974, Models in Ecology, Cambridge,.

MATH214 MECHANICS 5cp

Prerequisites (MATHI02 and MATHI03) or (MATHll1 and MATH1l2and MATHI03).



Content

Summary of vector algebra. Velocity and accelerations. Kinematics of a particle. Newton's Law of Motion. Damped and forced oscillations. Projectiles. Central forces. Inverse square

88

MA lliEMATICS SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS

law. The energy equation. Motion of a particle system. Conservation of linear momentum and of angular momentum. Motion with variable mass.

References

Charlton, F. 1963, Textbook of Dynamics Van Nostrand.

Goodman, L.E. 1963, Dynamics Blackie.

Marion, J.B. 1970, Classical Dy1lQmics Academic .

Meirovitch,L.I970,MethodsofAnalyticaIDynamics, McGrawHill.

(See also references for MATH 201, 202, 203).

MATH2I5 OPERATIONS RESEARCH 5cp

Prerequisites MATHI02 or MATH103 or (MATH1l1 and MATH112).


Examinalion One 2 hour paper.

Content

Operations research involves the application of quantitative methods and tools to the analysis of problems involving the operation of systems and its aim is to evaluate the consequences of certain decision choices and to improve the effectiveness ofthe system as a whole.

This subject will cover a number of areas of operations research which have proved successful in business, economics and defence. These include such topics as network analysis and linear programming.

References

Daellenbach, H.G. & George, J.A. 1978, Introduction to Operations Research Techniques, Allyn and Bacon.

Hillier, F.S. & Liebennan, G.J. 1980, Inlroduclion 10 Operations Research, 3rd edn, Holden-Day.

Taha, H.A. 1987, Operations Research, 4th edn, MacMillan.

Hastins, Kevin J. 1989, Inlroduction 10 tlu Matlumatics of Operations Research Marcel Dekker.

MATH216 NUMERICAL ANALYSIS 5cp

Prerequisites (MATHI02 and MATHI03) or (MATHl11 and MATHII2and MATHI03) or (MATHIII and MATHII2 and COMPIOI}.



Conlent

Sources of error in computation. Solution of a single nonlinear equation. Interpolation and the Lagrange interpolating polynomial. Finite differences and applications to interpolation. Numerical differentiation and integration including the trapezoidal rule, Simpson's rule and Gaussian integration fonnulae. Numerical solution of ordinary differential equations· Runge-Kutta and predictor-corrector methods. Numerical solution oflinearsystems of algebraic equations. Applications of numerical methods to applied mathematics, engineering and the sciences will be made throughout the course.

SECfION FIVE

Tal

Burden, R.L. & Faires, J.D. 1989,NumericaiAnalysis, 4th edn, Prindle, Weber & Schmidt.

References

Atkinson, K.E. 1984, An Introduction 10 Numerical Analysis Wiley. '

Balfour, A. & Marwick, D.H. 1986, Programming in Standard Fortran 77 Heinemann.

Cherney, W. & Kincaid, D. 1985, Numerical Matlumatics and Computing, 2nd edn, Brooks-Cole.

Cooper, D. & Clancy, M. 1985, Oh! Pascal! Wiley.

Etter, D.M. 1984 et. seq, Problem Solving with Structwed Fortran 77 Benjamin.

Etter, D.M. 1983, Structured Fortran 77 for Engineers and Scientists, Benjamin.

Ge~d,C.F. & Wheatly, P.O. 1984,AppliedNumericalAnalysis, Addison-Wesley.

University of Newcastle Computing Centre Handbookfor V AXI VMS.

University of Newcastle Computing Centre VAX·} J Fortran.

MATH217 LINEAR ALGEBRA I

Prerequisite MATHI02 or (MATH111 and MATHI12).




Content

Scp

Matrix representations. Eigenvalues and eigenvectors. Diagonalizalion. Inner product spaces. Difference and duf erential equations.

References

Anton, H. 1987, Elementary Linear Algebra, 5th edn, Wiley.

Bloom, D.M. 1979, Linear Algebra and Geometry ,Cambridge.

Brisley, W. A. 1973, Basisfor Linear Algebra Wiley.

Johnson, R. & Vinson, T. 1987, Elemenlary Linear Algebra, Harcourt Brace Jovanovich.

Lipschultz, S. 1974, Linear Algebra Schaum.

Roman, S. 1985, An Inlroduction 10 Linear Algebra Saunders.

Rorres, C. & Anton, H. 1979, Applications of Linear Algebra Wiley.

MATH2I8 LINEAR ALGEBRA 2 Scp

Prerequisite (MATH102 and MATH103) or (MATH111 and MATH1l2and MATHI03).




Content

V eclorspaces and subs paces, Linear Maps, Matrix representations.

MA lliEMATICS SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS

Eigenvalues and eigenvectors. Diagonalisation, Difference equations. Inner product spaces, Gram-Schmidt process. Orthogonal, unitary, hermitian and normal matrices.

References

Anton, H. 1987, Elementary LinMU Algebra, 5th edn, Wiley.

Bloom, n.M. 1979, Linear Algebra and Geometry Cambridge.

Bristey, W. 1973, A Basis for Linear Algebra Wiley.

Johnson, R. & Vinson, T. 1987, Ele1Mntary LinMU Alg~bra Harcourt Brace Jovanovich.

LipSChutz, S. 1974, Linear Algebra Schaum.

Roman, S. 1985, An Introduction 10 Linear Algebra Saunders.

Rorres, C. & Anton, H. 1979, Applications of Linear Algebra Wiley.

MATH301 LOGIC AND SET THEORY


MATH302 GENERAL TENSORS AND RELATIVITY


MATH303 VARIATIONAL METHODS

IOcp

lOcp

AND INTEGRAL EQUATIONS lOcp


MATH304 ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 2 lOcp

Prerequisites MATH201, MATH203, MATH204 and MATH2I8.



Content

(An essay: see note at the end of the listing for300 level subjects).

Existence and Uniqueness of solutions of rust order equations, vector fields, integral curves. Lie groups, infinitesimal transfonnations, invariant functions and path curves. Invariance of equations under a given group and reduction to quadratures. Construction of all equations which admit a given group. Se<:ond and higher order equations, reduction of order and integration.

References

Bluman, GW. & Cole, J.D. 1974, Similarity Methods for Differential Equations Springer.

Hill, J.M. 1982, Solutions of Differential equations by Means of One·parameter Groups Pitman.

MATH30S PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 2 lOcp

Prerequisites MATH20l, MATH202, MATH203 and MATH204.



89

SECTION FIVE

Content


Fim order equatioos: linear equations, Cauchy problems; general solutions; nonlinear equations; Cauchy' s method of characteristics; compatible systems of equatioos; complete integrals; the methods of Charpitand Jacobi. Higherorderequalions: linear equations with constant coefficients; reducible and irreducible equations; second order equations with variable coefficients; characteristics; hypeIbolic, parnholic and elliptic equations. Special meIhods: separation of variables; integral transforms; Green's function. Applications in mathematical physics where appropriate.

References

COlton,D.1988,ParliaIDifferentiaIEquations-anlntroduction Random House.

Courant, R. & Hilbert, D. 1966. Methods of Mathematical Physics Vol.1I Partial Differential Equations Interscience.

Epstein, B. 1962, Partial Differen/ial Equations- an inJroduction McGraw-Hill •.

Haack. W. & Wendland, W. 1972, Lectures on Partial and Phaffian DiJJerenlial Equations Pergamon,.

Smith, M.G. 1967, InJroduction to the Theory of Partial Differential Equations Van Nostrand.

Sneddon, I.N. 1986, Elements of Partial Differential Equations, McGraw-Hill.

MATH306 FLUID MECHANICS lOcp

Prerequisites MATH201, MATH203, MATH204 and MATH206.

Advisory PrelCorequisite MATH207.



Content

(An essay: see note at the end of the listing for300 level subjects)

Basicconcepts: continuum, pressure, viscosity. Derivation of the equations of motion for a real incompressible fluid; Poiseuille and Stokes' boundary layer flow. Dynamical similarity and the Reynolds number. Flow at high Reynolds number, ideal (nonviscous) fluid; simplification of the equations of motion; Bernoulli equations; the case of irrotational flow; Kelvin's circulation theorem. Investigation of simpleirrotationalinviscid flows; twodimensional flows; circulation; axisymmetric flow around a sphere; virtual mass. Generation of vorticity at solid boundaries; boundary layers and their growth in flows which are initially mutational.

References

Batchelor, G.K. 1967, An Introduction to Fluid Dynamics Cambridge.

Chirgwin, B.H. & Plumpton, C. 1967, Elementary Classical Hydrodynamics Pergamon.

Curle, N. & Davies, H.I. 1968, 1971, Modern Fluid Dynamics Vols I & II VanNostrand.

90

MA lHEMA TICS SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS

Goldstein, S. (ed) 1965,ModernDevelopments inFluidDynamics Vou I & II Dover.

Milne-Thompson, L.M. 1968, Theoretical Hydrodynamics Macmillan.

Panton, R. 1984,Incompressible Flow, Wiley.

Paterson, A.R. 1983, A First Course in Fluid Dynamics Cambridge.

Robertson,J.H.I965,HydrodynamicsinTheoryandApplicalion. Prentice-Hall.

MATH307 QUANTUM AND STATISTICAL MECHANICS lOcp

Prerequisites MATH201, MATH203 and MATH206.



Content

(An essay: seenoteat the end of the listing for300 level subjects).

Classical Lagrangian and Hamiltonian mechanics, Liouville theorem. Statistical Mechanics: basic postulate; microcanonical ensemble; equipartition; classical ideal gas; canonical ensemble; energy fluctuations; grand canonical ensemble; density fluctuations; quantum statistical mechanics; density matrix, ideal Bose gas; ideal Fermi gas; white dwarf stars; Bose-Einstein condensation; superconductivity.

Quantum mechanics: the wave-particle duality, concept of probability; development, solution and interpretation of Schrodinger's equations in one. two and three dimensions; degeneracy; Heisenberg uncertainty; molecular structure.

References

Croxton, C.A. 1975, Introductory Eigenphysics Wiley.

Fong. P. 1968, Elementary Quantum Mechanics AddisonWesley.

Huang, K. 1963, Statistical Mechanics, Wiley.

Landau, L.D.& Lifshitz, H.M. 1968, Statistical Physics

Pergamon,.

MATH308 GEOMETRY 2 lOcp

Prerequisites 20 credit points from 200 level Mathematics, including at least one of MATH209, 211, 218.



Content

(An essay: see note at the end of the listingfor300 level subjects).

Calculus on Rn: directional derivatives, curves tangent vectors, mappings, vector fields and integral curves.

Affine spaces: calculus on affme spaces, the geometry of curves and surfaces. Parallelism and covariant derivatives. Shape operators, Gaussian curvature.

Introduction to Riemannian manifolds.

SECTION FIVE

Reference

Thorpe, J.A. 1979. Elementary Topics in Differential Geometry Springer.

MATH309 COMBINATORICS


MA TlDIO FUNCTIONAL ANALYSIS


Hours 1 1/2 hours per week for full year


Content

lOcp

lOcp

(An essay: seenote at the end of the listing for300 level subjects.)

Nonned linear spaces, finite dimenSional spaces, iJUler product spaces. Linear mappings, continuity, topological and isometric isomorphisms. Dual spaces, the Hahn-Banach Theorem and reflexivity. Conjugate mappings, operators on Hilbert space, adjoint operators and projection operators.

Texis

Giles.J.R. 1987 ,Introduction to Analysis of Metric Spaces CUP.

Giles, J.R. 1988. Introduction to Analysis of Normed Linear Spaces Univ. Newcastle Lecture Notes.

References

Bachman, G. & Narici, L 1966. Functional Analysis Academic.

Banach, S. 1988, Tlu!orie des Operations Lineaires, 2nd edn. Chelsea.

Brown, A.L & Page, A 1970. Elements of Functional Analysis VanNostrand.

Jameson, G.J.O. 1974. T opologyandNormed Spaces, ChapmanHall.

Kolmogorov, A.N. & Fomin, S. V. 1957, Elements of the Theory of Functions and Functional Analysis VoU Grayloch.

Kreysig, E. 1978, Introductory Functional Analysis with Applications, Wiley.

Liustemik, LA. & Sobolev, UJ. 1961. Elements ofFunctt'onal Analysis Frederick Unger.

Simmons, G.F. 1963, Introduction to Topology and Modern Analysis, McGraw-Hill.

Taylor, A.E. and Lay, D.C. 1980, Introduction to Functional Analysis, 2nd edn, Wiley •.

Wilansky, A. 1964, Functional Analysis, Blaisdell.

Young, N. 1988, An inlroduction to Hilbert space CUP.

MATH311 MEASURE THEORY & INTEGRA nON


lOcp

MATH3I2 ALGEBRA lOcp

Prerequisites MATH218 and at least one of MATH209, MATH21D or MATH211.

MA lliEMA TICS SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS



Content

(An essay: see note at the end ofthelisting for300 level subjects).

In this topic the solution of polynomial equations and their relationships with classical geometrical problems such as duplication of the cube and trisection of angles will be studied. It will further examine the relations between the roots and coefficients of equations, relations which gave rise to Galois theory and the theory of extension fields. Why equations of degree 5 and higher cannot be solved by radicals will be investigated.

References

Birkhoff, G.D. & MacLane, S. A Survey of Modern Algebra Macmillan, 1953.

Edwards, H.M. Galois Theory Springer, 1984.

Herstein, LN. Topics in Algebra Wiley, 1975.

Kaplansky,I. Fields and Rings Chicago,I969.

Stewart, I. Galois Theory Chapman & Hall, 1973.

MATH3I3 NUMERICAL ANALYSIS (THEORY) lOcp

Prerequisites MATH201, MATH203, MATH204 and MATH218. Programming ability (high-level language) is assumed.



Conlent

(An essay: seenote at the end of the listing for300 level subjects).

Solution of linear systems of algebraic equations by direct and linear iterative methods; particular attention will be given to the influence of various types of errors on the numerical result, to the general theory of convergence of the latter class of methods and to the concept of "condition" of a system. Solution by both one step and multistep methods of initial value problems involving ordinary differential equations. Investigation of stability of linear marching schemes. Boundary value problems. Finite-difference (and finite-element methods) of solution of partial differential equations. If time pennits, other numerical analysis problems such as integration, solution of non-linear equations etc. will be treated.

Text

Burden, R.L. & Faires. J.D. 1989, NumericalAnalysis, 4th edn, Prindle,Weber & Schmidt.

References

AtJdnson. K.E. 1978, An Introduction to Numerical Analysis, Wiley.

Ames, W.F. 1969, Numerical Methodsfor Partial Differential Equations Nelson.

Cohen, A.M. et aI. 1973, Numerical Analysis, McGraw-Hill.

Conte.S.D. &deBoor,C.1980,ElementaryNumericaIAnalysis.

91

SECfION FIVE

3rd edn, McGraw.Hill.

Forsythe, G.E., Malcolm, M.A. et alI977, CompUler Metlwdsfor Mathematical Computations. Prentice-Hall.

Isaacson, E. & Keller, H.M.I966,AnalysisofNumerical Metlwds , Wiley.

Lambert, J.D. & Wait, R. 1973, Computational Methods in Ordinary Differential Equations. Wiley.

Mitchell, A.R. & Wait, R. 1977, The FiniJe Element Method in Partial Differential Equations, Wiley.

Pizer, S.M. & Wallace, V.L 1983, To Compute Numerically: Concepts and Strategies Little, Brown.

Smith. G.D. 1978. Numerical SolUlion of Partial Differemial Equations: Finite Difference Methods, Oxford.

MATH314 OPTIMIZATION

Prerequisites MATH201 and MATH218.

Hours 1 1{2 Hours per week for full year


Content

IOcp

(An essay: see noleat the end of the listing for300 level subjects).

Many situations in Economics, Engineering. Experimental and Pure Science are reducible to questions of Optimization. The course is introduced by considering some simple examples of this. The basic analysis and theory of convex sets and convex functions underlying optimization are then developed. The theory of linear programming, including Bland's anticycling rule and duality, is examined. Constrained nonlinear optimization in both the convex and the smooth case are developed from a common separation argument. Ekeland's variational principle, descent methods and the one dimensional Fibonacci search for unconstrained problems fonn the final section of the course.

Text

University of Newcastle 1990, Lecture Notes, "Optimization".

References

Greig, DM. 1980, Optimization Longman,

Hestenes, M.R. 1975. Optimization Theory: The Finite Dimensional Case Wiley.

Holmes, R.B. 1972, A Course on Optimization and Best Approximation Springer.

Luenberger, D.G. 1969, Optimization by Vector Space Methods , Wiley.

Luenberger, D.G. 1973, Introduction to Linear and Nonlinear Programming Addison-Wesley.

Ponstein, J. 1980, Approaches to the Theory of Optimization, Cambridge Univ.Press.

Roberts, R.W. & Vanberg, D.E. 1973, Convex Functions , Academic Press.

Werner, J. 1984, Optimization Theory and Application, Friedr. Vi.Sohn.

92

MA lHEMA TICS SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS

MATH315 MATHEMATICAL BIOLOGY IOcp

Prerequisites MATH201, MATH203 and MATH213.



Content


This subject will show theuse of mathematical models to advance the understanding of certain biological phenomena. A number of biological situations will be investigated and students will be expected to use both analytical and computational techniques to obtain results which can be compared with experimental findings.

References:

Edelstein-Keshet, L. 1987, Mathematical Models in Biology, Random-House.

Jones, D.S, & Sleeman, B.D. 1983, Differential Equations and Mathematical Biology Allen & Unwin.

Murray, J.D. 1989, Mathematical Biology, Springer.

Segel, L.A. 1984, Modeling Dynamic Phenomena in Molecular and Cellular Biology Cambridge.

MATH316 INDUSTRIAL MODELLING


MATH317 NUMBER THEORY


MATH318 TOPOLOGY

Prerequisites MATH2040rMATH205.

Hours 3 Hours per week in one semester.


Content

IOcp

IOcp

IOcp

(An essay: see note at theendofthelistingfor300level subjects).

General topology: continuous functions and open sets; topologies and topological spaces; compactness, connectedness and separation properties~ product spaces. Introduction to algebraic topology: homotopies, covering spaces and the fundamental group.

References

Brown, R.L. 1988, Topology. Ellis Horwood.

Christie, D.E. 1976,Basic Topology, Macmillan.

Mendelson, B. 1975,lntroductiontoTopology , 3rd edition Allyn & Bacon.


Notes on Mathematics Level 300 Essay Assignment

Students enrolled in Level 300 Mathematics semester subjects will be required to complete an essay in an approved topic chosen from the history or philosophy of Mathematics.

L

SECfION FIVE

The essay is arequirement forthe satisfactory completion of one ofthe level 300 mathematics subjects taken by a student normally in the Irrst semester of the student's 300 level program.

Two copies of the essay are to be submitted by the 10th week of the semester of which one will be returned to the student after assessment.

Subject provided by the Division of Quantitative Methods

MAQM214 QUANTITATIVE METHODS IOcp

Prerequisite INFOI0l and STATI 01.


Hours 4 Hours per week: for one semester.

Examination Progressive assessment based on tutorials and assignments plus a 2 hour final examination.

Content

The subject addresses the application of elementary quantitative techniques to decision making and optimisation in a business setting. Topicsiocludeaspectsofforecasting, machine scheduling, linear programming, decision theory, networks, critical path method and inventory control. Use will be made of appropriate computer packages.

Reference

Levin, Richard I. et al 1989, Quantitative ApproacMs to Managemenl ,7th edn, N. Y. McGraw·l-hll.

A list of subjects provided by the Division of Quantitative Methods to B.Ed courses in the Faculty of Education in 1993

The proposed new subject codes have MAQM as prefix. The previous code is given in parentheses.

These subjects are available only to Bachelor of Education students.

BEd (MA lHEMA TICS EDUCATION) SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS

B.Ed (Mathematics Education)

MAQMI35 MATHEMATICS lA (MAI35Q)

Hours 4 Hours per week for a year.

COnUnJ

20cp

Differential and integral calculus offunctions of a single variable; Applications of Calculus including mechanics,

MAQMI36 MATHEMATICS IB (MAI36Q)


Conten/

20cp

Algebra: binomial theorem, mathematical induction, complex numbers, matrix algebra Geometry: Euclidean and Analytic. Computing: an introduction to microcomputers.

MAQM235 MATHEMATICS IIA (MA235Q)

Prerequisite MAQM135.


Content

20cp

Calculus ofseveral variables, vector calculus. Taylor and Fourier series. An analysis of real numbers, sequences, series and functions.

MAQM236 MATHEMATICS lIB (MA236Q)


Content

IOcp

Vector spaces, linear dependence and independence. linear mappings, kernel and image, matrices. Linear programming, the Simplex Algorithm, Duality. Applications to transportation, assignment, flow and game theory.

MAQM237 MATHEMATICSIIC (MA237Q)


COnlent

IOcp

A study of spherical trigonometry andits application to navigation, together with the celestial sphere, sideraltimeand solar time. The development of problem solving skills and structured programming concepts associated with the implementation of computer based solutions to mathematical problems.

MAQM335 MATHEMATICS IlIA (MA335Q)

Prerequisite MAQM235.


Con/em

20cp

Real variables, differentiability, the mean value theorem, Riemann integration and U1e Fundamental theorem of theCalculus. Complex

93

SECTION FIVE BEd (pRlMAR Y EDUCATION AND EARLY CHILDHOOD) SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS

variables, Cauchy's theorem, power and Laurent series, singularities, residues and poles, confonnal mappings.

Linear Algebra, imler product spaces, eigenspaces, diagonalisation of a quadratic form and a variety of applications. Ordinary differential equations of the first degree. Solution by series. The methods of Frobenius, Bessell and Legendre.

MAQM336 MATHEMATICS II1B (MA336Q)

HOUTS 3 Hours per week for a year.

Con/em

15cp

Sets and classes of sets, sigma rings and sigma algebras construction of the rationals and reals. An introduction to mathematical logic. Elementary group theory. Transformation geometry and non-euclidean geometry.

MAQM337 MATHEMATICSIIIC (MA337Q)


Con/em

15cp

Probability distributions, sampling distributions, hypothesis testing. Topics in operations research including project scheduling, job sequencing, queueing theory, dynamic programming and decision theory. Computer applications to the above topics and to development in computer aided leaming.

MAQM435 MATHEMATICS IV A (MA435Q)

Available only to Bachelor of Education students.


Con/ent

IOcp

Combinatorics, block designs, finite geometries, latin squares, magic squares and Hadamard matrices. Groups, rings, ideals, integral domains and fields.

MAQM436 MATHEMATICS IVB (MA436Q)



Content

10cp

Number theory, prime numbers, congruences, Diophentine equations, Gaussian integers. The historical development of mathematics - selected topics.

MAQM437 MATHEMATICS IVC (MA437Q)



Content

10cp

Numerical Analysis, solution of systems of equations, numerical differentiation and integration, application to ordinary differential equations. Microcomputing using package software and programming to solve course- related problems.

94

B.Ed(Primary Education)

MAQMI46 FOUNDATION STUDIES IN (pRI36Q) ELEMENTARY MATHEMATICS IScp

Available only to Bachelor of Education students

HOUTS 3 Hours per week for a year

Content

This subject provides a background of mathematical content and skills needed by teachers of elementary mathematics. The content covers sets, elementary number theory, geometry, measurement and probability.

B.Ed (Early Childhood)

MAQMI47 MATHEMATICSIEC (ECI38Q)

Available only to Bachelor of Education students


Content

IOcp

This subject provides a background of mathematical content and skills needed by teachers in the Early Childhood field. Topics include astudy of elementary set theory ,natural numbers integers and rational numbers, non decimal systems, number patterns. elementary geometry, measurement and probability.

SECfION FIVE

Physics Subject Descriptions

PHYSIOI PHYSICS 101 lOcp

Assumed Knowledge HSC 2 unit Mathematics with aresu]t in the top 30% of the candidature or equivalent.

HOUTS 6 Hours per week: for one semester

Examination Progressive assessment during the semester and one three hour paper at the end of the semester

Conlem

This is an introductory course in physics concentrating primarily on the core topiCS of classical physics. The lecture course consists of three main strands:

(I) Mechanics

(2) Electromagnetism

(3) Waves, optics and thermal physics.

There will also be 3 hrs/week of laboratory and tutorial work.

Text

Serway & Faugtm 1989, College Physics, 2nd International eOO, ISBN 0-03-029798-2 Saunders College.

Reference

Gordon & Serway I989,Study Guide with Computer Exercises to Accompany College Physics, 2nd edn ISBN 0-03-023474-3 Saunders College.

PHYSI02 PHYSICS 102 10cp

Prerequisites PHYSIOl or Assumed knowledge of HSC 2 unit Physics or 4 unit Science (with a result in the top 50% of the candidature) and HSC 3 unit Mathematics (with a mark of at least 110/150) or MATHIOI.


Examination Progressive assessment during the semester, and one 3 hOUT paper at the end of the semester.

Contenl

A unifying theme of the lecture course will be 'The Earth in the Universe'.

The following topics will be studied

Gravity and satellite motion; cosmology; nuclear physics and its applications; heat and heat engines; the Earth as a heat engine; atomic physics, optical instruments, electronic devices, radiation detection and safety.

There will also be 3 Hours per week associated with laboratory and tutorial work.

Text

R.A. Serway, Physics for Scientists and Engineers, with modern physics,3rd Edn.Saunders College, 1990, ISBN 0-03-032409-2.

References

Study guide to accompany above text.

PHYSI03 PHYSICS 103 10cp

Prerequisite PHYSI02.

PHYSICS SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS


Examination Progressive assessment during the semester and one 3 hour paper at the end of the semester.

Content

Advanced mechanics, electromagnetism, atomic physics, waves, optics and thennal physics will be treated in a rigorous way, utilising calculus and stressing the unifying principles in the development of the physical concepts. There will also be a total of 3 Hours per week associated with laboratory and tutorials.

Texts

As for PHYSI02.

PHYS201 QUANTUM MECHANICS AND ELECTROMAGNETISM IOcp

Prerequisites Recommended entry is from PHYS 1 03 and MATH 1 03, but perfonnance to acceptable standard in PHYS 1 01 and PHYSI02 may substitute for PHYS103, and/or MATH1!1 and MATH112 may substitute for MATH103, with approval of the Head of Department.


Examination Progressive assessment during semester, and one 2 hour paper at end of semester.

Content

Basic principles of modem quantum mechanics, and electromagnetic theory. Laboratory, computational and tutorial work in these areas.

TeXIS

See the Physics 200 Notice Board.

References

To be advised.

I'HYS202 MECHANICS AND THERMAL PHYSICS 10cp

Prerequisites MATHI02 and PHYSI03 or PHYS101 and PHYSI02 with credits or better and the approval of the Head of Department.

Hours Up 10 6 Hours per week for one semester.

Examination Progressive assessment during semester and one 2 hour paper at end of semester.

Content

Thermal physics, advanced classical mechanics and an introduction to relativity theory.

Texts


References

To be advised.

PHYS203 SOLID STATE AND ATOMIC PHYSICS

Prerequisite PHYS201.

IOcp

95

SECI'ION FIVE

Hours Up to 6 Hours per week for one semester.

Examination Progressive assessment during semester and one 2 hour paper at end of semester

Content

Solid stale physics and applications, atomic physics and specttoscopy, optics and laser physics.

Texts


References

To be advised.

PHYS20S SCIENTIFIC MEASUREMENT PRINCIPLES, PROCESSES AND APPLICATIONS

Prerequisite PHYSI02.

IOcp

Hours Up to 6 Hours per week for one semester.

Examination Progressive assessment during semester and one 2 hour paper at end of semester.

Content

Introductory course in analog and digital instrumentation, signal processing principles and computer applications. Emphasis will be on laboratory and environmental applications.

This subject is recommended for students in all areas of science wishing to gain an understanding of the principles and applications of basic electronic instrumentation and computer techniques

Texts


References

To be advised.

PHYS301 MATHEMATICAL METHODS AND QUANTUM MECHANICS IOcp

Prerequisites PHYS201, MATH201 and MATH203.

Hours21ectures and 4 Hours laboratory/tutorial per week forone

semester.

Examination Examination(s) and assessment equivalent to 3

Hours examination.

ConJent

Mathematical methods. Quantum mechanics.

Texts and References

Refer to the Physics 300 Notice Board.

Students should retain their Physics 200 texts.

PHYS302 ELECTROMAGNETISM AND ELECTRONICS IOcp

Prerequisites PHYS201 and MATH201.

Hours2lectures and 4 Hours laboratory/tutorial perweekforone

semester.

Examination Exarnination(s) and assessment equivalent to 3

Hours examination.

96

PHYSICS SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS

Conlenl

Electromagnetism. Electronics.

Texis and References



PHYS303 ATOMIC, MOLECULAR AND SOLID STATE PHYSICS IOcp

Prerequisites PHYS203 and PHYS301.

Hours 2lectures and 4 Hours laboratory/tutorial perweekforone

semester.

Examination Examination(s) and assessment equivalent to 3

Hours examination.

Content

Atomic and molecular physics. Solid state physics.

TexJs and References

Refer 10 the Physics 300 notice board.


PHYS304 STATISTICAL PHYSICS AND RELATIVITY

Prerequisites PHYS202 and MATH201.

IOcp

HOUTS 2 lectures and 4 Hours laboratory/tutorial perweekforone

semester.

Examinalion Examinations(s) and assessment equivalent to 3

Hours examination.

Con/em

Statistical physics. Relativity.




PHYS30S NUCLEAR PHYSICS AND ADVANCED ELECTROMAGNETISM IOcp

Prerequisite PHYS302.

Hours2lectures and 4 Hours laboratory/tutorial per week for one

semester.

Examination Examination(s) and assessment equivalent to 3 Hours examination.

Content

Nuclear physics. Advanced Electromagnetism.




L

SECI'ION FIVE

Psychology Subject Descriptions

PSYCIOI PSYCHOLOGY INTRODUCTION I IOcp

Hours 5 hours per week for one semester (3 hours per week lectures, 2 hours per week laboratory)


Content

Three written reports. Laboratory work. Introductory Methodology and Statistics, Biological Foundations; Perception and Learning.

Texts

General.

Bootzin, R.R. et al. 1991, Psychology today. An introduction., 7thedn, McGraw-Hill.

For Methodology and Statistics

Howell, D.C. 1985, Fundamental statistics for the behavioural sciences., Duxbury Press.

Martin, D.W. 1991, Doing psychology experiments., 3rd edn,. Brooks/Cole.

Other texts to be advised.

PSYCI02 PSYCHOLOGY INTRODUCTION II IOcp

Prerequisite PSYCIOI

Hours 5 hours per week for one semester (3 hours per week lectures, 2 hours per week laboratory)


ContenJ

Three written reports. Laboratory work. Development, Cognition, Social Psychology.

Texts

General

Bootzin, R.R. et aI. 1991, Psychology today. An introduction., 7th eOO, McGraw-Hill.

Other texts to be advised.

PSYC201 FOUNDATIONS FOR PSYCHOLOGY IOcp

Prerequisite PSYCI02

Hours 2 hours lectures per week for one semester together with laboratory work.

Examination Students will be assessed by continuous assessment throughout the semester.

Conlenl

(i) a selection of topiCS in experimental design, parametric tests, introduction to analysis variance and related topics, and

ii) arangeoftopics aimedat elucidating the anatomy ,physiology and biochemistry of the brain. The unit will be accompanied by

(a) a tutorial series in which practical experience will be given in the application of statistical methods using computer-assisted statistical packages and

PSYCHOLOGY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS

(b) a laboratory component which will mainly deal with neuroanatomy.

Texts to be advised.

References To be advised.

PSYC202 BASIC PROCESSES

Prerequisite PSYC102

Corequisite PSYC20t

IOcp

HOUTS 2 hours lectures per week for one semester together with laboratory work.

Examination One 2 hour exam paper plus laboratory exercises.

ConlenJ

This subject will examine basic processes in Psychology such as perception, cognition, and learning. Both animal and human models may be considered.

The Cognition topiC will examine the experimental evidence supporting various models for human memory. Emphasis will be placed on applied aspects of cognition and memory especially in psychological dysfunction.

The Perception section will deal primarily with audition. The following topics will be covered; structure of the auditory system, SUbjective dimensions of sound, sound localisation, elementary aspects of speech perception.

The learning topic will explore ideas about the nature and mechanism of associative learning. The conditions under which learning occurs, the nature of the representations underlying learning will be described. The implications of these ideas forthe application ofleaming theory to issues such as drug tolerance and addiction will be considered.

Texts

Goldstein, H.B. 1984, Sensation & perception,. Belmont Cal.

Wadsworth. (or other general perception text dealing with audition).

References

Baddeley, A. 1983, Your memory: A user's guide., Penguin Books.

Baddeley, A. 1990,Humanmemory: Theory and practise. Hove, UK: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.

S1. James,J. & Schneider, W. 1991, MEL LAB: Experiments in perception, cognition, social psychology and human factors. Pittsburg, PA: Psychology Software Tools.

Schwartz, B. 1990. Psychology of learning and behaviour, 3rd cdn, New York, W.W. Norton.

PSYC203 DEVELOPMENTAL AND SOCIAL PROCESSES IOcp

Prerequisite PSYCI02

Corequisile PSYC201

Hours 2hours per weekforone semester together with laboratory work.


97

SECfION FIVE

Content

This subject will cover such topics as Social Cognition, Interpersonal Relationships and Developmental Themes.

The Social Cognition topic will continue from the study of social behaviours in PSY Cl 02 and will examine the cognitive processes underlying these behaviours, fOCUSsing on attributions f orevents and understanding of social situations, and attitude structures and change.

The Interpersonal Relationships topic win introduce basic processes in group dynamics.

The Cognitive Development topic will introduce students to the experimental study of developmental change in perception, memory, categorisation and problem solving.

TexI

Small, M. Y. 1990,. Cognitivedevelopment. San Diego, Harcourt, Brace & Jovanovich.

References To be advised.

PSYC204 INDIVIDUAL PROCESSES Ukp


Corequisite PSYC201

HoUTS 2hours perweekforone semester together with laboratory work.


Content

This subject examines the ways in which individuals differ through a study of such topics as models of personality. patterns of abnormal behaviour, methods of assessing these differences.

Abnormal Behaviour: !tis intended that this topic should introduce the student to some of the main approaches to the understanding of abnormal behaviour.

The student should be able to demonstrate understanding of (a) the historical background of mental illness (b) the basic diagnostic categories of psychiatric disorder ( c) approaches to mental health care.

Personality: The topic will examine a number of prominent approaches to personality theory, research, and assessment. Students will be expected to read assigned sections of the recommended text, and to complete simple exercises and present material in seminar sessions from time to time.

Text

Hall, C.S., & Lindzey, G. 1985, Imroduction to theories of personality. Wiley.

or

Potkay, C.R. & Allen, B.P. 1986, Personality lheory, research and application. Brooks/Cole.

References

Diagnoslic and statislical manual of mental disorders (DSM-IIIR).

(Available on short loan in the Library).

98


Students are encouraged to read widely in any chapters on abnormal behaviour in post 1987 texts.

PSYC301 ADVANCED FOUNDATIONS FOR PSYCHOLOGY IOcp

Prerequisites PSYC201 , PSYC202 and PSYC203


Examination One 3 hour exam paper.

Content

TIris course consists of the following topics:

(a) Experimental design principles in psychologyrangingfrom natura1istic observation to experimental and quasiexperimental designs. including single-case studies.

(b) Practical computation techniques for the analysis of experimental designs in psychological research, using MlNIT AB, BMDP and SPSSJX.

(c) Introduction to multivariate statistical techniques such as Multiple Linear Regression, Discriminant Analysis and Cluster Analysis.

(d) The MEL laboratory programs will be used to collect data in the tutorial periods.

References

Christensen, L.B. 1988, Experimenl(ll methodology. Boston: All yn & Bacon.

Keppel, G. & Zedeck, S. 1989. Data analysis for research designs. New York: W.H. Freeman & Co.

Howell, D.C. 1987, Statistical methods for psychology. Boston:Duxburg Press.

Winer, B.J .• Brown, D.R. & Michels, K.M. 1991,.Slatistical principles in experimenl(li design .• New York.: McGraw-Hill, Inc.

St. James, J. & Schneider, W. 1991, MEL LAB: Experiments in perception, cognition, social psychology and human factors. Pittsburgh,PA: Psychology Software Tools.

PSYC302 INDEPENDENT PROJECT IOcp Prerequisite PSYC201

Corequisite PSYC301

Hours 2 hours per week for the full year.

Examination Submission of a written report containing introduction, methods, results and discussion not more than unrty pages in length due early October.

Comem

The project consists of an experiment or series of experiments, surveys or tests designed to explore a hypothesis. Each student will be supervised by an academic staff member of the Department of Psychology. The list of research areas will be available at the beginning of the academic year. Students are advised that this subject is a prerequisite for entry into an Honours year in Psychology.

SECfION FIVE

References

Students are expected to read a wide ranee of cunent literature in the area chosen for the research project.

PSYC303 BASIC PROCESSES I IOcp Prerequisite PSYC201

Corequisile PSYC301


Examination One 2 hour exam paper and a laboratory report.

Content

TIris subject will examine basic processes in Psychology such as perception, cognition, memory and learning and the effects of early experience. Topics not covered in this subject will be dealt with in PSYC304. Both animal and human models will be considered. The subject will be supplemented with a laboratory program which will run over 4-5 weeks.

References

Baddeley, A. (1990). Human memory theory and practice. Erlbaum.

Frisby, J. (1979). Seeing. Oxford Univ. Press.

Semler, R & Blake, R. (1985), Perception. Knopf.

PSYC304 BASIC PROCESSES 2


Corequisite PSYC301


IOcp

Examination One 2 hour exam paper and an analytical report.

Conlent

This subject will extend the examination of basic processes covered in PSYC303. The subject will be complemented by either a laboratory or workshop progrnm run over about 4-5 weeks.

References

A series of readings will be recommended as the course progresses.

PSYC30S INDIVIDUAL PROCESSES


Corequisite PSYC301


lOcp

Examination One 2 hour exam paper, and a laboratory report.

Content

This subject will include cognitive development and two themes in social development. The subject will be complemented by a laboratory run over about 4-5 weeks.

References

Small, M.J. (1990). Cognitive development. San Diego: Harcourt, Brace and Jovanovich.

A series of readings will also be recommended as the course progresses.


PSYC306 ADVANCED SOCIAL PROCESSES IOcp Prerequisite PSYC201

Corequisite PSYC301


Examination By a combination of fonnal examination and practical workshop assignments.

Content

This unit uses the topic of motivation to provide an integration of a wide variety of explanatory models andresearchin psychology, and to put the subject into acontext of philosophical and theoretical development generally. A number of motivational models are studied (biolOgical, learned behaviour, cognition and social ecology) and applied to work and clinical problems. Problem based workshops will be integrated with the lectures and regular assignments will be based on these workshops.

References Readings and references will be available during the lecture series.

PSYC307 ADVANCED APPLIED TOPICS IN PSYCHOLOGY I IOcp


Corequisite PSYC301


Examination One 2 hour exam paper plus hurdle requirements.

Content

This unit will examine the theory underlying psychological test construction, and will introduce a range of psychological tests through practicum sessions in which training will be given intest administration and interpretation. The underlying basis of intetviewing as an assessment technique will also be studied and training will be given in inteIViewing techniques.

References

Anastasi. Psychological testing. MacMillan.

Keats. Skilled interviewing. ACER.

PSYC308 ADVANCED APPLIED TOPICS IN PSYCHOLOGY 2


Corequisile PSYC301


IOcp

Examination Assessment will be by a combination of formal examination, essays and written reports on the practical experience.

Comem

This course will examine a number of different areas in which Psychology is applied. It will examine behavioural health care with particular emphasis on community-based interventions in establishing behavioural change. In addition, topics in psychological pathology, psychotherapy and abnormal psychology will be covered. The unit will be complemented with some practical experience in applied settings.

99

SECTION FIVE

References

King,N. & Remenyi, A. (eds.) (1986).HealthcaJ'e: A beha-v;oural approach. Grone & Slratton.

Additional references will be made available throughout the course.

PSYC309 TOPICS IN NEURAL SCIENCE IOcp

PrerequisiJe PSYC201

Corequisite PSYC301


Examination One 2 - 3 hour examination and laboratory assessment.

Conlenl

A seriesoftopics at the cellular and molecular level will examine the structural and functional mechanisms responsible for neural processing, synaptic communication, the physiology of neuronal networks and examine how neurons and networks develop and function in the brain.

References

Thg following texts are available on short loan (and in the medical reading room) and in the Auchmuty Library. They can also be ordered from the bookshop. Additional readings will be made known throughout the course.

Kandel, E.R. 1985, Principles of neural science (2nd edn), Elsevier.

Alberts, B., Bray, D., et aI. 1989, Molecular biology of the cell (2nd edn). Garland.

Siegel, G., Agranoff, B., Albers, R., & Molinoff, P. 1989, Basic Neurochemistry, 4th edn, Raven Press.

Kuffler, S.W., Nicholls, J.G., & Martin, A.R., 1984, From Neuron to Brain, 2nd edn,Sinauer Ass. Pub.

PSYC401 PSYCHOLOGY HONOURS 401 (SEMINARS) 40cp

Prerequisile A completed BA or BSc or three complete years of aBA(Psych) or BSc(psych) including the subjects PSYCI 01 and PSYCI02, at least 40 credit points of Psychology at the 200 level including PSYC201 , and at least 60 credit points of Psychology at the 300 level including PSYC301 and PSYC302. Candidates must have obtained alleast a Credit grade or beuerin each offour 300level Psychology subject'including PSYC301 andPSYC302.

Hours 12 hours per week for the full year

Examination To be advised

Content

PSYC401 comprises half of the final Honours in Psychology. Full-time students enrol in PSYC402 as well. Part-time students complete PSYC401 in the first year and PSYC402in the second. PSYC40t consists of five seminar series, including one compulsory unit on theoretical issues in Psychology, a choice of two units in mathematical or physiological Psychology, and a choice of two units in applied or social Psychology. Each unit will include seminars at which altendance and participation is

100


compulsory, and will be assessed by essay, examination, oral presentation, or a combination. The exact topics of the seminars vary from year to year depending on staff availability. One seminar may bereplaced witha practical placement andassociated essay. There is some overlap with PSYC403.

Texts and References To be advised.

PSYC402 PSYCHOLOGY HONOURS 402 (THESIS) 40cp

PrerequisiJe A completed BA or BSc, or three complete years of a BA (psych) or BSc (Psych) including the subjects PSYCI 01 and PSYCI02, at least 40 credit points of Psychology at the 200 level including PSYC201 , and at least 60 credit points of Psychology at the 300 level including PSYC301 and PSYC302. Candidates must have obtained at least a Credit grade or better in each of four 300 level Psychology subjects including PSYC301 and PSYC302.

Corequisite PSYC401


Examination Thesis will be assessed independently by two members of the Department oththan the SupeIVisor.

Conlenl

PSYC402 comprises half of the final Honours in Psychology. Full-time students enrol in PSYC401 as well. Part-time students complete PSYC40t in the first year and PSYC402in the second. PSYC402 consists of the development, conduct, analysis, and reporting of a piece of original empirical research. The thesis is afonnal presentation of this research and must be in APA fonnat. There is a limit of fifty pages. Each student will be supeIVised by a member of the Psychology Department. Students are strongly advised to discuss potential projects with appropriate staff members well in advance. Involvement with external agencies must be through official departmental channels.


PSYC403 PSYCHOLOGY 403 30cp

Prerequisite Candidates must be enrolled for the BA (psych) or BSc (Psych) and must have completed the equivalent of three full time years of the degree, including passes or above in the subjects PSYCIOI and PSYCI02, at least 40 credit points of Psychology at the 200 level including PSYC201, and at least 60 credit points of Psychology at the 300 level including PSYC301.


Examinalion To be advised

ConJenJ

PSYC403 comprises one third of the final year of the BA (Psych) or BSc (Psych). Full-time students are expected to enrol in PSYC404 as well. Part-time students complete PSYC403 in the first year and PSYC404 in the second. PSYC403 consists of three seminar series, including one compulsory unit on theoretical issues in psychology, and a choice of two optional units. Each unit will include seminars at which attendance and participation is compulsory, and will be assessed by essay, examination, oral presentation, or a combination. The exact topics of the seminars

, r

L

SECTION FIVE

vary from year to year depending on staff availability. There is some overlap with PSYC401.

Texis and References To be advised.

PSYC404 PSYCHOLOGY 404 50cp

PrerequisiJe Candidates must be enrolled for the BA (psych) or BSe (psych) and must have completed the equivalent of three full time years of the degree, including passes or above in the subjects PSYCIOI and PSYCI02. alleas! 40 credit points of Psychology at the 200 level including PSYC201, and at least 60 credit points of Psychology at the 300 level including PSYC301.

Corequisite PSYC403


Examinalion Reports will be assessed by two or more members of the Department. Placement will be assessed on the basis of supeIVisor's report and a student essay.

Content

PSYC404 comprises two-thirds of the fmal year of the BA (Psych) orBSc (psych). Full-time students are expected to enrol in PSYC403 as well. Part-time students complete PSYC403 in the first year and PSYC404 in the second. PSYC404 consists of two equally-weighted sections a piece of original empirical research,andaplacement. Theresearch project will besupervised by a member of the Psychology Department and must be in an applied area. A report in APA fonnat, of approximately twenty five pages, is required. Candidates are strongly advised to discuss potential projects with appropriate staff members well in advance. The placement component involves introductory seminars on ethical and professional issues~ supervised experience in a community facility in the Newcastle area; and the submission of an essay relating the practical activities to psychological theory and technique.


COMPUTER SCIENCE SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS

Computer Science Subject Descriptions

COMPI0l COMPUTER SCIENCE 1

Entry to this subject by sludenls olMr than Ilwse enrolled in the BCompSc, BE(Computer Engineering) and BlnfSc degree progrtJm3 is limited by quota. See 1M Faculty Secretary lor delails.

Introduction to the following aspects of computer science: 1be design of algorithms. The theory of algorithms. How algorithms are executed as programs by acomputer. The functions of system software (compilers and operating systems). Applications of computers. Social issues raised by computers. An extensive introduction to programming in procedural and functional programming languages.

COMP201 ADVANCED DATA STRUCTURES 5cp

Basic data structures afl(hd~orithms are investigated. Topics covered will include elementary data structures, abstract data types, hashing. search trees, heaps, and sorting. If time permits, more advanced topics in analysis of algorithms will also be covered.

COMP202 COMPUTER ARCHITECTURE 5cp

This SUbject covers the fundamental principles of computer system organisation and architecture. Topicscovered will include instruction-set design, CPU components, microprogramming, memory hierarchy, memory management, lID, concurrency and pipelining and an introduction to parallel architectures. A selection of architecture case studies will also be discussed.

COMP203 ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE

The course isdivided into two sections. The first section provides an introduction to computer organisation and assembly language programming. Topics covered include data representation, computer structures, registers, addressing modes, instruction sets, subroutines and the use of stacks. The second section of the course is an introduction to operating system principles. Topics covered include process management synchronisation and resource allocation.

COMP204 PROGRAMMING LANGUAGE 5cp SEMANTICS

Examination of the major concepts which underlie modem programming languages. A variety of programming styles will be compared, including imperative, object-oriented, functional, and logic programming. Representative languages will be introduced to iIlustrate the concepts behind each style. Programming design issues such as data encapsulation, inC onnation hiding, and inheritance will also be studied. Languages studied chosen from C, C++. Lisp, Modula-2, Pascal, Prolog, Scheme, Smalltalk:, Ada.

COMP205 SYSTEM PROGRAMMING Scp

Systems programming for those already proficient in Pascal. Elementary Unix system calls and interfaces to other languages such as Pascal and Assembly Language. Use of UNIX software system tools such as "make", "lint" and "indent".

10)

SECTION FIVE

COMPl06 THEORY OF COMPUTATION Scp

Anintroductioototheoreticalcomputerscience,coveringmaterial in the areas of formal languages, automata theory and computability.

COMPl12 INTRODUCTION TO Scp PROGRAMMING

This subject is not available to candidates for 1M Bachelor of Computer Science degree, or 10 students who have passed or been exemptedjromCOMPlOl.

An introduction to structured programming and the design of algorithms using a procedural language.

COMPl41 COGNITIVE SCIENCE IOcp

An interdisciplinary approach to the examination of models and metaphors of mind, language, knowledge and perception used by various disciplines and the potential applications of those models and metaphors by artificial intelligence researchers, computer scientists and engineers.

COMPl99 PROJECT Scp

A project in computer science for students enrolled in the Diploma of Computer Science program

COMPJOI COMPILER DESIGN IOcp

Introduction tothe theory of grammars. Lexicalanalysers, parsing techniques, object code generation. Global and peephole optimisation. Routine support, error management. Scanner and parser generators.

COMPJ02 ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE IOcp

An introductory oveIView to Artificial Intelligence, covering some or all of the following topics: history of AI; game playing; knowledge representation; search techniques; natural language processing; expert systems; automatic deduction; theorem proving; computer vision; computer learning; philosophical, psychological, and social issues.

COMPJOJ COMPUTER NETWORKS IOcp

An introduction to data communication networks. Topics include data transmission, transmission media, network protocols, ISOI OSI, public data networks, local area networks and distributed systems.

COMPJ04 DATABASE DESIGN IOcp

A basic introduction to database systems, with particularemphasis on relational database systems. Topics covered will include: basic concepts and terminology, types of systems (hierarchic, relational, network, inverted list), data design, relational theory, relational algebra, relational calculus, data integrity/recovery, security, concurrency, distributed systems.

COMPJOS ALGORITHM DESIGN AND ANALYSIS

IOcp

Important methods of algorithm design are covered in this subject, including the divide-and-conquer paradigm, dynamic

102

COMPUTER SCIENCE SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS

programming and greedy algorithms. The analysis of the perfonnance and the correctness of algorithms is emphasised .. Fundamental graph algorithms are also studied, including minimum spanning trees, and shortest paths. A selection oftopics from algorithms for parallel computers. computational geometry. string matching and sorting networks are also covered, as time permits.

COMPJ06 COMPUTER GRAPHICS IOcp

This subject will cover advanced computer graphics topics with relevant mathematical and programming techniques and an overview of graphics hardware design. Topics include: geometrical transformations; 3 D modelling and object hierarchy; standards - OKS, PHIOS; raster algorithms; antialiasing; region filling; CUIVes and patches, hidden surface removal algorithms; shading and texture mapping; diffuse and specular reflection; colour modelling; growth models; fractals and particle systems; animation techniques; graphics hardware architectures.

COMPJ07 SOFTWARE ENGINEERING IOcp PRINCIPLES

The subject comprises lectures in first semester plus a major assignment in second semester. After a brief explanation of the nature and life-cycle of large software systems, the software crisis which they have created, and the desirable properties of well-designed systems, the lectures explore the nature of stable systems in the natural world and in engineering and consider how humans think about, remember and create complex systems. This leads to the re-evaluation ofthe principles and techniques used in the construction of major software systems, offering new insights into the concepts of modularity and hierarchical structure.

COMPJ08 OPERATING SYSTEMS IOcp

An introduction to operating system structure and design. Topics include: advanced synchronisation techniques, deadlock detection, memory management including virtual storage techniques, multiprocessing and file systems. The emphasis will be on practical operating systems, and where possible reference will be made to existing systems currently in use.

COMPJ91 SPECIAL TOPIC I IOcp

A topic of contemporary relevance in computer science.

SECfION FIVE

Information Science Subject Description

INFOIOI INTRODUCTION TO INFORMATION SYSTEMS

Hours 3 Lecture hours and two tutorial hours

Examination To be advised

Content

IOcp

Of all the innovations over the last 10-15 years in the public and private sectors, the computerisalion of infonnation systems has arguably had the greatest impact on the organisation and penonnance of work. The computerisalion of such systems began on large and expensive mainframe computers and then moved to smaller and less powerful mini-computers. Today, many comprehensive infonnation systems are available on desktop personal computers. These so-called microcomputers can be found in all organisations irrespective of size, and in large organisations co-exist within the mainframe environment via data communication networks.

Microcomputers are used very differently to the more powerful mainframe and mini-computers. Although in large corporations transaction processing and day-to-day operations are still the domain of the larger computers, micros are becoming increasingl y used in such corporations as aids to decision-making for the tactical and strategic needs of lower, middle and upper management. Small organisations often rely totally on microcomputers for all aspects of their operations. The power of microcomputers is increasing exponentiaU y while their purchase price is decreasing in real tenns. Areas such as retailing, manufacturing, engineering and financial services have experienced enonnous change underthe impact of microcomputer technology.

Computers have made it possible to store and retrieve massive amounts of data, the 'information age' is now a reality. This course introduces the skills and concepts needed to fully exploit the power of computers.

After completion of the subject, students will understand how and why organisations build and use infonnation systems, will be able to document information flow through particular systems, and will be able to use the microcomputer as a personal support tool.

The course provides a solid grounding in computers and their use, which today is important for aU students, irrespective of the discipline which they are studying.

Course Components

INFOlOl comprises four major components

1 Microcomputers as Personal Support Tools (MPST)

2 Information Systems (IS)

3 Computers and the Law (CTL)

4 Behavioural Aspects of Wonnation Systems (BAIS)

Text To be advised

PHILOSOPHY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS

Philosophy Subject Description

PHlL207 SCIENTIFIC KNOWLEDGE AND SCIENTIFIC METHOD IOcp

Prerequisiles For PHIL207 either PHiLIOI or 40 cp in any subjects already passed. For PfDL307, 30 cp at PIDL200 level.

Hours 3 hours per week for one semester and 1 tutorial hour.

Examin4lion Assessment by assignments to be submiUedduring semester and essay to be submitted at the end of semester

Content

What is the logical structure of scientific method? Is it justified? How do theory and method interact in laboralory practice? How is scientific knowledge justified? Is science a unique form of knowledge? What roles, if any, do values play in the construction of scientific knowledge?

An important part of a scientific education is gaining a critical understanding of the nature of scientific method and scientific reasoning. Tltiscourse will introduce studentstoscientificmethod and reasoning by examining several key episodes in the development of science from both a historical and a critical perspective. Case studies typically include the Copernican Revolution in astronomy, the transition from Aristotelean to Galilean-Newtonian science and the Mendelian-Darwinian Revolution. Students will be critically introduced to deductive. inductive and probabilistic reasoning, to the use of models and idealisalions in science and to the complex relations between theory and experiment. (Note: The basic presentation of material will be in elementary theoretical terms and a background in mathematics or physics will not be required. Subsequently. individual students may follow the case studies al amathematical and theoretical depth appropriate to their training. Students with a non-science background will be encouraged to pursue more philosophical issues.)

Texts

Chalmers, A.F. What is this Thing Called Science? Uni of Qld Press, 1976

Clendirmen, F.J. Perspectives of Scientific Explanation

References

Feyerabend, P.K. Against Method Verso, London, 1978

Giere, R.N. Understanding Scienlific Reasoning Holt, Reinhart and Winston, New York, 1984

Toulmin, S., Goodfield, J. The Fabric of lhe Heavens Pelican Books, 1%3

Toulmin, S. and Goodfield, J. The Architecture of Malter Pelican Books, 1965

103

SEctIoN FIVE

Statistics Subject Descriptions

STATIOI INTRODUCTORY STATISTICS IOcp

Not to count for credit with STATI03.

Prerequisites 'This course does not assume knowledge of calculus

or matrix algebra

HOUTS 3 lecture Hours, I laboratory hour and I tutorial hour per week. The course is offered in Semester I and Semester 2

PW'pose To introduce students to Ute principles of study design, data analysis and interpretation; Ute statistical computing program MINIT AB will be used extensively

Content Study design, including surveys and controlled experiments. Sampling and randomization. Scales of measurement. Descriptive and exploratory data analysis. Probability. Statistical inference: sampling distributions, confidence intervals and hypo~esiS t~sts for means and proportions. Correlation and regresSlon. Time series analysis. Chi·square tests for frequency tables.

Text

Moore, 0.5. & McCabe, G.P.

Introduction to the Practice of Statistics Freeman, 1989

References Freedman, D., Pisani, R., et al. Statistics 2nd Edn Norton, 1991

Staudte, R. Seeing, Through Statistics Prentice-Hall, 1990

Ryan, B.F., Joiner, B.L. et al MINrrAB Handbook 2nd edn

Duxbury. 1985

Miller, R.B. MINrrAB Handbookfor Businl!ssand Economics. PWS-Kent, Boston, 1988)

Wonnacott, T.H, & Wonnacott, R.J. Introductory Statistics for Business and Economics 4th edn Wiley. 1990

STATI03 INTRODUCTORY MATHEMATICAL STATISTICS IOcp

Not to count for credit with STA not. Adllisory Prerequisite or corequisites MA THI 02 or MA THI 03

HoW's 3 lecture hours, 1 laboratory hour and 1 tutorial hour per

week for one semester.

PW'pose To introduce more mathematically interested students to probability and statistical inference, including th~ P?nciples of study design, data anal ysis and interpretation of stabsbcal results.

Contenl

Scales of measurement; summarising data

Probability laws; condiLional probability

Probability distributions and sample statistics

The centra11imit theorem and applications

Study design; surveys and randomised experiments

Confidence intervals and hypothesis tests

Correlation and regression; least squares

Interences from contingency tables.

104

STATISTICS SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS

Text Freund,J.E. &Simon,G.A. 1992.ModernElemenlaryStatistics,

(8th edn), Prentice-Hall.

References Bhattachanya, A.K. & Johnson, R.1977 ,Statistics,Principles&

Methods. Wiley.

Freedman,D., Pisani, R. et al, 1991 Statistics 2nd edn, Norton.

Meyer, P.L. 1977 Introductory Probability and Statistical Applications, 2nd edn, Addison-Wesley.

STATlOI MATHEMATICAL STATISTICS IOcp

Prerequisites Either MA TH103 or STAT1 01 and MA THI12 (or a level of mathematics equivalent to MATHI12)

HoW's3 lecture Hours and 1 laboratory!tutorial hourperweek for

one semester

Content Random variables, probability, density and distribution functions, expectation. Likelihood, point and interval estimation. Tests of

significance.

TexJ Hogg. R.V. & Tams, EA. 1988, Probability and Statistical

Inferences, Macmillan.

Reference Kalbfleisch, J.G. 1985, Probability and Statistical Inference Volumes I and II, 2nd edn Springer.

Larsen, R.I. and Marx, M.L. 1986, An Introduction to Mathematical Statistics and its Applications, 2nd edn, Prentice

Hall.

STAT202 REGRESSION ANALYSIS IOcp

Prerequisites STATIOl or STATIO 1 and MATH112 (or

equivalent)

HoW's 2 lecture Hours. 1 laboratory and 1 tutorial hour per week

for one semester

Conlent This course covers the practical and Uteoretical aspects of multiple regression analysis, including the assumptions underlying ~ormal linear models, use of matrix notation, prediction and confidence intervals, stepwise methods,and examination of the adequacy of models. The statistical computer packages MINIT AB and SAS

are used.

Text Neter, I. , Wasserman W, and Kutner. M.H. 1990,AppliedLinear Statistical Models, 3rd edn, Irwin.

References Bowerman, B.L.. O'Connell, R.T. et al1986, Linear statistical models. an applied approach, Duxbury.

Draper, N.R. and Smith, H. 1981, Applied Regression Analysis,

Wiley.

Ryan, B.F., Joiner, B.L. and Ryan. T.A. 1985, MINlTAB Handbook, 2nd edn, Duxbury.

J

,

SECTION FIVE

SAS Institute Inc. 1985. SAS Introductory Guide, 3rd edn, SAS Inst, Cary NC.

Weisberg, S. 1985, Applied Linear Regression, 2nd edn, Wiley.

STAT203 QUEUES & SIMULATION 5cp

Prerequisite MA TH112 or equiValent

For the BSc degree STA T204 would also have to be taken. This course covers topiCS specifically required for Computer Science but is also relevant for Statistics and other disciplines.

HoW's 2lecture/tutorial Hours per week for one semester

Content

Queues, random number generation, Poisson processes, simulation using MINITAB.

Text

Ross, S.M. 1991,A course in simulation MacMillan.

References

Morgan, B.I.T. 1984, Elements of Simulation, Chapman and Hall.

Stochastic Processes, Wiley.

STAT204 NON-PARAMETRIC STATISTICS 5cp

For theB.Sc. degree STATI03 would also have to be taken.

Prerequisites STAT201 or STATI01 and MATH112 (or equivalent)

HoW's 2lecture/1aboratory Hours per week for one semester

Content

Methods foranal ysing categorical and ranked data Randomization tests.

References

Sprent, P. 1989. AppJied nonparametric statistical methods, Chapman and Hall.

STATl05 ENGINEERING STATISTICS 5cp

Credit cannot be obtained for both STATZOI and STATZ05.

PrerequisiLe MATH112 or MATHI02. This subject is mainly taken by students in Mechanical or Industrial Engineering but is also available to other students

HoW's 21ecture/laboralory Hours per week for one semester

Content

Basic probability theory and principles of statistical inference. Distributions. Error propagation. Quality controL

References

Chatfield, C. 1983, Statistics/or Technology, 3rd edn, Chapman and Hall.

Guttman, I.. Wilks, S.S. and Hunter 1.5. 1982, Introductory Engineering Statistics, 3rd edn, Wiley.

Hogg, R.V. and Ledolter, I. 1987, Engineering Statistics, MaCmillan.


STAT301 STATISTICAL INFERENCE IOcp

PrerequisiJes MalhemaJicalStaJistics (STA T201 )andMA TH201 (or a level of mathematics equivalent to MATH201, i.e. multivariable calculus).


Content

Statistical inference is the drawing of conclusions from data. The course covers likelihood-based estimation, other methods of point and interval estimation,hypothesis testing and introductory Bayesian inference.

References

Larson, H.I. 1982, Introduction 10 Probability Theory and Statislicallnference, 3rd edn, Wiley.

Hogg, R.V. and Craig, A. T. 1989,Inlroduction to Matmmatical Statistics, 4th edn, MacMillan.

Silvey, S.D. 1978, Statistical Inference, Otapman and Hall.

Press, S.I. 1989, Bayesian Statistics. Wiley Interscience.

STAT302 STUDY DESIGN IOcp

Prerequisites Mathematical Statistics (ST A T20 I) and Regression Analysis (STA TI02).


Contenl

This course contrasts two methods for collecting and analysing data: experimental studies and non-experimental studies including surveys. The principles of experimental design are illustrated by studying completely randomised designs, randomised block designs and factorial designs. For surveys the topics include: simple random sampling, stratified and cluster sampling, ratio and regression estimators. Class projects are used to illustrate practical problems and the statistical packages BMDP and SAS are used to carry out analyses.

References

Barnett, V. 1986, EJemenlS of sampling theory, Hodder and Stoughton.

Cochran, W.G. 1977, Sampling Techniques, 3rd edn, Wiley.

Neter,I .• Wassennan, W. etal. 1990, Applied Linear Statistical Models, 3rd edn, Irwin.

Cochran. W.G. and Cox. G.M. 1964, Experimenlal Designs, Wiley.

Box, G.E.P .• Hunter, W.G. et al. 1978.Statisticsfor Experimenters: an introduction to design, data analysis and model building , Wiley.

STATJ03 GENERALIZED LINEAR MODELS IOcp

Prerequisite MathematicalStatistics (STA T201) and Regression Analysis (ST A T202). In addition itis strongly recommended that students have passed Statistical Inference (STA n01).


Content

The course covers the theory of generalized linear models and illustrates the ways in which methods for analysing continuous.

!O5

SECTION FIVE

binary. and categorical data fit into this framework. Topics include the exponential family of distributions, maximum likelihood estimation, sampling distributions for goodness-of -fit statistics, linear models for continuous data (regression and analysis of variance), logistic regression. and log-linear models. Students will implement these methods using various computer packages, including GUM.

Texl

Dobson, A.J. 1990, An Introduction to Generalized Linear Modelling, Chapman & HaIl

References

McCullagh. P. and Neider J.A. 1989, Generalized Linear Models, 2nd edn, Chapman & Hall.

Aitkin, M. et al. 1989, Statistical Modelling in GUM, Oxford Science Publications.

Healy. M.J.R. 1988, GUM: an introduction, Clarendon.

ST AT304 TIME SERIES ANALYSIS IOcp

Prerequisite Malhemalical Statistics (ST A T201 land Regression Analysis (ST A T202). In addition it is strongly recommended that students have passed Statistical Inference (STA 1'301).


Content

This course is about the theory and practice of time series analysis - the analysis of data collected at regular intervals in time (or space). Topics covered include: stationary processes, ARMA models, models for periodic phenomena, analysis using MINIT AB, SAS and other time series packages.

Tex'

Cryer, J.D. 1986, Time Series Analysis, Duxbury Press.

References

Box, G.E.P. and Jenkins, G.M. 1970, Time Series Analysis: Forecasting and Control, Holden Day.

Fuller, W.A. 1976,/ntroductionloSlalislicalTimeSeries, Wiley.

Newton, H.I. 1988, T1MESLAB, A Time Series Analysis Laboratory, Wadsworth & Brooks/Cole.

STAT310 TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT lOcp

Prerequisites MNGT111 and subjects at Level 200 totalling 40 credit points chosen from subjects offered by the Departments of Economics, Management and/or Statistics.

Hours 2 lecture hours per week.

Content

Total Quality Management (TQM) is an all embracing management and employee involvement philosophy directed towards continuous improvement in the production of goods and services. Students who complete this course will learn to understand the fundamental principles of Total Quality Management (TQM), choose appropriate statistical techniques for improving processes and write reports to management describing processes and recommending ways to improve them.

106


Specific topics covered include the Deming philosophy, understanding variability through statistical thinking, qUality implementation matrices, qUality function deployment, the seven tools of quality control, quality improvement teams, the POCA cycle, standards, the role of management, basic statistical methods and control charts.

Texts To be advised.

b

SECTION SIX

SOME RECOMMENDED PROGRAMS

Advisory Information Only The choice of subjects now offered by Ute Faculty of Science and Mathematics has expanded morethan two-fold with the advent of semesterisation. In order to provide some guidance to students, each Department has provided one or more possible degree patterns which would lead to a suitable professional qualification in their discipline. The patterns are not prescriptive. except in so far as they meet the requirements of the various degree rules. Students may vary their selection in confonnity with degree rules, and prerequisite and corequisite requirements as detailed in the semester subject tables. All degree courses must aggregate to 240 credit points or 320 points for the four year Bachelor of Science (psychology) degree.

All semester subjects are identified by a code which includes up to four leUers representing the department offering the subject, followed by three numbers, the first of which signifies the level (100, 200, 300, 4(0) at which the subject is being presented.

The following programs have been set out as recommendations for inclusion in the first, second and third calendar years of a pass degree. Some programs include a separate postgraduate fourth year for the Honours degree.

AVIATION Students with Commercial Pilot and Airline Transport Licence will berequired to enrol in all SUbjects, but will be exempted from any sections which they may have completed to the University standard. These exemptions will be decided in consultation with Utelecturer concerned, who may request afonn of assessment on interview. The course is available only by attendance on campus.

Students are advised to consult the Departmental Noticeboard and liaise with the Head of the Department concerning complicated COurse program enquiries.

BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES Students wishing to study Biological Sciences are advised to develop capacities in a broad range of the basic sciences, as well as in the Biological Sciences. Additionally, students' interests can change during their University training, and it is advisable to undertake a first-year program which could lead in many directions, depending upon individual experiences and interests developed during the first year at University. Students intending to major in Biology should consider Program A. Those wishing to majorin Biology and another discipline might elect to complete Programs B or C.

Biological Sciences - Program A

Year 1

BIOLIOI, BIOLI02, CHEMIOI, CHEMI02 and either MATHSl11/112 or MATHSI02/103, plus 2 other subjects from Level 100. (For Environmental Biology select GE£XJ101 and GEOGI02).

Years 2 &: 3

The table below indicates the Biological Science subjects which should be studied to enable students to develop expertise in particular specialised areas. The indicated subjects are the minimum which should be studied. Additional subjects in Biological Sciences or other disciplines must be taken to satisfy subject requirements for the degree. It should benoted that not all 300 level Biological Science subjects will be offered in the one year. Students wishing to do specific subjects should check when they are scheduled before enrolling in their second year.

Year 4

BIOlAOI and BIOL402

107

SECTION SIX

Area of Biology

Animal Physiology

Animal Science

Biochemistry

Cell & Molecular Biology

Developmental Biology

Environmental Biology

Genetics

Immunology

Molecular Biology

Plant Physiology

Plant Molecular Biology

Biological Sciences SUbjects

BIOL201, 202, 204, 205, 301, 302,305,312.

BIOL20I, 202, 204, 205, 207, 301,302,305,312.

BIOL20I, 202, 204, 205, 301, 302,305,307,309,310.

BIOL20I, 204, 205, 301, 305, 307,309,310.

BIOL202, 204, 205, 206, 301, 302,304,307,312.

BIOL202, 206, 207, 302, 303, 304,310,311.

BIOL20l, 204, 205, 207, 301, 305,307,309,310,311.

BIOL20I, 202, 204, 205, 301, 305,309,310,312.

BIOL20I, 204, 205, 301, 305, 307,309,310.

BIOL204. 205, 206, 303, 304, 307.

BIOL204, 205, 206, 303, 304, 307,309.

Environmental Biology and Geography - Program B

Year I

BIOLl 01, BIOLl 02, GEOGI 01, GEOGI02 pJus4 othersemester subjects.

Year 2

BIOL202, BIOL206, BIOL207, GEOG20l, GEOG203, GEOO204 plus 2 other semester subjects from Biology, Chemistry, Geography, Mathematics or Geology.

Year 3

BI0L303, BIOL311 plus 2 other Biology and 4 Physical Geography semester subjects.

Biology and Chemistry - Program C

Year 1

BIOLI 01 ,BIOLl02, CHEMI O1,CHEMI 02 plus 40therscmester subjects.

Year 2

BIOL20I, BIOL204, BIOL205, CHEM221 plus 20thersemester subjects

Year 3

BIOL301, BIOL305, BI0L307, BI0L309 plus 2 other semester subjects from Biology, Chemistry or one other discipline.

CHEMISTRY Chemistry is a science concerned primarily with matter and the changes that it undergoes. The study of Chemistry is important not only in itself but also as a background to many otherscienccs.

lOS

RECOMMENDED PROGRAMS

The study of Chemistry is open to all students who havequalified for admission into the University. However, those who have not studied sufficient sciences at school are advised to do some selfpreparation before beginning Level 100 Chemistry subjects. Details on expected backgrounds and suggested remedial reading are provided under the appropriate Levell 00 subject descriptions.

The Chemistry Department offers courses over the whole range of the subject. A basic chemical education is available in the traditional areas of analytical, inorganic, organic and physical chemistry together with some more diverse applied subjects. Thus students interested in Environmental Science will find relevant Chemistry subjects (e.g. CHEM261, CHEM361) to include in their program.

The flexible system of subjects offered by the Department allows a student to major in Chemistry on a broad level or to specialise in certain areas of the subject and to combine these with relevant subjects offered by other Departments. Thus a student interested primarily in Physical Chemistry may elect to choose Physics and Mathematics subjects as complements. Conversely, students majoring in other Departments may choose companion Olemistry subjects relevant to thcirinterests. Thus some courses in Analytical and Inorganic Chemistry would be useful to Geology majors; Organic Chemistry subjects would be relevant for Biology majors; Physics majors would benefit from study of some courses in Physical Chemistry, etc. At Level 300 specialist topics in active research areas of Chemistry are offered to provide a modem picture of the subject.

Students intending to do a major in Chemistry would have to complete Program A which isregardedas aminimumrequirement for a thorough grounding in the subject. Students wishing to devote themselves fully to Chemistry will undertake a double major as in Program B where they can complete up to two thirds of their degree program in this one discipline. Many subject combinations in between these two programs are possible. Thus for example, a student may choose six Level 300 subjects in Chemistry and two from another Department, etc.

Chemistry is a recognised profession which is served by a professional body, the Royal Australian Chemical Institute (RAC!). Many employment opportunities for chemists require membership of this organisation. Graduates seeking membership must have completed at least the subjects listed in Program A.

Following either of these programs or combinations thereof may lead to postgraduate sLUdy at the Honours standard (Level 400), for which entry requirements are a credit average in at least four Level 300 semester subjects. The Department strongly recommends the Honours Degree to students both forthe additional experience it provides and for its enhancement of employment opportunities and professional standing. Honours studentsdevote most of their time to an independent research project together with some fonnal course work. The project is selected in an area of interest from lists provided by members of the academic staff. This degree is also the normal entry requirement to the research higher degrees (MSc and PhD) offered by the Department.

Chemistry - Program A

Year 1

CHEMIOI andCHEMI02;eilherMATHll1/1120rMATH1021 1m, and four other subjects from Level 100.

SECfION SIX

Year 2

CHEM211, CHEM221, CHEM23 I , CHEM241, plus four other subjects from Level 200.

Year 3

Choose at least four equivalent full subjects from the Level 300 chemistry list and up to four other subjects from Level 300. The inclusion of at least two of CHEM311, CHEM321, CHEM331, CHEM341 is recommended.

Year 4

CHEM401 and CHEM402.

Chemistry - Program B

Year 1

CHEMIOl andCHEMI02; eitherMA TIl111/1120r MATHI02! 103; and four other subjects from Level 100.

Year 2

CHEM211, CHEM221, CHEM231, CHEM241, CHEM261 and three other subjects from Level 200.

Year 3

Choose eight equivalent full subjects from the L.eveI300chemislry list. The inclusion of CHEM311, CHEM321, CHEM331, CHEM341 is recommended.

Year 4

CHEM401 and CHEM402.

GEOGRAPHY

Geography is the study of the Earth and its people, giving emphasis to theinteractions among the physical, economic and social elements oftheenvironment.ModernGeographymaybedividedintostudies in Human Geography (Program A) and Physical Geography (Progmm B). but students may advantageously combine units from Human and Physical Geography (Program C).

HumanGeography(ProgramA)analysesthefactorsandprocesses that govern the distribution of people and their economic, social and cultural activities. Changes in distribution patterns and activities through time require study of past processes and prediction for the future from analysis of present trends and patterns. A wide range of opportunity is available for graduates in private business and public service departments especially in areas that involve planning, social and economic analysis.

Physical Geography (Program B) analyses the factors and processes that influence the distributions of phenomena in the physical environment. Emphasisis placedon study ofthe processes that develop landfonnsand soils, on the meteorological processes that cause variations in climate, and on the factors that influence Variations in vegetation communities and animal distributions. Employment opportunities are good both in the private and public sector which is currently demanding graduates with agood understanding of environmental issues and their management. BIOLIOI, BIOLl02, GEOLlOI, GEOLl02, PHYSIOI and PHYSI02 are useful complementary 100 level subjects.

Geography (Program C) combines units from Human Geography and Physical Geography at the 200 and 300 levels with other SUbjects from the Faculties of Arts, Economics, Education and


Science and Mathematics. TIlis program can be taken to Major level without selecting the Methods courses GEOG201 GEOG202,GEOO301andGEOG302,butforHonoursaMeth~ stream (GEOG201 plusGEOG301 orGEOG202 plusOEOG302 is necessary). Employment opportunities are good but diverse.

Major in Human Geography

Year 1

GEOG\OJ and GEOG102

Choose six other subjects recommended from Level 100 to comply with Bachelor of Science degree requirements.

Year 2

GEOG202, GEOG207 and GEOG20S.

Choose five other subjects from Level 200.

Year 3

GEOG302, GE0G306, GEOG309, and GEOG315

Choose four other subjects from Level 300.

Year 4

GEOG401 and GOOG402.

Major in Physical Geography

Year 1

GEOG101 and GEOGI02.

Choose six other subjects from Level 100. BIOLlOl, BIOLl02. GEOLl 01, GEOLl 02, PHYSI 01 and PHYS 1 02 recommended.

Year 2

GEOG20l,GEOG203 andGEOG204.


Year 3

OEOG30l, GE0G304, OEOG305 and GE0G311


Year 4

GEOG401 and GEOG402.

Major in Geography

Year 1

GEOG101 and OEOGI02.

Choose six other subjects from Level 100.

Year 2

Choose THREEsubjectsfrom GECXJ20I, GECXJ202, GEOG203, GEOG204, GEOG207, GEOG20S.


Year 3·

Choose FOUR subjects from GEOG301, GEOG302, GEOG304, GEOG305, GE00306, GEOG309, GEOG31O, GEOG311 and GEOG315.


Year 4

GEOG401 and GEOG402.

109

SECfIONSIX

"'NOTE Prerequisites will restrict some choice according to Year 2 subjects chosen.

GEOLOGY Geology provides the ultimate understanding of our planet, its environment and its evolution. As a natural science, much of the course is outdoors on field excursions and mapping occurs in a diversity of environments. The course is presented as an integrated study of the major processes, hence field,laboratory and lecture work are intertwined.

Students are strongly advised to choose companion courses, especially if interests are in palaeontology and evolution (biological sciences), surficial processes (geo graph y), geophysics (physics and mathematics), geochemistry, tectonics, mineralogy and petrology (chemistry).

Employment for geologists is available in the minerals, petroleum, coal, environmental and engineering industries. A Bachelor's degree (80 credit points at 300 Level in Geology) is required for membership to the professional body. Employers and the Department very strongly recommend the Honours degree (GEOL401/GEOIA02) which allows professional research through some independent investigation.

MATHEMATICS The Department of Mathematics offers semester subjects at all levels for the Bachelor of Mathematics degree, the Bachelor of Science degree, the Bachelor of Arts degree and the Bachelor of Engineering degree. However, students wishing to obtain professional qualifications in mathematics should enrol in the Bachelor of Mathematics degree program, where it is possible (although not compulsory) to fill completely their second and third years with mathematics.

Some Faculties use the word "major" to describe a complete strand of study which is considered to be appropriate and sufficiently educative that they may quote the name of the discipline as acomponent oftheirdegree. The program suggested for the Bachelor of Science degree would fulfil the requirements for a major in mathematics.

Bachelor of Science Degree - with Mathematics as a major

This is a course of study which includes at least the following semester subjects.

Year 1

MATHI02, 103 orMATHI I I, 102, 103 orMATHIII, 112, 103, together with other level 100 subjects to meet the B.Sc. degree requirements.

Year 2

MATH201, MATH203, MATI1204, MATH206,MATH218and one chosen from {MATH213, MATH214, MATH215} plus 5 other subjects from Level 200.

Year 3

Four semester subjects from Mathematics Level 3OD, chosen with advice from the Department, and four further subjects to meet the BSc degree requirements.

110


Mathematics - Bachelor of Mathematics Degree

The Bachelorof Mathematics degree enables a student to complete a full course in Mathematics, ortocombinea Mathematics major with Computer Science, Statistics, Physics or another appropriate discipline as set out in the Rules. Note that for the Bachelor of Mathematics degree, certain specific subjects are required at the 200 level, thus providing a base for a double majorin Mathematics, or a majorin Statistics, with options also for majors in Physics or Computer Science.

Subjects should be chosen according to the requirements of the Bachelor Degree Rules in this handbook. In total, at least 160 credit points must include the subjects in the following list. The remaining credit points for the ordinary degree may include subjects offered elsewhere in the University.

The prescribed components of the degree include

Year 1

MATHI02and MATHl03 (20 credit points)orMATHIII, 102, 103 (30 credit points) or MA THill, 112, 103 (30 credit points)

Year 2

MATH20I,MATH203,MATH204,MATH206,MATH218andooe of (MATH213, MATH214,MATH215) (30 credit points); and a further 30 credit points from MA TH200,STA T2OO,COMP200 and/or PHYS200.

Year 3

MA TH300 and/or STA T300 (40 credit points); plus a further 40 credit points from MATH3OD, STAT300, COMP300 and/or PHYS300.

(TheBMath (Hons) program consists of: MA TH4000r ST A T400 subjects)

It has been found that certain combinations of subjects have been popular, and some, in the judgement of the Department, are particularly worthwhile combinations in terms of education or career training. Five such programs are shown below. They are neither exhaustive nor prescriptive, but are for your guidance. A furthernote is added regarding the choice of subjects in Year 1 for the BMath degree.

I BMath with "Pure" Mathematics as the major interest

To follow the progress of Mathematics is to be well ahead of applications, a1though Mathematics itself is eruiched by those applications. To be able to follow such progress, the student needs to have as wide an experience in Mathematics as possible, and a thorough grounding in the basic truths.

Since the Year 3 program can accommodate no more than 8 different topics, some selection must be made. Although the program does not appcarvery "applied", nonetheless graduates with such backgrounds have adapted quickly to careers in industry and commerce as well as in research.

In satisfying the requirements for the degree, a suitable program is:

Year 1

MA THI 02and MATH I 03 together with other subjects worth 60 credit points: (Computer Science and/or Physics and/or Statistics and/or Philosophy are popular but the choice is wide. Sec No.6 below).

b

SECfION SIX

Year 2 All available MATH200 level subjects (except perhaps one ortwoofMATH213, 214, 215, 216) together with some 200 level subjects to continue a subsidiary interest from Year 1.

Year 3 MA TH30!, MATH302, MATII304, MA TH395, MATH308, MATH310, MATH311, MATH313 orMATH314, is a "Pure Mathematics" selection of subjects - but there are variations.

Year 4

The BMath (Hans) program consists of:Year 4 MATII401

and MATH402.

2 BMath with Mathematical Physics as a major interest

Nowadays a student who wishes to understand current theories of Nature, ranging from the quantum world of elementary particles to the large scale structure of the Universe it~f, must be familiar with a formidable amount of mathematics. Areas of mathematics previously the preserve of the pure mathematician have found fruitful application in modem physics. Now the standard tools include functional ana1ysis, group theory, a1gebra, differentia1 geometry and topology, and the list is continually changing. A student wishing to study the exciting developments in modem mathematical physics needs a strong grounding in these subjects, and the ability to quickly assimilate new mathematics as required, which can only come from a firm grounding in basic 'pure' mathematics.

In satisfying the requirements for the degree, a suitable program could be:

Year 1

MATH102 and MATH103 together with other subjects (Physics and Computer Science should be included).

Year 2

MA TH20I, MATH202, MA TH203, MA TH204, MA TH205, MATH206,MATH207,MATH218,MATH209,MATH2IO, MATH211, MATH214 together with other MATH200 subjects, and/or other subjects to continue an interest from Year 1.

Year 3

MA TH302, MATH303, MAT1!304, MA TH305, MA TH306, MA TH307, MA TH31 0, MA TH312.

Year 4

The BMath (Hons) program consists of:Year 4 MATH401 and MA TH402.

3 BMath with "Applied" Mathematics as a major interest

"Applied" Mathematics uses mathematics as a tool for investigating problems which come from other disciplines. This interdisciplinary approach to problem-solving has been remarkably successful,but practitioners need both a strong grounding in the technica1 aspects of Mathematics as well as knowledge of subjects which concentrate on Applied Mathematics. It a1so includes subjects from the Departments of Statistics and Computer Science which provide additional skills for the professiona1 Applied Mathematician.


It is recommended that a student include at least a first yearsecond year combination from another discipline. TItis provides afurther opportunity to see how mathematics can be applied. In the past students have chosen Physics orChemistry . However there are now career opportunities applying mathematics in economics, psychology, medicine, banking, biology, geology and the design of industria1 processes.


Year 1

MATHI02 and MATHI03 and COMPIOI together with "other" subjects worth 40 credit points, taking note of the remarks above.

Year 2

MATH20l,MATH202,MATH203,MATH204,MATH206, MATH218,MATH213,MATH214,MATH215,MATH216, COMP201, STAT201 are a1l recommended, together with continuation of one of the "other" subjects from Year 1 and, if room, one of MATH209, MATH21 I , or MATH212.

Year 3

MATH303,MATH304,MATH305,MATH313togetherwith most of MATH306, MATH307, MATH315, MATH316 (or subjects in Physics or Statistics or Computer Science).

Year 4

The BMath (lIons) program consists of:Year 4 MATI:l401 and MATH402.

4 BMath with Statistics as a major interest

(Although STATI01 is shown as desirable, it is not a prercquisile for STA T201 for students in BMath).


Year 1

Either STATI0l, MATHlll and MATH112 or STATI03. MATH102 and MATHI03. INFO} 01 is recommended. Choose other subjects worth 50 credit points from Levell 00.

Year 2

MATH201,MATH203,MATH204,MATH206,MATH218. at least one of {MATH213, MATH214,MATH215] ,together with STAT2O!, STAT202, STAT203, STAT204 together with other Mathematics or Computer Science 200 level subjects for the remaining 20 credit points.

Year 3

STATIO I , STATI02, STATI03, STATI04 with four mathematics and/or computer science 300 level subjects for the remaining 40 credit points.

Year 4

The BMath (I-Ions) program consists of:Year 4 STAT400 Subjects

5 llMath with Computer Science as a major interest

In satisfying the requirements for the degree, a suitable program would be:

III

SECfIONSIX

Year 1

MATH102 and MATHI03, COMP101, and other subjects worth 40 credit points.

Year 2

MATH20I.MATH203.MATH204.MATH206.MATH218. MATH212.MATH2IS. MATH216.COMP20I. C0MP202. COMP203. COMP204. C0MP20S. COMP206.

STA T203, PmL242(lhatisadesirable program, but timetable constraints may modify it}.

YearJ

Four MATH300subjects and fourCOMP300 subjects. ([here is wide choice for specialisation).

Year 4

The BMath (Hons) program consists of:Year 4 MATH401 andMA TH402,or seeOte Rulesfor BCompSci(Hons) Faculty of Engineering.

6 First year subjects in the BMath Degree

The rules demand MATH102 and MATH103 (20 credit points) or MATH111, 102. 103 (30 credit points) or MATHll1. 112, 103 (30 credit points) but the remaining credit points can be taken in almost any other discipline. Popular choices include Computer Science (COMP101). Physics (PHYSI01/l02 or 1021103), Information Science and Statistics (INF0101/STAT101). However, BMath students choose widely, and the following areas have been approved for them in the past:

Accounting, Biology, Chemistry, Classical Civilisation, Drama,Engineering, Economics, English, French, Geogmphy, Geology, Gennan, Greek, History, Japanese, Latin, Legal Studies, Linguistics, Philosophy, Psychology, Sanskrit, Sociology.

There is room in the BMath course to include Level 200 subjects to continue with one of the choices made during the first year course.

PHYSICS Foremployment as a physicist, students must have a minimum of an ordinary Bachelor of Science degree with a major in Physics. AnHonoursdegreeinPhysicsorcombinedPhysics/Mathematics would be preferred.

Physics as a profession is represented by the Australian Institute of Physics. Membership is limited to graduates with a minimum of a major in Physics. The Australian Institute of Physics has a number of grades of membership which are related to experience as a physicist. There is a grade of membership for students currently working towards a degree. The Institute monitors courses in Physics at tertiary institutions and judges them in tenns of suitability for admission to membership of the Australian Institute of Physics. The Institute also responds on behalf of physicists to matters relating to physicists and their role. There are no formal conditions for registration as a physicist, but a degree is usually necessary for government and industry recognition and status as a professional physicist.

112

I RECOMMENDED PROGRAMS

It is advisable for intending physicists to include ample mathematics in their course and pursue a related science such as Chemistry or Geology to Level 200 subjects if at all possible.

For a Physics majorin the Bachelorof Science degree a1least the following semester subject structure is necessary

Year 1

PHYSI02. PHYSJ03. MATHJ02 and MATHl03.

Choose four other subjects from Levell 00, preferably leading to Level 200 in at least one other science discipline.

Year 2

PHYS201 and at least two subjects chosen from PHYS202·, PHYS203 or PHYS20S; and MATH201 (advisory).

("'Students achieving a credit level or better in PHYSI0l and PHYS I 02 may be admitted to Level 200 in Physics with the approval of the Head of Department).

Year 3

PHYS301, PHYS302 and at least two subjects chosen from PHYS303. PHYS304 or PHYS30S. Note that the Level 300 subjects should be passed with a credit or better for admission to the Bachelor of Science (Honours) degree (in Year 4).

PSYCHOLOGY As a discipline, Psychology is open to all students who gain ,'.:

admission to the University. Psychology is a broad discipline and .'. it is difficult to state preparatory subjects that should be studied together with Psychology. ~

Recently legislation was passed through the State Parliament which will require anyone wishing to practise as a Psychologist to have a minimum of four years training. In the Science and Mathematics Faculty, Psychology can be taken either as a BSc or aBSc (Psychology) degree. The BScdegree is a three year course which can be followed by a fourth or Honours year. The BSc (Psychology) degree is a four year degree. The programs within these two degrees are set out below.

The Department's aim is to produce "psychologists who should by virtue of their training be able to playa unique role such as critically examining research and scholarly literature in the field of psychology. contributing to empirical research in psychology, administering and interpreting psychological tests and measurement procedures and prescribing, implementing and evaluating f onns of psychological intervention and remediation".

Entry to Psychology 40 1 and 402 requires completion of 60 credit points at PSYC300 obtaining at least a Credit Grade in each of four 300 level Psychology subjects including PSYC301 and PSYC302. Entry to PSYC403 and PSYC404 requires Pass grades in at least six 300 level subjects.

The Department offers two Applied Masters Degrees. The Master of Psychology (Clinical) degree has an Honours entry requirement while the Master of Psychology (Educational) has an undergraduate degree with a major in Psychology as an entry requirement, a teaching qualification and in addition, two years teaching (or other relevant) experience. The Honours degree is the normal entry into the research degrees of Master of Science and Doctor of Philosophy.

SECfION SIX

BSc with a Psychology Major

Year]

PSYCI01, PSYCI02 plus 6 other semester subjects at level 100.

Year 2

PSYC20I, PSYC202, PSYC203 plus other subjects at the 200 level, some of which may also be taken in Ps)!chology.

Year 3

PSYC301, PSYC303, PSYC304 plus at least one other chosen from PSYC302. PSYC305. PSYC306. PSYC307 or PSYC308. and four other subjects chosen at the 300 level.

BSc Honours Degree in Psychology

Year]

PSYCI01, PSYCI02, plus 6 other subjects from level 100.

Year 2

Eight 200 level subjects including PSYC201, PSYC202, PSYC203 and PSYC204 plus other 200 level subjects chosen from the scheduled list.

Year 3

PSYC301, PSYC302 and at least four other Psychology subjects a1 the 300 level, plus other 300 level subjects chosen from the scheduled list including those offered by the Psychology Department.

Year 4

PSYC401 and PSYC402. Entry to the Honours degree requires passes in four Psychology subjects at the 200 level including PSYC201 as well as completion of 60 credit points at PSYC300 obtaining at least a Credit grade average in each offour 300 Level 4 Psychology subjects at the 300 level including PSYC301 and PSYC302.

BSc (psychology) awarded at Honours Level

Years] and 2 As for Psychology Honours above.

Year 3 PSYC301, PSYC302 and at least four other Psychology subjects at the 300 level, plus other 300 level subjects chosen from the scheduled list including those offered by the Psychology Department.

Year 4 PSYC401 and PSYC402. Entry to the Honours degree requires passes in four Psychology subjects at the 200 level inclUding PSYC201, as well as completion of 60 credit points at PSYC3000btaining at least a Credit grade average in each offour 300 Level Psychology subjects at the 300 level including PS Y C301 and PSYC302.

BSc (Psychology) Degree

Years 1 and 2 As for Psychology Honours above.

Year 3

PSYC301, and at least five other Psychology subjects at the 300 level, plus other 300 level subjects chosen from the scheduled list including those offered by the Psychology Department.

Year 4

PSYC403 and PSYC404.

STATISTICS


Statistics has been described as the science of turning data into infonnation.TItis involves collecting. presenting and analysing data, interpreting the results and using them to draw conclusions or make decisions. The principles of Statistics are based on ideas from the philosophy of science and mathematics and, more recently, from developments in computing. Computers play an essential role in Statistics for data management and analysis. Statistics is a practical subject.ltinvolves designing experimental plans and sampling procedures, calculating how many subjects or objects should be studied and determining how the measurements should be made in order to obtain data which is reliable, accurate and relevant. Methods of statistical analysis, based on mathematics including probability theory, are used to decide what conclusions can validly be drawn from the data.

The Stalistics Department offers subjects from the 100 level through to the Honours level. Research degrees may be pursued in the area of Statistics.

For a major in Statistics a student should talee the following subjects:

Year J

STATJOI andMATHI120r MATHI02and MATHJ03. Choose other subjects worth 60 credit points from Level 100.

Year 2

STATIOI. STATI02. STAT203. STATI04 and MATH20l. Choose other subjects worth 45 credit points from Level 200.

Year 3

STATIDI. STATI02. STA1103. STATI04. Choose other subjects worth 40 credit points from Level 300.

Year 4

80 credit points selected from STAT401 to STAT41I.

113

SECTION SEVEN

POSTGRADUATE DEGREE RULES

SCHEDULE - HONOURS DEGREE OF BACHELOR SCIENCE

Admission to Candidature

1. A candidate may undertake the honours degree in either one or two disciplines.

2. In orderto be admiued to candidature forthe degree in a single discipline an applicant shall:

(a) have completed the requirements for admission to the Ordinary DegreeofBachelorofScienceofthe University or to any other degree approved by the Faculty Board; and

(b) have completed such other work prescribed in accordance with the policy determined by the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Head of the Department responsible for the discipline.

3. In order to be admitted to candidature for the degree in two disciplines, an applicant shall:

(a) have completed the requirements for admission to the Ordinary DegreeofBachelorofScienceofthe University or to any other degree approved by the Faculty Board; and

(b) have completed such other work prescribed in accordance with the policy determined by the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Heads of the Departments responsible for the disciplines.

Qualification for Admission to the Degree

4. To qualify for admission to the degree a candidate shall pass subjects at the400 level totalling 80 credit points chosen from the list of Approved Subjects.

114

Classes of Honours

5. There shall be three classes of honours: Class I, aass II and Class III. Class II shall have two divisions, namely Division 1 and Division 2.

Time Requirements

6. Except with the permission of the Faculty Board, acandidate shall complete the course in not more than two years of study.

SECfrON SEVEN POSTGRADUA 1E DEGREE RULES

APPROVED SUBJECTS

The subjects approved by the Faculty Board for the award are:

Code Name Credit Points Prerequisite Corequisite

BIOL401 Biology Honours 401 40 40 cp 300 BIOL or other 300 level subjects approved by the Department, obtaining at least a Credit grade average

BIOL402 Biology Honours 402 40 BIOL401

CHEM401 Chemistry Honours 401 40 40 cp level 300 CHEM obtaining at least a Credit grade average

CHEM402 Chemistry Honours 402 40 CHEM401

GEOO401 Geography Honours 401 40 40 cp level 300 GEOG obtaining at least a Credit grade average

GEOO4D2 Geography Honours 402 40 GEOG401

GEOL401 Geology Honours 401 40 40 cp level 300 GEOL obtaining at least a Credit grade average

GEOL4D2 Geology Honours 402 40 GEOL401

MATH401 Mathematics Honours 401 40 40 cp level 300 MATH obtaining at least a Credit grade average

MATH402 Mathematics Honours 402 40 MATH401

PHYS401 Physics Honours 401 40 Any three PHYS300 subjects and PHYS301 obtaining at least a Credit grade averaae

PHYS402 Physics Honours 402 40 PHYS40r

PSYC40l Psychology Honours 401 (Seminars) 40 Four PSYC200 subjects incl. PSYC201 and 60 cp

at PSYC300 obtaining at least a Credit grade in each of four PSYC300 including

PSYC301 and PSYC302

PSYC402 Psychology Honours 402(Thesis) 40 PSYC401

Acandidatemay pursueacombined honours degree in one honours subject from each of two Departments with the approval of the Heads of both Departments.

liS

SECfION SEVEN

SCHEDULE - HONOURS DEGREE OF BACHELOR OF SCIENCE (A VIA nON)


1. In order to be admiued to candidature for the degree an applicant shall:

(a) have completed the requirements for admission to the Ordinary Degree of Bachelor of Science (Aviation) of the University or to any other degree approved by the Faculty Board, or have already been admitted to that degree; and

(b) have completed any additional work prescribed in accordance with the policy detennined by the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Head of the Department of A vialion.


2. To qualify for admission to the degree a candidate shall pass subjects at the 400 level totalling 80credit points chosen from the list of Approved Subjects.

Classes of Honours

3, There shall be three classes of honours: Class It Class II and Class III. OassII shall have twodivisions,namely Division 1 and Division 2.

Time Requirements

4. Except with the permission of the Faculty Board, acandidate shall complete the course in not more than two years of study.

116

POSTGRADUA 1E DEGREE RULES

I

t I,· l

SECTION SEVEN

APPROVED SUBJECTS



A candidate may emol in 80 credit points including AVIA405 to be chosen from:

A VIA401 Aviation Honours 401 20

AVlA402 Aviation Research 10

& Methodology

AVlA403 Technology in Aviation 10

AVlM04 The Human Variable 10

AVlM05 Aviation Honours -Thesis 40


Prerequisite

B.Sc.(Avialion) with a Credit grade average

in A VIA308, A V1A3IO,

A V1A311 and A VlA314

AVlA314

AVlA310, AVIA312

and AVlA313

AVlA221 and AVIA311

B.Sc.(Aviation) with

an average obtaining Credit grades in A V1A308, A VIA3lO,

AVlA311 and AVIA314

Corequisite

AVlA40l

AVlA401 and

either AVlA403 or AVlA404

111

SECfION SEVEN

SCHEDULE - HONOURS DEGREE OF BACHELOR OF APPLIED SCIENCE ENVIRONMENTAL ASSESSMENT AND MANAGEMENT


1. In orderto be admitted to candidature forthe degree in a single discipline an applicant shall:

(a) have completed the requirements for admission to the Ordinary Degree of Bachelor of Applied Science (Fnvironmental Assessment and Management) of the University or to any other degree approved by the Faculty Board, or have already been admitted to that degree; and

(b) have completed any additional work prescribed in accordance with the policy determined by the Faculty BoardontherecommendationoftheHeadofDepartment of Applied Science and Technology.


2. To qualify for admission to the degree a candidate shall pass subjects at the 400 level totalling 80credit points chosen from the list of Approved Subjects.

Classes or Honours

3. There shall be three elasses of Honours: Class I, Class II and Class m. Class II shall have two divisions namely Division 1 and Division 2.

Time Requirements

4. Except with the pennission of the Faculty Board, a candidate shall complete the course in not more than two years of study.

118

r If

POSTGRADUATE DEGREE RULES SECfION SEVEN

APPROVED SUBJECTS



EAMS401

EAMS402 EAMS404

Environmental Management

Seminar Series Research Project

20

20 40


Prerequisite

EAMS301. EAMS311 Forty credit points level 300 EAMS obtaining alleast a

Credit grade average

Corequisite

EAMS401 EAMS401

119

SECfION SEVEN

SCHEDULE - HONOURS DEGREE OF BACHELOR OF MATHEMATICS


1. A candidate may undertake the honours degree in either one or two disciplines.

2. In orderto be admitted to candidature forthe degree in a single discipline an applicant shall:

(a) have completed the requirements for admission to the Ordinary Degree of Bachelor of Mathematics of the University or to any other degree approved by the Faculty Board; and

(b) havecompletedsuchotherworkprescribedinaccordance with the policy determined by the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Head of the Department responsible for the discipline.

3. In order to be admitted to candidature for the degree in two disciplines, an applicant shall:

(a) have completed the requirements for admission to the Ordinary Degree of Bachelor of Mathematics of the University or to any other degree approved by the Faculty Board; and

(b) have completed such other work prescribed in accordance with the policy determined by the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Heads of the Departments responsible for the disciplines.


4. To qualify for admission to the degree a candidate shall pass subjects at the400 level totalling 80 credit points chosen from the list of Approved Subjects.

Classes of Honours

5. There shall be three classes of honours: Class I, Class II and Class lll. Class II shall have two divisions, namely Division 1 and Division 2.

Time Requirements

6. Except with the permission of the Faculty Board, a candidate shall complete the course in not more than two years of study.

120

POSTGRADUAlE DEGREE RULES SECfrON SEVEN

APPROVED SUBJECTS



Mathematics MATH401

MATH402

Statistics

Mathematics Honours 401


A candidate may enrol in 80 credit points, to be chosen from:

STAT401 Probability Theory

STAT402 STAT403 STAT404 STAT405 STAT406 STAT407 STAT408 STAT409 STAT410 STAT411

Analysis of Categorical Data

Demography and Survival Analysis Robust Regression and Smoothing Statistical Consulting Methods for Quality Improvement Advanced Topics in Statistics Project Project Project Project

40

40

\0

\0 10 10 10 \0 10 \0 20 30 40

POSTGRADUA TIl DEGREE RULES

Prerequisite

40 cp level 300 MATH subjects obtaining at least a Credit grade average

MATH401

40 cp from level 300 STAT subjects obtaining at least a Credit grade average As for STAT401 As forSTAT401 As for STAT401 As forSTAT401 AsforSTAT401 As forSTAT401 As for STAT401 AsforSTAT401 As for STAT401 AsforSTAT401

A candidate may pursue a combined honours degree in one honours subject from each of two Departments in one of the following combinations:

MATH401 Mathematics Honours 401 40 40 cp level 300 MATH subjects obtaining at least a Credit grade average

PHYS401 Physics Honours 401 40 Any three PHYS 300 subjects and PHYS301 obtaining at least a Credit average

or MATH401 Mathematics Honours 401 40 As previously stated ECON401 Economics IV 40 Consult Department or

MATH401 Mathematics Honours 401 40 As previously stated GEOL401 Geology Honours 401 40 40 cp level 300 GEOL subjects

obtaining at least a Credit grade average or MATH401 Mathematics Honours 401 40 As previously stated PSCY401 Psychology Honours 401 40 Four PSYC 200 subjects incl.

PSYC201 and 60 cp at PSYC 300 obtaining at least a Credit grade in each of four PSYC300 including PSYC301 and PSYC302.

121

SECTION SEVEN

SCHEDULE- GRADUATE DIPLOMA IN ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES


1. In order to be admitted to candidature for the diploma an applicant shall:

(a) have satisfied all the requirements for admission to a degree of the University orto any other degree approved by the Faculty Board or have achieved atanothertertiary institution a standard of performance deemed by the Faculty Board to be equivalent; and

(b) havecompletedsuchotherwOI'kprescribedinaccordance with the policy determined by the Faculty Board; or

(c) in exceptional cases, produce evidence of possessing such other qualifications as may be approved by the Faculty Board.

Qualification for Admission to the Diploma

2. To qualify for admission to the diploma a candidate shall complete subjects totalling 80 credit points from the list of Approved Subjects. including 40 credit points in subjects at the 400 level or higher.

Grading of the Diploma

3. The diploma shall be conferred as an Ordinary Diploma except that, where the perfonnance of a candidate has reached a standard detennined by the Faculty Board to be sufficient, the diploma may be conferred with Merit.

Time Requirements


122

, POSTGRADUAlE DEGREE RULES SECfION SEVEN

APPROVED SUBJECTS

The Subjects approved· by the Faculty Board for the award are:


BIOLJ03 Environmental Plant Physiology 10 BlOLJlt Environmental Biology 10

CHEM261 Environmental Chemistry 10

CHEM361 Environmental Chemistry 10

CHEE342 Safety and Environment 10

CNL242 Environmental Engineering 2 5 EDUC612 The Scope of Environmental Education 10 EDUC613 Issues and Research in Environmental Education to

GEOG305 Climatic Problems 10 GEOG306 Geography of Australia: 10

an Historic Perspective GEOG311 Hydrology 10 GE0G491 Environmental Studies

Seminar 1 20 GE0G492 Environmental Studies Minor Project 10 GEOG595 Directed Environmental Study 1 10 GEOG596 Directed Environmental Study 2 10 MECH407 Environmental Engineering 5

PHlL391 Technology and Human Values I 10 PHllA91 Technology. Human Values and

The Environment 10 SOC304 Medicine in Industrial Society 20

SURV473 Town Planning 10

Footnote

PQSTGRADUA TE DEGREE RULES

Prerequisite Corequlslte

TwoBIOL200 BIOL207 or BIOL203. Students who have completed BI0L306 are not eligible to do this subject CHEMIOI, CHEMI02 CHEM261 Consult Head of Department CNL141 Consult Education Department Consult Education Department GEOG203 GEOG202 plus either GEOG205 or GEOG206 GEOG20l, GEOG203

Consult Department of Mechanical Engineering

20 c.p. at 200 level including S0C201 Consult Department

Leave of Absence-For the purposes of Rule 10 of the Rules Governing Academic Awards. a candidate shalJ be deemed to be in good standing if. at the conclusion of the year of last enrolment in the course, that candidate was eligible to re-enrol withoUi restrictions.

*Or such subjects considered necessary upon approval of the Dean.

123

SECTION SEVEN

SCHEDULE - GRADUATE DIPLOMA IN MATHEMATICAL STUDIES


1. An applicant for admission to candidature for the Diploma shall:

(a) have satisfied all the requirements for admission to a degree of the University or to a degree of any other tertiary institution approved for this purpose by the Faculty Board; or

(b) in exceptional circumstances have other qualifications approved for this purpose by the Faculty Board.

Qualincation for Admission to the Diploma

2. (1) To qualify for the diploma a candidate shall pass a program of study approved by the Facull y Board, totalling not less than 80 credit points.

(2) The program shall consist of subjects from levels above 100 level offered by the Department of Mathematics and the Department of Statistics or other subjects with considerable mathematical content, as determined by the Dean,offered by olherdepartments of the University.

(3) Not more than 20 credit points from 200 level SUbjects may be counted by a candidate towards the diploma

Grading

3. In cases where a candidate's performance in the program has reached alevel determined by the Faculty Board, the diploma may be awarded with Merit.

Time Requirements


Footnote

Leave of Absence - For the purposes of Rule 10 of lh£ Rules Governing Academic Awards, a candidate shall be deemed to be in good standing if, at the conclusion of the year of last enrolmenl in the course, that candidate was eligible to re-enrol witlwuJ restrictions.

SCHEDULE- GRADUATE DIPLOMA IN SCIENCE


1. In order to be admitted to candidature for the diploma an. applicant shall:

(a) have satisfied all the requirements for admission to a degree of the University or to any other degree approved by the Faculty Board or have achieved at anothertertiary institution a standard of performance deemed by the Faculty Board to be equivalent; and

(b) have completed such other work prescribed in accordance with the policy determined by the Faculty Board; or

(c) in exceptional cases, produce evidence of possessing such other qualifications as may be approved by the Faculty Board.

124


Qualification for Admission to the Diploma

2. To qualify for admission to the diploma a candidate shall pass subjects at the 400 level totalling 80 credit points chosen from the list of Approved Subjects.

Grading of the Diploma

3. The diploma shall be conferred as an Ordinary Diploma except that, where the perfonnanceof acandida1e has reached a standard determined by the Faculty Board to be sufficient, the diploma may be confened with Merit.

Time Requirements

4. Except with the pennission of the Faculty Board, a candidate shall complete the course in not more than two years of study.

SECTION SEVEN

APPROVED SUBJECTS



BI0L405 Biology Diploma 405 40

BIOIA06 CHEM405 CHEM4Q6 GEOG405 GEOG406 GEOIA05 GEOIA06 PHYS405 PHYS406 PSYC405 PSYC406

Footnote

Biology Diploma 406 Chemistry Diploma 405 Chemistry Diploma 406 Geography Diploma 405 Geography Diploma 406 Geology Diploma 405 Geology Diploma 406 Physics Diploma 405

Physics Diploma 406 Psychology Diploma 405 Psychology Diploma 406

40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40

POSTGRADUAlE DEGREE RULES

Prerequisite

40 c.p.leveI300 BIOL or other subjects approved by the Department

40 c.p. level 300 CHEM

40 c.p.level 300 GEOO

40 c.p. level 300 GEOL

40 c.p. level 300 PHYS

40 c.p.leveI300 PSYC

Corequisite

BIOlA05

CHEM405

GEOG405

GEOIA05

PHYS405

PSYC405

Leave of Absence -For th£ purposes of Rule 10 of the Rules Governing Academic Awards, a candidate shaU be deemed to be in good standing if. at the cOl1Clusion ofth£ year of last enrolment in the course, that candidate was eligible to re-enrol without restrictions.

125

RULES GOVERNING MASTERS DEGREES

SCHEDULE- MASTER OF ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES

These Rules are currently being revised. Copies of the revised Rules are available from the Assistant Registrar, Faculty of Science and Mathematics.

126

SECfION SEVEN

APPROVED SUBJECTS

The subjects approved by Ute Faculty Board for the award are:


BIOLJ03

BIOLJl1

CHEM261

CHEM361 CHEE342

CIVL242 ECON311

EDUC612 EDUC613

GEOG304 GEOG305

GEOG306

GEOG309

GEOG311

GEOG491

GEOG492

GEOG591

GEOG592

GEOG594

GEOG595

GEOG596

GEOLJ20

MECH309

MECH407

OHS502

PHIL391 PHIL592

SOO04

SURV473

Environmental Plant Physiology Environmental Biology

Environmental Chemistry

Environmental Chemistry Safety and Environment

Environmental Engineering 2

Environmental Economics

The Scope of Environmental Education Issues and Research in Environmental Education The Biosphere and Conservation

Climatic Problems

A Geography of Australia, Historical Perspective

Society and Space

Hydrology

Environmental Studies Seminar 1

Environmental Studies Minor Project

Environmental Studies Major Project I Environmental Studies Major Project II Environmental Studies Seminar 2

Directed Environmental Study 1


Geology of Quaternary Environments

Noise Pollution

Environmental Engineering

Occupational Hygiene and Toxicology Technology and Human Values

Technology, Human Values and The Environment

Medicine in Industrial Society Town Planning

*Or such subjects considered necessary upon approval of the Dean.

10 10

10 10 10 5

10

10 10

10 10 10

10

10 20

10 30

20

30

20

10 10 10 5

5

10

10 10

20 10


Prerequisite Corequisite

Two BIOL200

BIOL207 or BI0L203.

Students who have completed BI0L306 are not eligible to do this subject

CHEMI01, CHEMI02

CHEM261

Consult Head of Department CIVL141

ECON201 Consult Education Department

Consult Education Department

GEOG203

GEOG203

GEOG202 plus

either GEOO205 or GE(XJ206

GEOO202 plus either GEOO205 or GEOG206

GEOG20I, GEOG203

GEOL213 or GEOG204

Consult Department of Mechanical

Engineering

20 c.p. at 200 level including SOC201 Consult Department

127

SECTION SEVEN

SCHEDULE - MASTER OF MATHEMATICS

1. The Faculty of Science and Mathematics shall be responsible for the course leading to the degree of Master of Mathematics.

2. To beeligiblefor admission to candidalUre an applicant shall:

(a) have satisfied all the requirements for admission to a degree of Bachelor of the University of Newcastle with honours in the area of study in which the applicant proposes to carry out research orto an Honours degree, approved for this purpose by the Faculty Board, of another University; or

(b) have satisfied all the requirements for admission to a degree of the University of Newcastle or to a degree, approved for this purpose by the Faculty Board, of another tertiary institution and have completed such work and sat for such examinations as the Faculty Board may have determined and have achieved a standard at least equivalent to that required for admission to a degree of Bachelor with second class honours in an appropriate subject; or

(c) in exceptional cases produce evidence of possessing such academic or professional qualifications as may be approved by the Faculty Board.

3. To qualify for admission to the degree a candidate shall complete to the satisfaction of the Faculty Board a program consisting of:

(a) such examinations and other such work as may be prescribed by the Faculty Board; and

(b) a thesis emlxx:lying the results of an original investigation or design.

4. The program shall be completed in not less than two years except that, in the case of a candidate who has completed the requirements for a degree of Bachelor with Honours or for a qualification deemed by the Faculty Board to be equivalent or who has had previous research experience, the Faculty Board may reduce this period by up to one year.

5. A part-time candidate shall, except with the permission of the Faculty Board, which shall be given only in special circumstances:

(a) conduct the major proportion of the research or design work in the University; and

(b) take part in research seminars within the Department in which the the program is being canied out.

6. Any third examiner shall be an external examiner.

SCHEDULE - MASTER OF PSYCHOLOGY (CLINICAL)


128


SCHEDULE - MASTER OF PSYCHOLOGY (EDUCATIONAL)


SECfION SEVEN POSTGRADUA 1E DEGREE RULES

APPROVED SUBJECTS

The subjects approved by the Faculty Board for the Award are: Code Name Credit Points When Offered PSYC521 Counselling and Psychotherapy I 20 Full Year PSYC522 Counselling and Psychotherapy II 20 Full Year PSYC523 The Client: Diagnosis an~ Treatment I 20 Full Year PSYC524 The Client: Diagnosis and Treatment II 20 Full Year PSYC525 Professional Practice and Consultancy Skills I 20 Full Year PSYC526 Professional Practice and Consultancy Skills II 20 Full Year PSYC527 Research Methodology and Thesis I 20 Full Year PSYC528 Research Methodology and Thesis II 20 Full Year

129

SEerlON SEVEN

SCHEDULE - MASTER OF SCIENCE

1. A candidate for the degree of Master of Science may be enrolled in either the F&CUlty of Engineering orthe Faculty of Science and Mathematics. TheFacultyinwhichthecandidate is eruolled shall be responsible for the program.

2. (1) To be eligible for admission tocandidaturein the Faculty of Science and Mathemalics an applicant shall:

(a) have satisfied all the requirements for admission to the degree of Bachelor of Science with Honours Class I or Class IT oCthe University of Newcastle or to a degree, approved for this purpose by the Faculty Board of this or any other university; or

(b) have satisfied all the requirements for admission to the degree of Bachelor of Science of the University of Newcastle or other approved uni versit y and have completed such work and passed such examinations as the Faculty Board may have detennined and have achieved a standard at least equivalent to that required for admission to adegree of Bachelor with second class Honours in an appropriate subject; or

(c) in exceptional cases produce evidence of possessing such other qualifications as maybe approved by the Faculty Board on the recommendation ofthe Head of the Department in which the applicant proposes to carry out the program.

(2) To be eligible for admission to candidature in the Faculty of Engineering an applicant shall:

(a) have satisfied the requirements for admission to a degree with Honours in the University of Newcastle or other university approved for this purpose by the Faculty Board in the area in which the applicant proposes to carry out research; or

(b) have satisfied the requirements for admission to a degree in the University of Newcastle or other university approved for this purpose by the Faculty Board and have completed to the satisfaction of the Faculty Board such work and examinations as determined by the Faculty Board; or

(c) in exceptional cases produce evidence of possessing such other qualifications as maybe approved by the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Head of the Department in which the candidate proposes to carry out the program.

3. To qualify for admission to the degree a candidate shall complete to the satisfaction of the Faculty Board a program consisting of:

(a) such work and examinations as may be prescribed by the Faculty Board; and

(b) athesisembodying theresults of an original investigation or design.

4. The program shall be completed:

(a) in not less than two academic years except that, in the case of a candidate who has completed the requirements for adegree of Bachelor with Honours or a qUalification

130

PQSTGRADUA TE DEGREE RULES

deemed by the Faculty Boardto beequivalentorwhohas had previous research experience, the Faculty Board may reduce this period to not less than one academic year; and

(b) except with the permission of the Faculty Board, in not more than five years.

5. (1) Except with the permission of the Faculty Board, which shall be given only in special circumstances, apart-time candidate enrolled in the FacuIt y of Science and Mathematics shall:

(a) conduct the major proportion of the research or design work in the University; and

(b) take part in research seminars within the Department in which the program is being carried out.

(2) Except with the permission of the Faculty Board, a candidate enrolled in the Faculty of Engineering shall take part in the research seminars within the Department in which the program is being carried out.

SCHEDULE - MASTER OF SCIENTIFIC STUDIES


r

I

SECfION SEVEN

Code

ASTK695

ASTK696

ASTK697

ASTK698

EAMS695

EAMS696

EAMS697

EAMS698

B[0L695

BI0L696 B[0L697

BI0L698

CHEM695

CHEM696 CHEM697

CHEM698

GE0G695

GE0G696

GE0G697

GEOG698

GE0L695

GE0L696 GEOL697

GE0L698

MATH695

MATH696

Name Credit Points

Foundations of Applied 40 Science & Technology

Topics in Applied Science 40 & Technology Advanced Topics in Applied 40 Science & Teclmology Project 40

Foundations of Environmental 40 Asessment & Management

Topics in Environmental 40 Assessment & Management Advanced Topics in 40 Environmental Assessment & Management Project 40

Foundations of Biological 40 Sciences

Topics in Biological Sciences 40 Advanced Topics in 40 Biological Sciences Project 40

Foundations of Chemistry 40

Topics in Chemistry 40 Advanced Topics in Chemistry40

Project 40

Foundations of Geography 40

Topics in Geography 40

Advanced Topics in 40 Geography Project 40

Foundations of Geology 40

Topics in Geology 40 Advanced Topics in Geology 40

Project 40

Foundations of Mathematics 40

Topics in Mathematics 40

When OITered

S1,S2,FY

SI,S2,FY

Not in 1993 Not in 1993 SI,S2,FY

SI,S2,FY

Not in 1993

Not in 1993 SI,S2,FY

S1,S2,FY Not in 1993 Nolin 1993 SI,S2,FY

SI,S2,FY Not in 1993 Not in 1993 Not in 1993

Not in 1993 Not in 1993 Not in 1993 S1,S2,FY

Sl,S2,FY Not in 1993 Not in 1993 SI,S2, FY

SI,S2, FY


Prerequisite Corequisite

Appropriate undergraduate subjects ASTK695

ASTK696

ASTK696

Appropriate undergraduate subjects EAMS695

EAMS696

EAMS696

Appropriate undergraduate subjects BI0L695 BI0L696

Bl0L696

Appropriate undergraduate subjects CHEM695 CHEM696

CHEM696

Appropriate undergraduate subjects GEOG695

GEOG696

GE0G696

Appropriate undergraduate subjects GEOL695 GE0L696

GE0L696

Appropriate undergraduate subjects MATH695

131

SECfION SEVEN POSTGRADUA IE DEGREE RULES

Code Name Credit Points When Offered Prerequisite Corequisite

MATH697 Advanced Topics in 40 Nolin MATH696 Mathematics 1993

MATH698 Project 40 Not in MATH696 1993

PHY5695 Foundations of Physics 40 51,52, FY Appropriate undergraduate subjects

PHY5696 Topics in Physics 40 51,52,FY PHYS69$

PHY5697 Advanced Topics in Physics 40 Not in PHY5696 1993

PHY5698 Projecl 40 Nolin PHY5696 1993

P5YC695 Foundations of Psychology 40 Nolin Appropriate 1993 undergraduate

subjects

P5YC696 Topics in Psychology 40 Not in PSYC695 1993

PSYC697 Advanced Topics in 40 Not in P5YC696 Psychology 1993

PSYC698 Project 40 Not in P5YC696 1993

5TAT695 Foundations of Statistics 40 51,52, FY Appropriate undergraduate subjects

5TAT696 Topics in Statistics 40 51,52,FY 5TAT695 5TAT697 Advanced Topics in Statistics 40 Not in 5TAT696

1993 5TAT698 Project 40 Not in 5TAT696

1993

A candidate may pursue subjects in two disciplines with the approval of the Heads of both Departments and the Dean of the Faculty of Science and Mathematics.

132

SECTION EIGHT

POSTGRADUATE DEGREE SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS

Notes on Subject and Topic Descriptions The subject and topic outlines and reading liSIS which follow are set out in a standard fannat to facilitate easy reference. An explanation is given below of some of the technical tenns used in this Handbook.

Prerequisites are subjects which must be passed at a Pass grade or better before a candidate enrols in a particular subject. The onI y prerequisites noted for topics are any topics or subjects which must be taken before enrolling in the particular topic. To enrol in any subject which the topic may be part of, the prerequiSites for that subject must still be satisfied.

Where a prerequisite is marked as advisory ,lectures will be given on the assumption that the subject ortopic has been completed as indicated.

Corequisites for subjects or topics are those which the candidate must pass before enrolment or be taking concurrently.

Examination Under examination rules "examination" includes mid-year examinations, assignments, tests or any other work by which thefinalgradeof acandidate in a subject is assessed. Some attempt has been made to indicate for each subject how assessment is determined.

Texts are essential books recommended for purchase.

References are books relevant to the subject or topic which, however, need not be purchased.

LIST OF APPROVED SUBJECTS REFERRED TO IN HONOURS DEGREES IN THE FACULTY OF SCIENCE AND MATHEMATICS

Entry to an Honours degree requires a Credit or better average in appropriate 300 level subjects: see prerequisite requirements for relevant subjects.

APPLIED SCIENCE ENVIRONMENTAL ASSESSMENT AND MANAGEMENT

EAMS401 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT Wcp

Prerequisile EAMS301, EAMS311. Forty credit points level 300 EAMS obtaining at least a Credit grade average

AssesSfMnt (a) Two major essays

Content

(b) Presentation by each student of two seminar topics

(c) Satisfactory standard reached in a two hour written examination at the end of the year

Policy making in environmental assessment and management, administration in environmental management,

federal and state environmental legislation, role of relevant government agenci es and commissions, government policies and reports, national and international conventions, the roles of the UnitedNationsEnvironmentProgramandtheWoridCommission on Environment and Development, the professional practice of environmental management, procedures for consultancy. policy making in private industry, codes of ethics, the environmental audit, environmental risk analysis, trends in environmental management, the public consultation process, conflict resolution in environmental decision-ma1cing.

Text To be advised

References

Australian Government 1991, DiscussionPapersonEcologically Sustainable Development. Australian Government Printer, Canberra.

Carter, R. et at 1984, Systems Management and Change: A Graphic Guide. Milton Keynes. Open University Press.

133

SECfION EIGHT

Checkland, P.B. 1981, Systems Thinking, Systems Practice. Wiley. Chichester.

Dorney, L.C. 1987, The Professional Practice of Environmental Management. SpringerNerlag.

Folke. C. and Kaberger, T (008.) 1991. Linking ihe Natural Environment and the Economy: Essaysfrom the Eco-Eco Group. Kluwer Academic Publishers.Dordrecht.

World Commission on EnvironmentalandDevelopment (WCED) 1987, Our Common Future (The Brundtland Report). OUP.

Oxford.

Journals Journal of Environmental Management

Journal of Environmental Planning

The Environmentalist

EAMS402 SEMINAR SERIES

Corequisite EAMS401

20cp

Assessment (a) Presentation of a written paper based on each seminar topic 80%

(b) Satisfactory presentation of seminartopic 20%

Content

Attendance and participation at seminars with a written paper to be presented. Additionally. the student will prepare and present a seminar on an approved topic

References To be provided

List of Seminar Topics

Water Resources Management in Austra1ia

Principles and Practices of Wastewater Treatment and Disposal

Procedures

Radiation in the Environment

Exotic Plants and Associated Environmental Problems

Endangered Animals in Australia

Ethics in Environmental Decision-Making

Current Agricultural Practices in Australia and Land Degradation.

EAMS404 RESEARCH PROJECT 40 cp


AssessmentAn internal supervisor and an external examiner will assess the research project

Content

The project will describe research and findings on an original investigation approved by the supeIVisor

General

The project is worth 50% of the year's mark for Honours. It must be prepared in standard thesis fonnat, and include raw data, questionnaires, diagrams of experimental apparatus, computer programs, in appendices. Three unbound copies are to be submitted to the Department of Applied Science and Technology by 30 October. These copies will later be bound; one is retained by the student's supervisor, one is placed in the departmental library for future reference, and the third is returned to the student after fmal assessment has been made.

134

POSTGRADUArn SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS

AVIATION

AVIA401 A VIA TION HONOURS 401 20cp

Prerequisites B.Sc.(Aviation) with a Credit grade average or better in A VIA308. A VIA31 O. A VIA311 and A VIA314.


Examination Progres si ve assessment based upon written reports, seminar presentations and examination,

Content

Students will present seminars which relate to their project work in tenns of a review of literature and methodology. Attendance and participation is compulsory.

AVIA402 AVIATION RESEARCH & METHODOLOGY IOcp


Corequisite AVIA401.

Hours 6 hours per week for Semester 1.

Examination Progressive assessment based on seminar presentations, assignments and examination.

Content

Simple statistical procedures such as frequency distributions, cross-tabulations, correlations.t-tests. chi-sqUared tests andsimple ANOV As and regression will be introduced.

Reviews and reports of research will be discussed.

Also covered will be qualitative approaches such as self-reports, observational and action research and historical research. Casestudies, questionnaire construction and interview skills will be

covered.

AVIA403 TECHNOLOGY IN AVIATION IOcp

Prerequisites AVIA310, A VIA312 and AVIA313.

Hours 6 hours per week for Semester 1.

Examination Progressive examination based on seminars,

assignments and tests.

Conlenl

The subject is designed to permit wide interpretation and application to the range of related topics covered in the BSc (Aviation). These topics include aeronautical engineering, design, systems and flight operations such as flight planning, navigation

and meteorology.


A VIA404 THE HUMAN VARIABLE IN AVIATION IOcp

Prerequisites AVIA221 and AVIA311.

Hours 6 hours per week for Semester I.

Examination Progressive assessment based on seminars, assignments and examinations.

Content

This subJect is intended to pennit a range of interpretations to

SECfION EIGHT

enable students to make a study of an approved area in which the human variable in aviation is the focus. Such a focus includes ergonomics, aviation psychology. aviation medicine, instruction and learning.


AVIA40S AVIATION HONOURS - THESIS 40cp

Prerequisites B.Sc.(Aviation) with a Credit grade average or better in A VIA308. A VIA3! O. A VIA31! and A VIA3!4.

Corequisites A VIA401 and either AVIA403 or A VIA404.


Examination The thesis will be assessed by two Examiners one of whom may be external.

Content

A VIA405 is half the Honours in Aviation. It consists of the development, conduct, analysis and reporting of a piece of original empirical research. The thesis (of about 75 pages) formally presents this research in conventional fonnat.

Students are supervised by members of the Department of Aviation and are advised to discuss possible projects well in advance with potential supeIVisors. Nominated topics are submitted to a meeting of the staff of the Department of Aviation, chaired by the Head of Department. for approval.

BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES

BI0L401) BIOL402)

HONOURS IN BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES 40+40cp

Prerequisites 40 cpo Level 300 BIOL(orother300level subjects approved by Department), obtaining at least a Credit grade average.

Content

Carry out aresearch project and complete a thesis, essay, vivaand two seminars.

CHEMISTRY

CHEM40I) HONOURS IN CHEMISTRY CHEM402)

40+40cp

Prerequisites Completion of ordinary degree requirements and permission of the Head of Department. An average credit grade in at least four Level 300 chemistry subjects is the normal minimum entry requirement. It will be expected that a student undertaking project workin a particular area will have completed the corresponding Level 300 core subject at a minimum of credit grade. Students intending to undertake the Honours program should notify the Head of Department of their intention by I November in their final undergraduate year and confinn this as soon as final examination results are known.

Content

The Honours program extends overtwo semesters orits part-time equivalent and consists of

i) a course of advanced lectures (approximately 50 hours) (30%)

POSTGRADUA rn SUBJECf DESCRlPTIONS

ii) a reading list in the main area of interest (30%)

iii) a supervised research project, the results of which are embodied in a thesis and presented as a seminar (40%)

Examination Half each of the lecture course and the reading list will be examined at the end of semester one and the remainder at the end of the second semester. The thesis will be assessed by a committee of three (one of whom shall be the project supervisor) appointed by the Department. Part-time students will have their assessment spread accordingly over two academic years.

GEOGRAPHY Entry to an Honours degree requires a Credit or better grade average in appropriate 300 level subjects.

GEOG401) HONOURS IN GEOGRAPHY GEOG402)

40+4Ocp

Prerequisites GEOGI01 and GEOGI02 plus eitherGEOG201 and GEOG301 orGEOO202andGEQG302 including 30cp from 200 level and 40 cp from 300 GEOG level obtaining at least a Credit grade average.

To qualify for admission to Geography Honours, a student must normally have completed sufficient training in geographical methods (i.e.GEOG20! and GEOG30! for Physical Geography; GEOG202 and GEOG302 for Human Geography), have completed a Major in Geography that includes GEOGI01, GEOO I 02,30 credit points from level 200 courses and 40 credit points from level 300 courses. To proceed to Geography Honours a candidate must have obtained at least a Credit grade average in the 300 level Geography subjects taken for the major plus at least 20 other points at credit level in their university courses. The student must also satisfy the Head of the Department of her/his ability in the area of study within which the proposed research topic lies.


Examination External and internal examination of a research thesis, and internal assessment of the coursework.

COnlenl

A thesis embodying the results of an original investigation on a topic approved by the Head of Department and coursework as preSCribed.

Note A candidate who wishes to proceed to Honours should notify the Head of the Department by I October in the final year of the undergraduate degree and must confirm this as soon as final results for the year are known. Candidates are expected to commence work on their thesis after completion of their undergraduate degree.

GEOLOGY

GEOL40!) HONOURS IN GEOLOGY GEOL402)

4O+4Ocp

Prerequisites 40cp Level 300 GEOL obtaining at least a Credit grade average. For GE0L402, prerequisite of GE0L401, completion of ordinary degree requirements.

Hours To be advised.

\35

SECTION EIGHT

Examination

(i) a viva voce examination

(ii) research work carried out and its presentalion in a thesis

(iii) seminars, assignments

Content

Part A

Lecture·tutorial work. with directed reading in the following fields of geology: mineralogy and crystallography; geochemistry; igneous petrology; metamorphic petrology; coal petrology; sedimentology; stratigraphy, palaeontology; structural geology; economic geology~ engineering geology. Presentation of a seminar.

Not all fields will be available every year.

Part B

A research project, the results of which are to be embodied in a thesis, presentation of a seminar on the results of the research project.

PHYSICS

PHYS401) HONOURS IN PHYSICS PHYS402)

40+40cp

Prerequisites PHYS3D1 plus any otherthree PHYS300 subjects obtaining alleast a Credit grade average.

Hours PHYS401 and PHYS402 together comprise 115 hours of lectures plus a project.

Examination As required.

Con/ent

PHYS401 andPHYS402areintendedtogivestudentsanadvanced understanding of the fundamentals of modem physics appropriale for an Honours graduate in the discipline as well as exposure to the current interests of the Department viz. solid state physics, radar meteor physics, electromagnetic signal propagation and aspects of applied physics.

These aims will be achieved by offering 3 compulsory core topics, Quantum Mechanics. Theoretical Solid State Physics and Plasma Physics. and a number of optional topics. These lalter shall include Relativity. Applied Nuclear Physics. Surface Physics. Space Physics, Atomic collisions in Solids. Laser Physics, Fourier Transfonns, Ionospheric Physics and Particle Detection. While all of these topics may not be offered in any year, further topics may be available depending on visitors to the department.

T ex.ts As required.

PSYCHOLOGY

PSYC401) PSYCHOLOGY HONOURS 401 (SEMINARS) 40+40cp

PSYC402) PSYCHOLOGY HONOURS 402 (fHESIS)

136

POSTGRADUA 1E SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS

PSYC401 PSYCHOLOGY HONOURS 401 (SEMINARS) 40cp

Prerequisite A completed BA or BSc or three complete years of aBA(Psych) or BSc(Psych)including the subjects PSYC1 01 and PSYCI 02, alleast 40 credit points of Psychology al the 200 level including PSYC201. and alleast 60 credit points of Psychology al the 300 level including PSYC301 and PSYC302. Candidates must have obtained alleast a Credit gradein each off our 300 level Psychology subjects including PSYC301 and PSYC302.


ExaminaJion To be advised

Can/en!

PSYC401 comprises half of the final Honours in Psychology. Full-time students enrol in PSYC402 as well. Part-time students complete PSYC401 in the first year and PSYC402in the second. PSYC401 consists of five seminar series, including one compulsory unit on theoretical issues in Psychology, a choice of two units in mathemalical or physiological Psychology, and a choiceoftwounitsinappliedorsocial Psychology. Each unit will include seminars al which altendance and participation is compulsory, and will be assessed by essay, examinalion, oral presentation, or a combination. The exact topics of the seminars vary from year to year depending on staff availability. One seminar may be replaced with a practical placement and associated essay. There is some overlap with PSYC403.


PSYC402 PSYCHOLOGY HONOURS 402 (IHESIS) 40cp

Prerequisite A completed BA or BSc, or three complete years of a BA(Psych) or BSc(Psych) including the subjects PSYCIOI and PSYC102, at least 40 credit points of Psychology al the 200 level including PSYC201, and at least 60 credit points of Psychology al the 300 level including PSYC301 and PSYC302. Candidales must have obtained alleast a Credit grade in each of four 300 level Psychology subjects including PSYC301 and PSYeJ02.

Corequisite PSYC401


Examination Thesis will be assessed independently by the supervisor and by another member, or members of the Department.

Content

PSYC402 comprises half of the final Honours in Psychology. Full·time students enrol in PSYC401 as welL Part·time students complete PSYC401 in the first year and PSYC402in the second. PSYC402 consists of the development, conduct, analysis, and reporting of a piece of original empirical research. The thesis is afonnal presentalion of this research and must bein APA fonnal. There is a limit of fifty pages. Each student will be supervised by a member of the Psychology Department. Students are strongly advised to discuss potential projects with appropriale staff members well in advance. Involvement with external agencies must be through official departmental channels.


SECTION EIGHT

MATHEMATICS

MATH401) HONOURS IN MATHEMATICS 40+4Ocp MATH402)

Prerequisites Excellent results in amajor sequenceofMa1hematics subjects, including alleast 40 credit points al the 300 level, and favourable assessment by the Head of Department.

Hours At least 8 lecture hours per week over one full-time year or 4 lecture hours per week over two part-time years.

Examination At least eight 2 hour final papers, and a study under direction of a special topic using relevant published malerial and presented in written fonn. Work on this thesis normally starts early in February.

ContenJ

A selection of al least eight Malhematics topics. The topics offered may be from any branch of Malhematics including Pure Mathemalics, Applied Mathematics ,Statistics, Com puter Science and Operations Research as exemplified in the pUblication Mathematical Reviews. Summaries of some topics are given later in this section of the Handbook, listed as "500 level subjects ". but the Department should be consulted for further details, including the current list of other topics which are not available as"500 level subjects".

Students desiring admission to this subject should apply in writing to the Head of the Department before 20 December of the preceding year. A meeting will be held on the first Tuesday ofthe first semester in room V107 al 1.00p.m. to detennine both the timetable for topics, and which topics will be covered.

HONOURS COURSE IN STATISTICS 80cp

This is a level 400 course consisting of several course work subjects and a project.

Prerequisite 40 credit points from Level 300 subjects offered by the Department of Statistics obtaining al least a Credit grade average.

Content

Students are required to take subjects worth 40·60 credit points of which al least 3 subjects must be chosen from Level 400 subjects offered by the Department of Statistics.

Students are also required to complete project work which can be worth 20, 30 or 40 credit points. to be detennined by consultation with the Head of the Department. The results of the project are to be presented in a thesis. The project may be a practical one involving the analysis of dala, or a theoretical one. Work on the project normall y starts early in February. Leve! 400 units which may be offered are:

Credit Points

STAT401 PROBABILITY THEORY 10

STAT402 ANALYSIS OF CATEGORICAL DATA 10

STAT403 DEMOGRAPHY AND SURVIVAL ANALYSIS 10

STAT404 ROBUST REGRF.sSION AND SMOOTHING 10

POSTGRADUATE SUBJEIT DESCRIPTIONS

Credit PoinJs

STAT405

STAT406

STAT407

STATISTICAL CONSULTING

METHODS FOR QUAUTY IMPROVEMENT

ADVANCED TOPICS IN STATISTICS

10

10

10

STAT40S·11 PROJECf 10,20. 30 or 40

LEVEL 400 STATISTICS SUBJECTS

STAT401 PROBABILITY THEORY IOcp

Prerequisite Fortycredit pointslevel300ST AT subjects obtaining alleast a Credit grade average.

This is a rigorous course on the mathemalical theory of probability, presenting techniques and theory needed to establish limit theorems. The applications of such techniques are spread throughout the discipline of Stalistics.

Topics covered include: elementary measure theory, random variables. expectalion. the characteristic function, modes of convergence, laws of large numbers. central limit theorems,law of the iterated logarithm.

References

Billingsley. P. 1979, Probability and Measure, Wiley.

Breiman, L. 1968. Probability Addison-Wesley.

Chung, K.L. 1974, A course in Probability Theory. 2nd edn, Academic Press.

Dudley, R.M. 1989,Real Analysis & Probability, Wadsworth & Brook.

Moran,P.A.P.I968,1984,Anln/roductiontoProbabilityTheory, Oxford University Press.

STAT402 ANALYSIS OF CATEGORICAL DATA IOcp

Prerequisite Forty credit points level 300 STAT subjects obtaining at least a Credit grade average.

The course will discuss the analysis of categorical data. It will begin with a thorough coverage of 2 x 2 tables before moving on to larger (r x c) contingency tables. Topics to be covered include probability models for categorical data, measures of association, measures of agreement, the Mantel·Haenszel method for combining tables, applications oflogistic regression and loglinear models.

References

Agresti, A. 1990, Categorical data analysis Wiley.

Bishop. Y .M.M., Feinberg, S.E. etal.1975 ,Discrete MuitivariaJe Analysis: Theory and Practice, MIT Press.

Reiss. J.L. 1982. Statistical Methods for Rates and Proportions. 2nd edn. Wiley.

STAT403 DEMOGRAPHY AND SURVIVAL AJliALYSIS IOcp

Prerequisite Fortycredit pointslevel300ST A Tsubjectsobtaining alleast a Credit grade average.

137

SECI'ION EIGHT

This course presents a malhemalical treatment of the techniques used in population projections, manpower studies, and the survival models used in demography and biostatistics.

Text

Lawless, J. 1982,statistical Models and Methods for Lifetime Data. Wiley.

References

Cox, D.R and Oakes, D. 1984,AnalysisofSurvival DataChapman & Hall.

Elandt-Johnson, R.C. and Johnson, N.L. 1980, Survival Models and Data Analysis Wiley.

Kalbfleisch,J.D. and Prentice, R.L. 1980, TIw Statistical Analysis of Failure Time Data ,Wiley.

Keyfitz, N.1977,Applied Matlwmatical Demography, Wiley.

Keyfitz, N. 1 %8,lntroduction to tlw Matlwmatics of Population Addison-Wesley.

Pollard, J.H. 1975. Matlwmatical Models for tlw Growth of Human Populations Cambridge U.P.

STAT404 ROBUST REGRESSION AND SMOOTHING lOcp

Prerequisite Fan y credit points level300 ST AT subjects obtaining at least a Credit grade average.

The main theme is the use of the computer to fit models to data when the assumptions of traditional models may not be satisfied or when it is not known in advance what form of model is appropriate. Topics to be covered include: concepts of robustness, L,-, M- and high breakdown estimation in linear regression, scatterplot smoothers (e.g. ACE, LOESS and splines), kernel regression and methods for choosing the amount of smoothing, and radically different approaches (e.g. CART and projection pursuit).

Text

Staudte, R.G.and Sheather, S.J. 1990, Robust Estinultion and T eSling , Wiley.

References

Eubank, R.L. 1988, Spline Smoothing and Nonparametric Regression M. Dekker.

Hampel, F.R. Ronchetti, E.M. et al. 1986, Robust Statistics: tlw Approach Based on Influence Functions, Wiley,

Hlirdle, W. 1990,AppiiedNonparametricRegression Cambridge University Press. 1991, Smoothing Techniques: with impiemenJation in S Springer.

Rousseeuw, P.I. and Leroy, A.M. 1987 ,Robust Regression and OUliier Detection .

STAT405 STATISTICAL CONSULTING lOcp

Prerequisite Fortycredit pointslevel300ST A T subjects obtaining at least a Credit grade average.

The aim of this course is to develop both the statistical and nonstatistical skills required for a successful consultant. The course includes a study of the consulting literature, a review of

138

POSTGRADUA 1E SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS

commonly-used statistical procedures, problem formulation and solving, analysis of data sets, report writing and oral presentation, role-playing and consulting with actual clients.

STAT406 METHODS FOR QUALITY IMPROVEMENT lOcp

PrerequisiJe Fortycreditpointslevel300STATsubjectsobtaining at least a Credit grade average.

The course will cover the concepts of total quality management, the Deming philosophy and relevant statistical techniques. Simple methods such as flow charts and Pareto diagrams will becovered, in addition to the various types of control charts and process capability analysis. Modem experimental design techniques for optimizing process performance will be included. The course is a practical one, and the issues involved in actually implementing aquality and productivity improvement program in an organization will be addressed.

Course readings provided.

STAT407 ADVANCED TOPICS IN STATISTICS lOcp

Prerequisite Fortycredit pointslevel300STATsubjects obtaining at least a Credit grade average.

This course consists of four modules that are selected from the following topics:

Multivariate methods; randomization, bootstrapping and other com puterintensive methods; analysis of repeated measurements; sample size estimation, analysing large data sets; meta-analyses.

STAT408 Project (10 credit points)

Prerequisite Fortycredit pointslevel300ST AT subjects obtaining at least a Credit grade average.


Prerequisite Fortycredit pointslevel300ST A Tsubjectsobtaining at least a Credit grade average.


Prerequisite Forty credit pointsleve1300STAT subjects obtaining at least a Credit grade average.


Prerequisite Fortycredit pointslevel300ST AT subjectsobtaining at least a Credit grade average.

COMBINED HONOURS SUBJECTS

MATH401) HONOURS IN MATHEMATICS GEOL401) AND GEOLOGY 4O+4Ocp

Prerequisites Completion of ordinary degree requirements obtaining at least a Credit grade average in 40 credit points level 300 MATH/GEOL subjects and permiSSion of the Heads of the Departments of Geology and Mathematics

Conlenl

At least 40 credit points chosen from those available to Honours students in Mathematics together with work equal to 40 credit

SECTION EIGHT

points at 400 Level offered by the Department of Geology. Geology 401 will also include a major thesis which embodies the results of a field research project involving the application of mathematical studies to a particular geological problem. Other work eg seminars and assignments may be required by either Department.

MATH401) HONOURS IN MATHEMATICS ECON401) AND ECONOMICS 40+40cp

Prerequisites See entry for each subject and consult the Head of both Departments.

MATH401) HONOURS IN MATHEMATICS PHYS401) AND PHYSICS 40+40cp


MATH401) HONOURS IN MATHEMATICS PSYC401) AND PSYCHOLOGY 40+40cp


POSTGRADUATE AND HIGHER DEGREE SUBJECTS IN GEOGRAPHY

MASTER OF ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES

GEOG491 ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES SEMINAR 1 (F.Y.) 20cp

Introduction to environmental assessment, management and decision making using specific examples from the Hunter Region, such as waste management, total catchment management and recreational management. The second semester is devoted to the rationale and methodology of environmental impact assessment and a study of the environmental planning system.

GEOG492 ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES MINOR PROJECT (FY) lOcp

Project under individual supervision required forthe Diplomain Environmental Studies. The topic is determined by the student's interest and background.

GEOG591 ENVIRONMENTAL STUDlF..5 MAJOR PROJECT I (F.Y.) 30cp

One-half of the project under individual supervision required for the Master of Environmental Studies. Simultaneous enrolment with GEOG592 required to full time students. Part-time students may take GEOG591 and GEOO592 in separate years. The topic is determined by the student's interest and background.

GEOG592 ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES MAJOR PROJECT" (F.Y.) 30cp

One-half of the project under individual supervision required for the Master of Environmental Studies. Simultaneous enrolment withGEOO591 required for full time students. Part-time students may take GEOG591 and GEOO592 in separate years. The topic is determined by the student's interest and background.

POSTGRADUA 1E SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS

GEOG594 ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES SEMINAR 2 (F.Y.) 20cp

Continuation of the evaluation of environmental assessment. management and decision making from GEOG491 , using specific examples from the Hunter Region. This course is required for Master of Environmental Studies students. The second semester is devoted to group development and application of a conflict resolution model. with a formal presentation of the results to the Board of Environmental Studies.

GEOG595 DIRECTED ENVIRONMENTAL STUDY 1 (F.Y.) lOcp

GEOG596 DIRECTED ENVIRONMENTAL STUDY 2 (F.Y.) lOcp

Directed research and readings courses under individual supervision for students with specific interests or needs in the area of Environmental Studies.

MATHEMATICS POSTGRADUATE AND HIGHER DEGREE SUBJECTS IN MATHEMATICS

Nole: A meeting will be held on the first Tuesday of the first semester in Room VIO? at 1.00 pm to detennine both the ti metable for these subjects and which of them are to be offered for the year.

Other subjects than those listed here will be offered from time to time, and even at short notice by visitors to the Department. Intending students should consult the Department early in the year regarding these su bjects.

MATH501 ASTROPHYSICAL APPLICATIONS OF MAGNETOHYDRODYNAMICS lOcp

Prerequisites Background in Calculus and Partial Differential Equations.

/lours About 27 Lecture hours - Full year.


COnlenl

The normal state of matter in the universe is that of a plasma, or ioni7..ed gas, penneated by magnetiC fields. Moreover, these fields (unlike that of the earth) may be dominant. or at least significant, in controlling the structure of the region. The aim of this course is to investigate the effects of astrophysical magnetic fields.

References

Chandrasekhar, S. 1961, Hydrodynamic and /lydromagnetic Stability, Oxford.

Cowling, T.G. 1957, Magnetohydrodynamics, Interscience.

Dejong, T. & Maeder, A.(eds.) 1977 ,Star Formation, D. Reidel.

Mestel, L. 1975. Effects of Magnetic Fields Mem.Sc.Roy.Sci. Liege (6) 8 79.

Moffatt, H.K. 1978, Magnetic Field Generation in Electrically Conducting Fluids CUP.

139

SECfION EIGHT

Spiegel, B.A. & Zahn, J.P.(eds)1976, Problems of Stellar Convection, Springer.

MATH502 BANACH ALGEBRA


Hours About Z7 lecture hours - Semester 2.


Content

10cp

A Banach Algebra is a mathematical structure where the two main strands of pure mathematical study -the topological and the algebraic - are united in fruitful contact. The course will cover the following subject matter. Nonned algebras; regular and singular elements; the spectrum of an element and its properties; the Gelfand-Mazur theorem; topological divisors of zero; the spectral radius and spectral mapping theorem for polynomials; ideals and maximal ideals. Commutative Banach algebras; the Gelfand theory and the Gelfand representation theorem. Weak: topologies, the Banach-Alaoglu theorem, the Gelfand topology. Involutions in Banach algebras; hermitian involutions; the Gelfand-Naimark representation theorem for commutive B* algebras. Numerical range of an element in a nonned algebra; relation of the numerical range to the spectrum; B* algebras are symmetric, discussion of the Gelfand-Naimark representation theorem for B* algebras. Applications of Banach algebra theory.

Text

Zelazko, W. 1973, Banach Algebras, Elsevier.

References

Bachman,G. & Narici, L. 1966,FunctionaiAnalysis Academic.

Bonsall, F.F. & Duncan, J. 1973, Complete Normed Algebras, Springer.

Bonsall, F.F. & Duncan,J. 1970,NumericaiRangesofOperators onNormedSpacesandElementsojNormedAlgebras, Cambridge.

Naimark, M.A. 1959, Normed Rings, Noordhoff.

Rickart, C.E. 1960, General Theory of Banach Algebras, Van Nostrand.

Rudin, W. 1973, Functional Analysis, McGraw-Hill.



MATH503 CONVEX ANALYSIS


Hours About 27 lecture hours - Semester 2.


Conlenl

lOcp

Convexity has become an increasingly important concept in analysis: much of current research in functional analysis concerns generaiising to convex functions, properties previously studies for the norm; much of interest in convexity has arisen from areas of applied mathematics related to fixed point theory and optimisation problems. We begin with a study of convex sets and functions defined on linear spaces: gauges of convex sets,

140


separation properties. We then study topology on linear spaces generated by convex sets: metrisability, nonnability and finite dimensional cases. We examine continuity and separation for locally convex spaces, continuity for convexity properties and Banach-Alaoglu Theorem. We study extreme points of convex sets, the Krein- Milman theorem. We give particular attention to the study of differentiation of convex functions on nonned linear spaces: Gateaux and Frechet derivative, Mazur's and Asplund's theorems.

Text

Giles, }.R. 1982, Convex Analysis with Application in the Differenliation of Convex Functions, Pitman.

References

Barbu, V. & Precupanu, T. 1978, Convexity and OptimiZalion in Banach Spaces, Sijthoff & Noordhoff.

Clarke, F.H.1983,Optimizationandnon-smcothanalysis, Wiley.

Day, M.M. 1973, Normed Linear Spaces ,Springer.

Diestel, J. 1975, Geometry ojBanachSpaces-SelectedTopics • Springer.

Ekeland, I. & Ternan, R. 1976, Convex Analysis and Variational Problems North Holland.

Giles, J.R. 1978, AfILllysis ofNormed Linear Spaces, Univ. of Newcastle.

Holmes, R.B. 1975, Geometric Functional Analysis and its Applications, Springer.

Roberts, A.W. & Varberg, D.E. 1970, Convex Functions • Academic.

Rockafeller, R.T. 1970, Convex Analysis ,Princeton.

Rudin, W. 1973, Functional AfILllysis , McGraw-Hill.

Valentine, F.A. 1964, Convex Sets, McGraw-Hill.


MATHS04 FLUID STATISTICAL MECHANICS IOcp

Hours Aboul 27 lecture hours - Semester 2.


Content

Cluster-diagrammatic expansions - low density solutions; integrodifferential equations (BGY, HNC, PY) - high density solutions; quantum liquids - Wu-Feenburg fermion extension; numerical solution of integral equations; phase transitions -diagrammatic approach; critical phenomena; the liquid surface; liquid metals; liquid crystals; molecular dynamics and Monte Carlo computer sim ulati on; irreversibility; trans port phenomena Polymeric systems.

Text

Croxton, C.A. 1975, introductiontoLiquidState Physics, Wiley.

Reference

Croxton, C.A. 1974, Liquid State Physics - A Statistical Mechanical Introduction , Cambridge.

SECfION EIGHT

MATH505 FOUNDATIONS OF MODERN DIFFERENTIAL GEOMETRY 10cp

Prerequisite MATH201, MATH202 and MATH203.



Content

This topic will introduce basic concepts of the local theory of differentiable manifolds. Vector fields, differential fonns, and their mapping. Frobenius' theorem. Fundamental properties of Lie groups and Lie algebras. General linear group. Principle and associated fibre bundles. Connections. Bundle of linear frames, affine connections. Curvature and torsion. Metric, geodesics. Riemannian manifolds.

References

Auslander, L. 1967, Differenlial Geometry, Harper & Row.

Chevalley, C. 1946, Theory of Lie Groups, VoU, Princeton.

Kobayashi, S. & Nomizu, K. 1963, Foundations of Differential Geometry, Vol.l, Interscience .

MATH506 HISTORY OF ANALYSIS TO AROUND 1900 10cp

Hours About 27 lecture hours - Full year.

ExamiflLltion One 2 hour paper.

Content

A course of lectures on the history of mathematics with emphasis on analysis. Other branches of mathematics will be referred to for putting the analysis into context. Where feasible, use will be made of original material, in translation. The course will be assessed by essays and a final 2-hour examination.

Topics to be covered include: pre-Greek concepts of exactness and approximation; Greek concepts of continuity, irrationality, infinity, infinitesimal, magnitude, ratio, proportion and their treatment in Elements V, XII and the works of Archimedes; developments of number systems and thei requivalents; scholastic mathematics; virtual motion; Renaissance quadrature/cubature by infinitesimals and by "geometry"; Cartesian geometry; 17th and 18th century calculus; rigorization of analysis in the 19th century with stress on the developments of number systems, continuity, function concept, differentiability, integrability.

Rejerences Lists will be presented during the course.

Students interested in this or other topics on aspects of the History of Mathematics should approach the lecturer concerned as soon as possible.

MATH507 LINEAR OPERATORS

Prerequisites MATH310 and MATH311.



Content

10cp

The theory of linear operators on Hilbert and Banach spaces is an important theory particularly because of its applications to many areas of pure and applied science. We consider further aspects of


normed linear space theory, the algebra of continuous linear operators on a nonned linear space, the spectrum and numerical range of a continuous linear operator, and conjugate operators. We discuss the theory of compact linear operators and the RieszSchauderTheory for such operators. The course concentrates on spectral theory for different types of operator on Hilbert space: compact normal, self -adjoint and normal operators.

References

Bachman, G.& Narici, L. 1966, FunctioflLll Analysis paperback, Academic.

Brown, A. & Page, A. 1970, Elements of Functional Analysis, VanNostrand.

Dunford,N. &SchWarlS,J. 1958/....inearOperators ,Interscience.

Halmos, H. A 1967, Ililbert space Problem Book, VanNostrand.

Kreysig, E. 1978, Introduction to Functional Analysis with Applications, Wiley.

Rudin, W. 1973, Functional Analysis, McGraw-Hill.

Taylor, A.E. & Lay, D.C. 1980, inlroduction to Functional Analysis, Wiley.

MATH50S MATHEMATICAL PHYSIOLOGY IOcp



Content

Physiology - Lbe study of how the body works based on the knowledge of how it i:) constructed - essentially dates from early in the seventeenlh century when the English physician Harvey showed that blood circulates constantly through the body. The intrusion of engineering into this field is well known through the wide publicity given to (for example) heart by-pass and kidney dialysis machines, cardiac assist pace-makers, and prosthetic devices such as hip and knee joints; the obviously beneficial union has led to the establishment of Bioengineering Departments within Universities and Hospitals. Perhaps the earliest demonstration of mathematics' useful application in (some areas of) physiology is the mid-nineteenth century derivation by Hagen, from the basic equations of continuum motion, of Poiseuille's empirical f onnula for flow through narrow straight tubes; detailed models of the cardiovascular circulatory system have recently been developed. Mathematical models have also beenformulated for actions such as coughing, micturition and walking, as well as forthe more vital processes involved in gas exchange in the lungs, mass transport between lungs and blood and blood and tissue, metabolic exchanges within tissues, enzyme kinetics, signal conduction along nerve fibres, spenn transport in the cervix. Indeed, mathematical engineering might now be said to be part of lhe conspiracy to produce super humans (e.g. see "Fast Running Tracks" in Dec. 1978 issue of Scientific American).

This course will examine in some detail a few of the previously mentioned mathematical models; relevant physiological material will be introduced as required.

References

Bergel, D.H. (cd.) 1972, Cardiovascular Fluid Dynamics (Vols I & II) Academic.

141

SECfION EIGHT

Caro,e.G., Pedley, T.J. 1978, TM MechanicsoftM Circulation, Oxford.

Christensen, H.N. 1975, Biological Transport, W.A. Benjamin.

Fung, Y.e. 1984, Biodynamics: Circulation, Springer.

Fung, Y.C. 1981,Biomechanics: MechanicalPropertiesofLiving Tissues Springer.

Fung, Y.c., Perrone,N. & Anliker,M. (eds.) 1972,Biomechanics Its Foundations and Objectives, Prentice-Hall.

Lightfoot, E.N. 1974, Transport PMnomenaandLiving Systems , Wiley.

Margaria, R. 1976, Biomechanics and Energetics of Muscular Exercise Clarendon.

Pedley, T.J. 1980, The Fluid Mechanics of Large Blood Vessels, Cambridge.

West, J.B. (ed.) 1977, Bioengineering Aspects of the Lung Marcel Dekker.

MATH509 NONLINEAR OSCILLATIONS IOcp

Prerequisite MATH304, MATH205

HOUTS About 27 lecture hours - Full year


ConJenJ

Physica1 problem soften give ri se to ordinary differential equations which have oscillatory solutions. This course will be concerned with the existence and stability of periodic solutions of such differential equations, and will coverthefollowing subjects; twodimensional autonomous systems, limit sets, and the PoincareBendixson theorem. Brouwer's fixed point theorem and its use in finding periodic solutions. Non-critical linear systems and their perturbations. The method of averaging. Frequency locking, jump phenomenon, and subharmonics. Bifurcation of periodic solutions. Attention will be paid to applications throughout the course.

References

Hale, J.K. 1969, Ordinary DijJerenJial Equations, Wiley.

Hirsch, M.W. & Smale, S. 1974, Differential Equations, Dynamical Systems and Linear Algebra, Academic.

Marsden,J.E. & McCracken, M. 1976,TheHopfBifurcationand its Applications, Springer.

Nayfeh, A.H. & Mook, D.T. 1979, Nonlinear Oscillations , Wiley.

Stoker, J.1. 1950, Nonlinear Vibrations, Wiley.

MATH510 PERTURBATION THEORY

Prerequisites MATH201, 2m, 304.

HOUTS About 27 lecture hours - Semester 1.


ConJenJ

lOcp

Regular perturbation methods, including parameter and coordinate perturbations. A discussion of the sources of nonunifonnity in perturbation expansions. The method of strained coordinates and

142

POSTGRADUATE SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS

the methods of matched and composite asymptotic expansions. The method of multiple scales.

References

Bender, C.M. & Orszag, S.A. 1978, Advanced Math2matical Methodsfor ScienJists and Engineers, McGraw-Hill.

Cole, J.D. 1968, Perturbation Methods inAppJied Mathematics, Blaisdell.

Nayfeh, A.H. 1981, Introduction to Perturbation Techniques, Wiley.

Nayfeh, A.H. 1970, Perturbation Methods Wiley.

VanDyke, M. 1975, Perturbation Methods in Fluid Mechanics , Parabolic.

MATH511 QUANTUM MECHANICS

Hours About 27 lecture hours -Semester 2.


COnJenJ

IOcp

Operators; Schrodinger equation; one dimensional motion; parity; harmonic oscillator; angular momentum; central potential; eigenfunction; spinand statistics; Rutherford scattering; scattering theory phase shift analysis; nucleon-nucleon interaction; spindependent interaction; operators and stale vectors; Schrodinger equations of motion; Heisenberg equation of motion. Quantum molecular orbitals; hybridization; LCAO theory; MO theory.

Texts

Croxton, C.A. 1974,lntroductoryEigenphysics, Wiley.

Matthews, P.T. 1968, inJroduction to QuanJwn Mechanics, McGraw-Hill.

MATH512 RADICALS & ANNIHILATORS IOcp

Prerequisite MA TH312

Hours About 27 lecture hours - Full year


COnJenJ

This topic will briefly outline the classical theory of finite dimensional algebras and the emergence of the concepts of radica1, idempotence, ring, chain conditions, etc. Hopefully thus set in perspective, the next part will deal with the Artin-HopkinsJacobson ring theory and the significance of oth.er radicals when finiteness conditions are dropped. The relations between various radicals, noetherian rings, left and right annihilators and the Goldie-Small theorems will end the topic.

References

Cohn, P. 1977,Algebra Vol. 2, Wiley.

Divinsky, N. 1964, Rings and Radicals, Allen-Unwin.

l-ierstein, IN. 1968, Non-commutative Rings, Wiley.

Kaplansky, I. 1969, Fields and Rings, Chicago.

McCoy, N. 1965, The Theory of Rings ,McMillan.

MATH513 SYMMETRY

Prerequisite Some knowledge of Linear Algebra.

IOcp

SECfION EIGHT

Hours About 27 lecture hours -Semester 1.


ConJenJ

lbis course studies various aspects of symmetry. Matters discussed may include: invariance of lattices, crystals and associated functions and equations; pennutalion groups; finite geometries; regular and strongly-regular graphs; de~igns; tactical configurations, "classical" simple groups, Matrix groups, representalions, characters.

References

Biggs, N.L and White, A.T. 1979, Permutation Groups and Combinatorial Structures, Cambridge.

Carmichael, R.D. 1984, Groups of Finite Order, Dover reprint.

Harris, D.C. & Bertolucci, M.D.1978, Symmetry and Spectroscopy, Oxford.

Rosen, J. 1975, Symmetry Discovered, Cambridge.

Shubnikov, A.V. & Koptsik, V.A. 1974, Symmetry in Science and Art, Plenum Press.

Weyl, H. 1973, Symmetry, Princeton.

White,A.T. 1973, Graphs, GroupsandSurfaces North-Holland.

MATH514 VISCOUS FLOW THEORY

Prerequisites MATH 306, MATH305.



ConJenJ

IOcp

Basic equations. Some exact solutions of the Navier-Stokes equations. Approximate solutions: theory of very slow motion, boundary layer theory, etc.

References

Batchelor, G.K. 1967, An Introduction to Fluid Dynamics, Cambridge.

Landau, LD. & lifshitz, E.M. 1959, FluidMechanics, Pergamon.

Langlois, W.E 1964, Slow Viscous Flow, Macmillan.

Pai, S.1. 1956. Viscous Flow Theory Vol.!, Van Nostrand.

Rosenhead, L. (ed.) 1963, Laminar Boundary Layers, Oxford.

Schlichting, H. 1968, Boundary Layer Theory, McGraw-Hill.

Ternan, R. Navier-Stokes 1976, Equations - Theory and Nwnerical Analysis, North Holland.

MATH515 GEOMETRICAL MECHANICS IOcp

Recommended Companion Foundations of Modem Differential Geometry.



ConJenJ

For all but the simplest systems Lagrangian or Hamiltonian formulations of mechanics are vastly superior (albeit equivalent) to Newton's equations. Initially the course will introduce

POSTGRADUATE SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS

Lagrangian and Hamiltonian fonnulations, and apply them to systems of particles with constraints and to rigid-body systems.

Thesecond part of the course will present Ute modem geometrical formulations of Lagrangian and Hamiltonian mechanics. An ab initio introduction will be given to smooth vector fields and their flows, differential fonns, the tangent and cotangent bundles. Lagrangian mechanics will then be presented in tenus of flowson the tangent bundle of configuration space, with Hamiltonian mechanics taking place on the cotangent bundle.

If time (and student interest) permits topics that might be touched upon include: Hamilton-Jacobi theory, action-angle variables, approximation methods, classical field theory, geometrical quanti sat ion.

References

Arnold, V.I. 1978, GeometricalmethodsofClassicalMechanics, Springer.

Abraham, R., Marsden, J.E. 1978, Foundations of Mechanics, Benjamin/Cummings.

Crampin, M. , Pirani, F.A.E. 1986, Applicable Differential Geometry, CUP.

(and others to be advised).

MATH516 CONCRETE GROUP THEORY IOcp

Prerequisites MATl1211.



ContenJ

A course on some aspects of group construction, which will include discussion of: presentation of a group by generators and relations; presentation of a group as a group of penuutations, and as a symmetry group or structure-preserving group; relations bet ween groups and some geometrical objects; representation of a group as a group of matrices; construction of groups in various ways from known groups; constructions preserving varietal and categorical properties; construction of "generating" groups of certain classes.

References

Burrow, M. 1965, Representation Theory of Finite Groups, Academic Press.

Coxeter, H.S.M. & Moser, W.O.J. 1957, GeneratorsandReiLJtions for Discrete Groups, Springe.

Feit, W.1. 1969,Clulracters of Finite Groups, Benjamin.

Hall, Jr, M. 1962, The Theory of Groups ,Macmillan.

KUTOsh, A.G. 1960, The TMory of Groups Vols.1 & II Chelsea, Tr.& ed. K.A. Hirsch.

and other articles and books mentioned during the course.

MATH517 ANALYSIS OF TOPOLOGICAL STRUCTURES

Prerequisites MATH205.



lOcp

143

SECTION EIGHT

Content

A topolo&ical space is the most basic structure for analysis study. We develop separation axioms, including Urysohn's Lemma, countable base properties, product and quotient topologies, compactness and Tychonotrs Theorem. Toliok to metric spaces we outline Ute basic metrisation theorem.

We then study linear topologies and their special properties,local bases and locally convex topologies, the metrisation and normability theorems. Gauges and Polars. The Hahn Banach Separation Properties are developed. The theory is applied to the study of weak topologies on Banach spaces, the Banach-Alaoglu Theorem and Goldstine Theorems.

References

Giles, J.R.1982. Con ... ex Analysis with Application in tM DijferentiaJion ofCon ... ex Functions I Pitman.

Jameson, GJ.O.1974, Topology and NormedSpaces, Chapman & Hall.

Kelly, J.L. 1955. General topology, Van Nostrand.

Kelly J.L. & Namioka, 1..1965, Linear topological spaces, Van Nostrand.

Robertson, A.P. & W.J. 1964, Topological veclor spaces, Cambridge.

Simons, G.F. 1963,lnJroductiontotopologyandmodernanalysis, McGraw-Hill.

Taylor, A.E. & Lay, D.C. 1980, Introduction to Functional Analysis, 2nd edn, Wiley.

Wilansky, A. 1978,Modernmethods in topological vector spaces, McGraw-Hill.

Wilansky, A. 1964, Functional Analysis. Blaisdell.

Willard, S. 1970, General topology, Addison-Wesley.

MATH518 LIE GROUPS AND ALGEBRAS WITH APPLICATIONS TO DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS IOcp


Hours Approximately 27 lecture hours - Semester 1.


Contem

Introduction to lie groups, manifolds, vector fields and Lie algebras. Symmetry groups of differential equations, prolongations, group calculations and integration. Group invariant solutions, classification, quotient manifolds. Conservation laws and groups. Generalized symmetries and recursion operators.

MATH519 GENERAL RELATIVITY lOcp Recommended Companion Foundations of Modem Differential Geometry.

Hours Approximately 27 lecture hours - Semester 1.


Contem

This topic presents an introduction to general relativity - the

144

POSTGRADUAlE SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS

current theory of gravitation. The subject will be presented usin, methods of modem differential geometry. Relativity may be (and will be) regarded as a special application of pseudo·Riemannilll geometry, where the manifold, here space-time, has a metric thal is not positive definite.

Particles, fluids and electromagnetic fields will be introduced into arbitrary space-times. It will then be shown how these sources of "malter" can generate the geometry of space-time via Einstein's field equations. Applications of the theory will include introductions to black holes and to relativistic cosmology.

References

O'Neill, Barrett. 1983, Semi-Riemannian Geometry with applications to Relativity, Academic.

Hawking, S.W. & Ellis, G.F.R. 1973. TM lArge scale structure of space-lime Cambridge.

OtMrs to be advised.

MATH520 C' - ALGEBRAS Hkp



Conlent

The object of the course is to explain the basic properties of C"'algebras, and to see some of the ways they arise in different areas of mathematics. We aim to minimise the technical background required, and to assume onI y a very basic background in functional analysis.

We start with a brief look at the mOre general Banach algebras, where we discuss the basic properties of the spectrum, and the Gelfandtransform, whichembedsacommutativeBanachalgebra in an algebra of continuous functions. The Gelfand-Naimark theorem says that, when the algebra is a C"'-a1gebra, the Gelfand trWlsform is an isomorphism, and we shall look at this theorem and its applications in operator theory. We shall then discuss representations of C*-a1gebras -roughly speaking, the ways of realising an abstract C*-a1gebra as an algebra of operators on Hilbert space. There is a general construction which shows this can always be done-due to GelfWld, Naimark and Segal-but we shall focus on the way in which C*-algebras are used in the representation theory of groups and dynamical systems.

References

Conway, J.n. 1985, A Course in Functional Analysis, SpringerVerlag.

Murphy, G.J. 1990, C* -algebrasand Operator Theory, Academic Press.

Tomiyama, J. 1987, Invitation to C*-algebras and topological dynamics, World Scien.

MATH521 CLIFFORD ALGEBRAS AND Sl'lNORS IOcp

Hours Approx. 27 hours- Full Year.


Contenl

Clifford called the algebras that now bear his name "geometrical

SECTION EIGHT

algebras". This is because these algebras are tailored to the geometry of an orthogonal space. These algebras area vehicle for the study of the (pseudo) orthogonal groups and their simply connected covers the Spin groups.

The Clifford algebras are useful examples of associative linear algebras. They will be used as a paradigm in the study of such algebras. Thecourse will include Wedderbum'sstructure theorem for semi-simple associative algebras and Froberuus' theorem for real division algebras.

The orthogonal and Spin groups will provide concrete examples of Lie groups. Their representations will be studied. In particular the irreducible representations of the various Spin groups, the spinor representations, will be classified.

Reference

Benn,I.M. and Tucker, R.W. 1988, An Introduclion to Spinors and Geometry, Adam Hilge.

Others to be advised.

MATH522 INTRODUCTION TO CATEGORY THEORY IOcp

Hours About 27 lecture hours - Full year

Examination One 2 hour paper

Content

This course is geared to an examination of the concept of "naturality" in mathematics. Categories and functors will be be introduced as unifying concepts underl ying much of mathematics. Some connections with, and applications to Computer Science will be explored. Adjoint functors will be discussed in some depth and illustrated by applications to various branches of mathematics, particularly group theory. The existence of adjoint functors under certain conditions and a monadic approach to universal algebra will end the course.

Text

MacLane, S. 1971, Categoriesforlhe Working Mathematician, Pringer.

References

Arbib, M. & Manes, E.G.Arrows, 1975,StructuresandFunctor s: The Categorical Imperative , Academi.

Arbib, M. &Manes, E.G. 1986.Algebraic Approachesto Program SemanJics Springer.

Barr, M. & Wells, C. 1990, Calegory Theory for Computing Science, Prentice HajJ.

Walters, R. F.e. 1991, CalegoriesandComputer Science,.Carslaw

MATH523 GREEK MATHEMATICS AND ITS HISTORY 10cp

Hours Full year

Assessment The course will be assessed by essays and seminars

References Presented during the course.

Contenl

An in-depth study of Greek mathematics from about 500RC to

POSTGRADUATE SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS

500AD. There will be 27 lectures. In addition students will be expected to read. in translation, substantial parts of original works and to interpret and comment upon those works verbally and in writing. Links with the mathematics of other cultures will

also be explored.

MATH524 DEVELOPMENT OF CONTEMPORARY ALGEBRA IOcp

This course of27 lectures will examine what mathematics can be considered "algebra" and how it has developed from Babylonian times to about 1930. It will concentrate on those streams which appear to have had a bearing on the present state of the subject rather than on interesting sideshoots. Considerable use will be made of source material (mostly in English translation).

Hours Full year

Assessment The course will be assessed by essays and seminars.

MATH525 ADVANCED TOPIC IN ANALYSIS IOcp

Prerequisite MA T1I31O


Contenl

This will usually be a choice of one of the following.

Operatorlllcory: Linearoperators on Hilbert and general Banach spaces will be studied. The course will largely concentrate on spectral theory, in particular for compact and compact normal operators.

References

Dunford.N. & Schwarts,J. 1950,LinearOperators, Interscience.

Taylor, A.E. & Lay, D.C. 1980, Introduction to FWICtional Analysis, Wiley.

Fixed Point Theory and Applications: The basic theorems of Brouwer. Schauder-Tychonoff, Kakutani and Leray-Schauder degree theory will be developed, extended and applied.

References

Smart, D.R. 1974, Fixed Poinl Theorems, Cambridge University

Press.

Shashkin Yu, 1991, A. Fixed Poi.nts Amer. Math. Soc./Math. Assoc. of Amer.

The Geometric Theory of Banach Spaces: The contents will include: reflexivity, dualities between convexity and smoothness, the external structure of convex sets, basic sequences, superflexivity. rcnonnings and the theory of Type.

References

Beauzamy, n. 1985, Introduction to Banach Spaces and their Geometry. North Holland.

Jameson, GJ.O. 1974, Topology and Normed Spaces Chapman and Hall.

The choice of Topic may vary from year to year, in part based on sludent interesls.

145

SECfION EIGHT

MATHS26 MODELS OF BIOLOGICAL PATTERN FORMATION 10cp

Prerequisites MATH201. MATH202, MATH203, MATH213, MATH315.

HOUTS About 27 lecture hours - Full Year.

Examination One 2 hour paper

Conlent

In 1952, Turing suggestedthal, under certain conditions, chemicals can react and diffuse in such a manner as to produce steady state heterogeneous spatial patterns of chemical Of "morphogen" concentration. This topic will discuss a number of models of pattern generation which lead to a system of reaction-<liffusion equations. These will be analyzed in detail and the conditions under which patterns are likely to occur will be characterized.

References

Murray. J.D. 1989. Mathematical Biology. Springer.

Segel, L.A. 1984, Modelling Dynamic Phenomena in Molecular and Cellular Biology, Cambridge.

146

POSTGRADUA lE SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS SECTION NINE

SUBJECT COMPUTER NUMBERS

Number Subjecl Points

LEVEL 100 SUBJECTS

EAMSI01 Concepts of Ecology 10

EAMSIII Systems Approach in Ecology 10

EAMSI02 Monitoring and Statistics I 10

EAMSII2 Monitoring and Statistics II 10

EAMCI03 Contemporary Environmental Philosophy 10

EAMCII3 Environment and Human Values I 10

EAMSI04 Environmental Planning and Pollution Control Legislation 10

EAMSII4 Local and Regional Environmental Issues 10

AVlAI09 Introductory Meteorology 5

AVlAIIO Introductory Navigation 5

AVlAI II Introductory Aerodynamics 5

AVlA112 Introductory Human Factors 10

AVlA113 Aircraft Performance & Systems 5

AVlAII4 Flight Rules & Procedures 5

AVlAII5 Reciprocating Engines 5

AVlA116 Commercial Meteorology 5

A VlAI 17 Navigation 5

AVlAII8 Aerodynamics 5

AVlAII9 Aviation Psychology & Medicine 5

AVlAI20 Aviation Law, Commercial Flight Rules and Procedures 10

AVlAI21 Aircraft Systems & Propulsion 5

AVlAI23 Aircraft Performance & Loading 5

Number Subjecl Points

BIOLIOI Plant & Animal Biology 10

BIOLl02 Cell Biology. Genetics & Evolution 10

CHEMIOI Chemistry 101 10

CHEMI02 Chemistry 102 10

COMPIOI Computer Science ] 20

GEOGIO! Introduction to Physical Geography 10

GEOGI02 Introduction to Human Geography 10

GEOLIOI The Environment 10

GEOLl02 Earth Materials 10

INFOIOI Introduction to Information Systems 10

MAQMI35 Mathematics IA 20

MAQMI36 Mathematics IB 20

MAQMI46 Foundation Studies in Elementary Mathematics 15

MAQMI47 Mathematics IEC 10

MATH II I Mathematics III 10

MATHII2 Mathematics 112 10

MATHI02 Mathematics 102 10

MATHI03 Mathematics 103 10

PHYSIOI Physics 101 10

PHYSI02 Physics 102 10

PHYSI03 Physics 103 10

PSYCIOI Psychology Introduction 1 10

PSYCI02 Psychology Introduction 2 10

STATlO! Introductory Statistics 10

147

SECfION NINE

Number Subject Points

LEVEL 200 SUBJECTS

EAMS201

EAMS211

EAMS202

EAMS212

EAMC203

EAMC213

EAMS290

EAMS291

EAMS292

EAMS293

AVlA207

AVlA208

AVlA209

AVlA210

AVlA211

AVlA212

AVlA213

AVlA214

AVlA218

AVlA219

AVlA220

AVlA221

AVlA222

AVlA223

BIOL201

BJOL202

BIOL204

BJOL205

BIOL206

BIOL207

CHEM211

CHEM221

CHEM231

CHEM241

CHEM251

CHEM261

COMP201

COMP202

COMP203

Agricultural Systems

Industrial and Urban Systems

System Dynamics and Data Analysis I

System Dynamics and Data Analysis II

Environment and Human Values II

Development and Social Impact Assessment

Hydrology and Soils Analysis

Water Resources Management

Plant Systematics and Plant Ecology

Animal Systematics and Animal Ecology

Aviation Meteorology

Instrument Navigation

Long Range Navigation

Compressible Aerodynamics

Jet Engines

Human Factors

Aircraft Structures & Materials

Jet Aircraft Flight Planning

Advanced Aircraft Perfonnance

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

5

5

5

5

5

10

5

10

5

High Altitude Meteorology and Forecasting 5

Aircraft Fatigue Management 5

Human Performance in Multi-Crew Operations 5

Management in Aviation 5

Aviation Computing and Electronics 5

Biochemistry 10

Animal Physiology 10

Cell & Molecular Biology

Molecular Genetics

Plant Physiology

Ecology

Analytical Chemistry

Inorganic Chemistry

Organic Chemistry

Physical Chemistry

Applied Chemistry


Advanced Data Struct ure

Computer Architecture

Assembly Language

COMP204 Programming Language Semantics

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

5

5

5

5

5 COMP205 System Programming

148

SUBJECf COMPUTER NUMBERS

Number SubjecI Points

COMP206 Theory of Computation 5

5

\0

5

\0

\0

10

\0

10

10

5

10

10

10

10

5

10

20

10

I

COMP212 Introduction to Programming

COMP241

COMP299

GEOG201

GEOG202

GEOG203

GEOG204

GEOG207

GEOG208

GEOL211

GEOL212

GEOL213

GEOL214

GEOL215

GEOL216

MAQM214

MAQM235

MAQM236

MAQM237

MATH201

MATH202

MATH203

MATH204

MATH205

MATH206

MATH207

MATH209

MATH210

MATH211

MATH212

MATH213

MATH214

MATH215

MATH216

MATH217

MATH218

PHlL207

PHYS201

PHYS202

PIIYS203

PHYS205

Cognitive Science

Project

Methods in Physical Geography

Methods in Human Geography

Biogeography & Qimatology

Geomorphology of Australia

Population, Culture & Resources

Cities and Regions

Optical Mineralogy

Introductory Petrology

Ancient Environments & Organisms

Geological Structures & Resources

Geology Field Course 215

Geology Field Course 216

Quantitative Methods

Mathematics IIA

Mathematics IIB

Mathematics TIC

Multivariable Calculus


Ordinary Differential Equations 1

Real Analysis

Analysis of Metric Spaces

Complex Analysis 1

Complex Analysis 2

Algebra

Geometry 1

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

Group Theory 5

Discrete Mathematics 5

Mathematical Modelling 5

Mechanics 5

Operations Research 5

Numerical Analysis 5

Linear Algebra 1 5

Linear Algebra 2 5

Scientific Knowledge and Scientific Method 10

Quantum Mechanics & Electromagnetism 10

Mechanics & Thennal Physics 10

Solid State & Atomic Physics 10

Scientific Measurement Principles, Processes and Applications 10

SECfION NINE

Number

PSYC201

PSYC202

PSYC203

PSYC204

STATZOI

STATZ02

STATZ03

Subject

Foundations for Psychology

Basic Processes

Developmental & Social Processes

Individual Processes

Mathematical Statistics

Regression Analysis

Queues & Simulation

STA 1'204 Non-parametric Statistics

STA 1'205 Engineering Statistics

LEVEL 300 SUBJECTS

EAMS301

EAMS311

EAMS302

EAMS303

EAMC313

EAMS304

EAMS314

EAMS390

EAMS391

EAMS392

EAMS393

Environmental Management I

Environmental Management TI

Specialist Study

Occupational Hygiene and Toxicology

Social Aspects of Environmental Health

Regional and National Environmental Issues

Environmental Impact Assessment

Soil Conversation and Management

Water and Soils Applications and Modelling

Rora Component of Environmental Impact Assessment

Fauna Component of Environmental Impact Assessment

Aircraft Design

Advanced Aircraft Operations

Aviation Instruction

Advanced Navigation

Advanced Aviation Instruction

Applied Aerodynamics

Directed Study

Advanced Aviation Management

Flight Deck Perfonnance

Aviation Climatology

Aircraft Stability and Control

Aviation Instruction Practicum r

Aviation Instruction Practicum II

Cell Processes

Reproductive Physiology

Environmental Plant Physiology

Whole Plant Development

Immunology

Points

\0

10

10

10

10

10

5

5

5

10

\0

20

10

10

\0

10

10

10

10

10

5

10

10

10

10

5

10

5

5

5

5

5

5

10

10

10

10

10

AVlA305

AVlA306

AVlA308

AVlA310

AVlA311

AVlA312

AVlA314

AVlA315

AVlA316

AVlA3I7

AVlA318

AVlA320

AVlA321

BIOLJOI

BIOL302

BIOLJ03

BIOLJ04

BIOL305

BIOLJ07 Molecular Biology of Plant Development 10

Number

BIOLJ09

BIOLJIO

BIOLJl1

BIOLJI2

CHEM311

CHEM312

CHEM313

CHEM314

CHEM321

CHEM322

CHEM323

CHEM33 I

CHEM332

CHEM333

CHEM334

CHEM335

CHEM341

CHEM342

CHEM343

CHEM361

COMP301

COMP302

COMP303

COMP304

COMP305

COMP306

COMP307

COMP308

COMP391

GEOG301

GEOG302

GEOG304

GEOG305

GEOG306

GEOG309

GEOG31O

GEOG311

GEOG315

GEOG316

GEOL311

GEOL312

GEOL313


SubjecI

Molecular Biology

Microbiology

Pow.

10

10

Environmental Biology 10

Animal Development 10

Analytical Chemistry 10

Chemometrics S

Industrial Chemical Analysis S

Trace Analysis in Environmental Systems S

Inorganic Chemistry 10

Metal-Metal Bonding in ClUster Chemistry 5

Bioinorganic Co-ordination Chemistry 5

Organic Chemistry 10

Heterocyclic Chemistry 5

Organic Reaction Mechanism 5

Identification of Natural Compounds 5

Organic Spectroscopy 5

Physical Chemistry 10

Electrochemical Solar Energy Conversion 5

Molecular Spectroscopy 5


Compiler Design

Artificial Intelligence

Computer Networks

Database Design

Design and Analysis of Algorithms

Computer Graphics

Software Engineering Principles

Operating Systems

Special Topic 1

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

Advanced Methods in Physical Geography 10

Advanced Methods in Human Geography 10

The Biosphere & ConselVation 10

Climatic Problems 10

Geography of Australia An Historical Perspective 10

Society & Space 10

Directed Studies in Human Geography 10

Hydrology 10

Production, Work & Territory 10

Directed Studies in Physical Geography 10

Igneous Petrology &Crustal Evolution 10

Metamorphic Petrology 10

Structural Geology & Geophysics 10

149

SECTION NINE

Number

GE0L314

GE0L315

GE0L316

GE0L317

GEOL318

GEOL319

GEOL320

GE0L321

MAQM335

MAQM336

MAQM337

MATH301

MATH302

MATH303

MATH304

MATH305

MATH306

MATH307

MATH308

MATH309

MATH310

MATH311

MATH312

MATH313

MATH314

MATH315

MATH316

MATH317

MATH318

PHYS301

PHYS302

PHYS303

PHYS304

PHYS305

PSYOOI

PSY002

PSY003

PSY004

PSY005

PSY006

PSY007

150

Subject Points

Stratigraphic Methods 10

Sedimentology 10

Geology of Fuels 10

Resource & Exploration Geology 10

Geology Logging Course 318 5

Geology Field Course 319 5

Geology of Quaternary Environments 10

Groundwater and Soils Not in 1993 10

Mathematics lIlA 20

Mathematics IIIB 15

Mathematics IIlC 15

Logic & Set Theory 10

General Tensors & Relativity 10

Variational Methods and Integral Equations

Ordinary Differential Equations 2


Auid Mechanics

Quantum & Statistical Mechanics

Geometry 2

Combinatorics

Functional Analysis

Measure Theory & Integration

Algebra

Numerical Analysis (rheory)

Optimization

Mathematical Biology

Industrial Modelling

Number Theory

Topology

Mathematical Methods & Quantum

JO

10

10

JO

JO

\0

\0

\0

\0

\0

10

10

\0

\0

\0

\0

Mechanics 10

Electromagnetism & Electronics 10

Atomic, Molecular & Solid State Physics 10

Statistical Physics & Relativity 10

Nuclear Physics & Advanced

Electromagnetism 10

Advanced Foundations for Psychology 10

Independent Project 10

Basic Processes 1 10

Basic Processes 2 10

Individual Processes 10

Advanced Social Processes 10

Advanced Applied Topics in Psychology 1 10

Number

PSY008

PSY009

STAT301

STAT302

STAT303

SUBJECT COMPUTER NUMBERS

Subject Points

Advanced Applied Topics in Psychology 2 10

Topics in Neural Science

Statistical Inference

Study Design

Generalized Linear Models

ST A T304 Time Series Analysis

10

JO

JO

\0

\0

LEVEL 400 SUBJECTS

EAMS401

EAMS402

EAMS404

AVIA401

AVIA402

AVIA403

AVIA404

AVIA405

BIOL401

BI0L402

BI0L405

BI0L406

CHEM40J

CHEM402

CHEM405

CHEM406

GEOG4OJ

GEOG402

GEOG405

GEOG406

GEOG491

GEOG492

GEOL401

GEOL402

GEOL405

GE0L406

MAQM435

MAQM436

MAQM437

MATH401

MATH402

MATH405

MATH406

PHYS401

PHYS402

PSYC401

Environmental Management

Seminar Series

Research Project

Aviation Honours 401

Aviation Research Methodology

Technology in Aviation

The Human Variable in Aviation

Aviation Honours - Thesis

Biology Honours 401

Biology Honours 402

Biology Diploma 405

Biology Diploma 406

Chemistry Honours 401

Chemistry Honours 402

Chemistry Diploma 405

Chemistry Diploma 406

Geography Honours 401

Geography Honours 402

Geography Diploma 405

Geography Diploma 406


Environmental Studies Minor Project

Geology Honours 401

Geology Honours 402

Geology Diploma 405

Geology Diploma 406

Mathematics IVA

MaLhematics IVB

Mathematics IVC



Mathematics Diploma 405

Mathematics Diploma 406

Physics Honours 401

Physics Honours 402

Psychology Honours 401

20

20

40

20

\0

\0

\0

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

20

JO

40

40

40

40

\0

JO

10

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

I I

I l, I I

I ~

SECfION NINE

Number

PSYC402

PSYC403

PSYC404

PSYC405

PSYC406

STAT401

STAT402

STAT403

STAT404

STAT405

STAT406

STAT407

STAT408

STAT409

STAT4JO

Subject

Psychology Honours 402

Psychology 403

Psychology 404

Psychology Diploma 405

Psychology Diploma 406

Probability Theory

Analysis of Categorical Data

Demography and Survival Analysis

Robust Regression and Smoothing

Statistical Consulting

Methods for Quality Improvement

Advanced Topics in Statistics

Project

Project

Project

STAT4J1 Project

LEVEL SOO SUBJECTS

GEOG591

GEOG592

GEOG594

GEOG595

GEOG596

MATH501

MATH502

MATH503

MATH504

MATH505

MATH506

MATH507

MATH508

MATH509

MATH5JO

MATH5J1

MATH512

MATH513

MATH514

MATH515

MATH516

MATH517

MATH518

MATH519

Environmental Studies Major Project I

Environmental Studies Major Project II




Astrophysical Applications of Magnetohydrodynamics

Banach Algebra

Convex Analysis

Auid Statistical Mechanics

Foundations of Modem Differential Geometry

History of Anal ysis to Around 1900

Linear Operators

Mathematical Physiology

Nonlinear Oscillations

Perturbation Theory

Quantum Mechanics

Radicals and Annihilators

Symmetry

Viscous Flow Theory

Geometrical Mechanics

Concrete Group Theory

Analysis of Topological Structures

Lie Groups and Algebras with Applications 10 Differential F..quations

General Relali vii y

Points

40

30

50

40

40

JO

\0

\0

\0

\0

JO

\0

\0

20

30

40

30

30

20

\0

\0

\0

10

\0

\0

\0

\0

\0

\0

\0

\0

\0

\0

10

\0

\0

10

10

\0

10

Number

MATH520

MATH521

MATH522

MATH523

MATH524

MATH525


Subject

C*·Algebras

Clifford Algebras and Spioors

Introduction to Category Theory

Greek MaLhematics and its History

Development of Contemporary Algebra

Advanced Topic in Analysis

Points

\0

\0

JO

10

JO

JO MATH526 Models of Biological Pattern Fonnation 10

LEVEL 600 SUBJECTS

ASTK695

ASTK696

ASTK697

ASTK698

EAMS695

EAMS696

EAMS697

EAMS698

BI0L695

BI0L696

BI0L697

BJ0L698

CHEM695

CHEM696

CHEM697

CHEM698

GE0L695

GE0L696

GE0L697

GEOL698

MATH695

MATH696

MATH697

MATII698

PHYS695

PHYS696

PHYS697

PHYS698

STAT695

Foundations of Applied Science & Technology 40

Topics in Applied Science & Technology 40

Advanced Topics in Applied Science & Technology Not in 1993 40

Project Not in 1993 40

Foundations of Environmental Assessment & Management 40 Topics in Environmental Assessment & Management 40

Advanced Topics in Environmental Assessment & Management Not in 1993 40


Foundations of Biological Sciences 40

Topics in Biological Sciences 40

Advanced Topics in Biological Sciences Not in 1993 40


Foundations of Chemistry 40

Topics in Chemistry 40

Advanced Topics in Chemistry Not in 1993 40


40 Foundations of Geology

Topics in Geology 40

Advanced Topics in Geology Not in 1993 40


Foundations of Mathematics 40

Topics in Mathematics 40

Advanced Topics in Mathematics Not in 1993 40


Foundations of Physics 40

Topics in Physics 40

Advanced Topics in Physics Not in 1993 40


Foundations of Statistics 40

151

SECfION NINE

Number

STAT696

STAT697

STAT698

152

Subject

Topics in Statistics

Advanced Topics in Statistics Not in 1993

Project Not in 1993

Points

40

40

40


I i

I I ,

I ,

I I

AE N AT L NUR AN AS SC M W J B EG UC CG CE EB G CCK CCW ED CB CT Q p E EE EA EF ES C GH GDT GY H HH HT La MW v A EC K D Y RW SB SH SW

~ ~ THE UNIVERSITY OF NEWCASTLE CAMPUS LAYOUT

ABORIGINAL EDUCATION CENTRE ARCHITECTURE BUILDING ART BUILDING AUCHMUTY LIBRARY 2NUR-FM RADIO STATION ANIMAL HOUSE ANIMAL STORE AUCHMUTY SPORTS CENTRE AVIATION BUILDING BEHAVIOURAL SCIENCES BUILDING BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES BUILDING B01: LECTURE THEATRE BULK SOLIDS ENGINEERING CENTRAL ADMINISTRATION: The Chancellery CENTRAL GARAGE CERAMICS CHEMICAL AND MATERIALS ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY BUILDING CHILD CARE CENTRE - KINT AlBA CHILD CARE CENTRE - WONNA YBA CIVIL ENGINEERING AND SURVEYING COMMONWEALTH BANK COMPUTING TEACHING BUILDING DRAMA STUDIO DRAMA THEATRE EOl: LECTURE THEATRE ELECTRICAL AND COMPUTER ENGINEERING ENGINEERING ADMINISTRATION . ENGINEERING CLASSROOMS ENGINEERING SCIENCE GEOLOGY BUILDING GREAT HALL GRIFFITH DUNCAN THEATRE GYMNASIUM HOl: BASDEN THEATRE HUNTER BUILDING HUNTER TECHNOLOGY CENTRE LECTURERS OFFICES MAINTENANCE WORKSHOP MATHEMATICS BUILDING MCMULUN BUILDING MECHANICAL ENGINEERING MEDICAL SCIENCES BUILDING PHYSICS BUILDING PROPOSED 2NUR-FM STUDIOS RICHARDSON WING SCIENCE BUILDING STAFF HOUSE SCULPTURE WORKSHOPS

RS SOCIAL SCIENCES BUILDING SE SPECIAL EDUCATION CENTRE SP SPORTS PAVILION SH STAFF HOUSE TB TEMPORARY OFFICE BUILDINGS TC TENNIS COURTS TG TRACTOR GARAGE TA TUNRA ANNEXE U UNIVERSITY UNION US UNIVERSITY UNION - HUNTER VA VISUAL ARTS/ MEDIA STUDIES

sri !DENTS RESIDENCES EH EDWARDS HALL EV EVATT HOURS (with proposed extensions) IH INTERNATIONAL HOUSE (with proposed

extenSions UV Site for new student residential complex

currently University Village

--"---./

, /' /~/

(~'~,/ \(

"~j' , TG i '~

l I,

\ Sports field 3

2

faculty of science and mathematics faculty handbook 1993 › 2011 › 02 › faculty_of... ·...

Documents